KR20230095064A - Configure your display for media projection and wireless charging - Google Patents

Abstract

Disclosed herein are systems, apparatus, methods, and non-transitory computer readable media relating to display components, which may be fixed or movable. The display configuration may be configured to facilitate media display on opposite sides. The display construction may be at least partially transparent and may be viewed through it. A variety of installation components and kits are disclosed, as well as various interaction capabilities with the display construction. A wireless charger embedded within a fixture and/or real property of a facility is further disclosed.

Description

Display components for media projection and wireless charging

[0001] This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63/246,770, filed on September 21, 2021, entitled "DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION AND WIRELESS CHARGING"; US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63/212,483, filed on June 18, 2021, entitled "DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION AND WIRELESS CHARGING"; US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63/170,245, filed April 2, 2021, entitled "DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION AND WIRELESS CHARGING"; US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63/154,352, filed February 26, 2021, entitled "DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION AND WIRELESS CHARGING"; US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63/115,842, entitled "DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION", filed on November 19, 2020; US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63/211,400, filed on June 16, 2021, entitled "DISPLAY CONSTRUCT AND FRAMING FOR MEDIA PROJECTION"; US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63/135,021, filed January 8, 2021, entitled "CONFIGURATION OF MEDIA DISPLAY IN A FACILITY"; and US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63/247,684, filed on September 23, 2021, entitled "CONFIGURATION ASSOCIATED WITH MEDIA DISPLAY IN A FACILITY." This application also relates to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63/115,842, filed on November 19, 2020, entitled "DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION"; and US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63/154,352, filed February 26, 2021, entitled "DISPLAY CONSTRUCT FOR MEDIA PROJECTION AND WIRELESS CHARGING." This application claims priority as a continuation-in-part from International Patent Application No. PCT/US20/53641, filed on September 30, 2020, entitled "TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND MEDIA DISPLAY", and claims priority from International Patent Application PCT /US20/53641 is U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/911,271, filed on October 5, 2019, entitled "TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND TRANSPARENT DISPLAY"; US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/952,207, entitled "TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND TRANSPARENT DISPLAY", filed on December 20, 2019; US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/975,706, filed February 12, 2020, entitled "TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND MEDIA DISPLAY"; Priority is claimed from US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 63/085,254, filed on September 30, 2020, entitled "TANDEM VISION WINDOW AND MEDIA DISPLAY". International Patent Application No. PCT/US20/53641 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application No. 16/950,774, filed on November 17, 2020, entitled "DISPLAYS FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS", and is a U.S. Patent Application Ser. No. 16/950,774 is a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application No. 16/608,157, filed on October 24, 2019, entitled "DISPLAYS FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS", which is , National Phase Entry of International Patent Application No. PCT/US18/29476 entitled "DISPLAYS FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS", filed on April 25, 2018, and International Patent Application PCT/US18/29476, (i) US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/607,618, filed on December 19, 2017, entitled "ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY FIELD"; (ii) US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/523,606, filed on June 22, 2017, entitled "ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY"; (iii) US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/507,704, filed May 17, 2017, entitled "ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY"; (iv) US Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/506,514, filed May 15, 2017, entitled "ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY"; and (v) U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/490,457, filed on April 26, 2017, entitled "ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS WITH TRANSPARENT DISPLAY TECHNOLOGY." International Patent Application No. PCT/US20/53641 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application No. 17/083,128, entitled "BUILDING NETWORK", filed on October 28, 2020, and is a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application No. 17 /083,128 is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 16/664,089, entitled "BUILDING NETWORK", filed on October 25, 2019, and U.S. Patent Application No. 16/664,089, filed on May 2019 International Patent Application No. PCT/US19/30467 filed on the 2nd, entitled "EDGE NETWORK FOR BUILDING SERVICES", is entering the national phase, and the International Patent Application No. PCT/US19/30467 was filed on May 2, 2018 U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 62/666,033, filed on April 25, 2018, also entitled "TINTABLE WINDOW SYSTEM FOR BUILDING SERVICES". International Patent Application No. PCT/US18/29460, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/607,618, No. 62/523,606, No. 62/507,704, U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/506,514, and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/490,457. International Patent Application No. PCT/US20/53641 is also a continuation-in-part of U.S. Patent Application No. 17/081,809, entitled "TINTABLE WINDOW SYSTEM COMPUTING PLATFORM", filed on October 27, 2020, and is a U.S. Patent Application Ser. No. 17/081,809 is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application No. 16/608,159, filed on October 24, 2019, entitled "TINTABLE WINDOW SYSTEM COMPUTING PLATFORM", and is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application No. 16/608,159 is the national phase entry of international patent application No. PCT/US18/29406, filed on April 25, 2018, entitled "TINTABLE WINDOW SYSTEM COMPUTING PLATFORM", and international patent application PCT/US18/29406 is the United States Priority from Patent Application No. 62/607,618, U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/523,606, U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/507,704, U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/506,514, and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 62/490,457 claim This application also claims priority as a continuation-in-part from U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 17/338,562, filed on June 3, 2021, entitled "DISPLAYS FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS," and claims priority from U.S. Patent Application No. 17 /338,562 is a continuation of U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 16/950,774, filed on November 17, 2020, entitled "DISPLAYS FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS." Each of the patent documents cited above are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.

Various facilities (eg buildings) are installed with windows, eg on their facades. Windows provide a way to view the environment outside the facility. In some facilities, windows may occupy a significant portion of the facility façade. Users may request use of the window surface area to view various media (eg, for entertainment purposes, to process data, and/or to conduct video conferences). Sometimes a user may wish to optimize the use of interior space for visualizing media (eg, by using a window surface). The media may be electronic media and/or optical media. Users can request to view media with minimal impact on visibility through the window. Media may be displayed through an at least partially transparent display. Sometimes viewing media may require a tinted (eg, darker) background. Occasionally, a user may wish to shade their inner perimeter. Occasionally, the lifespan of a media display (eg, an OLED display) may be compromised over time, such as by ultraviolet (UV) radiation, heat, and atmospheric components. Such damage may reduce long-term use of the media display. From time to time, users may wish to augment an exterior view with overlays, augmented reality, and/or lighting. In certain settings, having an architectural element that facilitates (eg, simultaneous) viewing of two (eg, identical or different) media displayed on opposite sides of an architectural element (eg, a structure); It may be beneficial to look through the architectural elements (when not displayed and/or when media is displayed). In certain configurations, it may be beneficial to move the display composition (eg, in real time during its operation and/or when the display composition is not in operation). The present invention provides a solution to these and other problems.

In one aspect, disclosed herein are display constructions incorporating a window (eg, a viewing window, such as a tintable window). The viewing window may or may not include an integrated glass unit. The display construction may include one or more glass panes. The display may include at least one display matrix. The display matrix may include, for example, at least partially transparent light emitting diodes (LEDs). The display may include a liquid crystal display (LCD).

In one aspect, disclosed herein is a display construction comprising an intermediate support structure and at least one pair of display matrices that display media on opposite sides of the support structure supporting the at least one pair of display matrices. The support structure and display matrix may be at least partially transparent to visible light. The display construction may be installed within a framing coupled to the railing, thereby facilitating its (eg, lateral) mobility. The framing may be configured to accommodate one or more circuit boards that facilitate display of media on the display matrix.

In another aspect, a viewing (eg, tintable) window is used (eg, as a background) to aid in shading and/or contrast of a display composition. The shading can be outboard of the display composition (eg, in a direction away from the viewer). The portion of the support structure behind the display construction may be shaded or shaded (eg, using tintable or tinted windows). The viewing window may be active (eg, tintable) or passive. For example, the viewing window may include a tint that cannot be changed (eg, controllably and/or electronically). The viewing window has a tint (eg, shading) that (i) cannot be electronically altered and/or (ii) can be optically altered (eg, due to illumination of the viewing window by external lighting such as sunlight and/or streetlights). ) may be included. Shading may include phosphor coating, application of black pigment, and/or glass tinting. Tint (eg, shading) can be static or dynamic (eg, using tintable glass). Shading may or may not be electronically controlled. Shading can be passive. Tints (eg, shading) may be transparent or opaque. Tints can include visible colors (eg, any color of the rainbow, such as blue or yellow). For example, the color may be brown, gray or black. The tint may be at least partially transparent. The transparent tint facilitates the transition of a significant portion (e.g., greater than about 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 80%, 90% or 95%) of the intensity and/or wavelength perceived by the average human eye. It can, or the tint can be completely transparent (eg, to what the average human eye perceives). Shading may be disposed on the back side of the display construction (eg, as an added and/or laminated layer). The back side of the display composition is the side opposite the viewer's side (eg, the surface of the display composition 101 facing the window 102 (a partial view shown)). The shading may be placed on a support structure that is coupled to and disposed behind the display construction (eg, on a wall, board, or window coupled to and disposed behind the display construction, such as at 102 in FIG. 1 ). .

In another aspect, a display composition may include a material (eg, as a background) to aid in shading and/or contrast of media displayed as part of the display composition. Shading can be outboard of a transparent display. The materials may be incorporated into polymers, resins and/or glass as part of the display construction.

In another aspect, the material (eg, within the viewing window and/or media construction) extends the life of the transparent display.

In another aspect, the display may be controlled separately from or in conjunction with the control of the tintable window (eg, by a separate controller or by the same controller).

In some embodiments, a method for viewing an environment outside a viewing window may include viewing (eg, tintable) display components while being operably coupled to the viewing (eg, tintable) window and within the field of view of the user and the environment outside, for example. Discloses using any of the systems and/or devices disclosed herein to view the environment outside of a window.

pattern)의 형성을 방지하도록, 그리고/또는 (iii) 제1 디스플레이 매트릭스 및 제2 디스플레이 매트릭스가 미디어를 투영하는 것을 중지할 때 장치를 통해 보는 것을 허용하도록 구성된다.In another aspect, an apparatus for viewing media includes a first display matrix configured for viewing first media; a second display matrix configured for viewing second media; and an intermediate support structure, the intermediate support structure to support (I) the first display matrix and the second display matrix, and (II) the intermediate support opposite the first side and the first media from the first side of the intermediate support structure. configured to facilitate viewing of a second media from a second side of the structure, the device being (i) mobile, (ii) formed by any overlapping of a first display matrix and a second display matrix; Moiré pattern (

pattern), and/or (iii) allow viewing through the device when the first display matrix and the second display matrix stop projecting media.

In some embodiments, the device is configured to be movable during projection of the first media and/or the second media. In some embodiments, the device is configured to be electrically and/or automatically movable. In some embodiments, the device is configured to be attached to at least one railing. In some embodiments, at least one railing is disposed on a floor and/or ceiling. In some embodiments, the device further comprises at least one frosted window configured to prevent formation of a moiré pattern formed by any overlapping of the first display matrix and the second display matrix. In some embodiments, the device further includes frosted windows configured together to prevent formation of a moiré pattern formed by any overlapping of the first display matrix and the second display matrix. In some embodiments, the device further includes a first window protecting the first display matrix, and a second window protecting the second display matrix. In some embodiments, a first window contacts a first display matrix that contacts an intermediate support structure that contacts a second display matrix that contacts a second window to form a display composition. In some embodiments, a first window is attached to a first display matrix attached to an intermediate support structure attached to a second display matrix attached to a second window to form a display composition that is a laminate, where it forms a display composition. Attachment to do so is by using at least one polymer and/or resin. In some embodiments, the first window and/or the second window includes a dispersive material and/or a dispersive surface. In some embodiments, the intermediate support structure is transparent to allow viewing through the intermediate support structure when the first display matrix and the second display matrix stop projecting media. In some embodiments, the intermediate support structure is tinted or tintable. In some embodiments, the first media is different than the second media. In some embodiments, the first media and the second media are the same. In some embodiments, the intermediate support structure includes a dispersible material and/or a dispersible surface.

In another aspect, an apparatus for viewing media on a display configuration includes at least one controller including circuitry, the at least one controller comprising: (A) (a) a first display configured to view first media; matrix, and (b) a second display matrix configured for viewing a second media, the first display matrix and the second display matrix being supported by an intermediate support structure, the intermediate support structure being (I ) facilitate viewing first media from a first side of the intermediate support structure and (II) second media from a second side of the intermediate support structure opposite the first side, the display configuration comprising: a first display a matrix, a second display matrix, and an intermediate support structure, the display construction being (i) movable, and (ii) capable of forming a moiré pattern formed by any overlapping of the first display matrix and the second display matrix. and/or (iii) configured to allow viewing through the display configuration when the first display matrix and the second display matrix stop projecting media; and (B) instruct the first display matrix to project the first media and/or the second display matrix to project the second media.

In some embodiments, the at least one controller is operatively coupled to a network disposed within an enclosure in which the display configuration is disposed, such network to (a) transmit data and power over cables and (b) at least transmit cellular communications using a 4th or 5th generation cellular communications protocol; (c) operably couple to a plurality of different sensors configured to sense environmental characteristics of the enclosure; and/or (d) control the enclosure. It is operatively coupled to or configured to be part of a configured control system. In some embodiments, the control system is configured to control the enclosure at least in part by controlling the environment of the enclosure, the security of the enclosure, the safety of the enclosure, the safety of occupants within the enclosure, the health of occupants within the enclosure, and/or the comfort of occupants within the enclosure. It consists of In some embodiments, the control system is configured to control the enclosure at least in part by controlling at least one device in the enclosure that is operably coupled to the network. In some embodiments, the at least one controller is configured to project the first media and/or the second media while the device is movable. In some embodiments, at least one controller is configured to electrically and/or automatically move the device. In some embodiments, the device is configured to be attached to at least one railing. In some embodiments, at least one railing is disposed on a floor and/or ceiling. In some embodiments, the device further includes at least one frosted window configured to prevent formation of a moiré pattern formed by any overlap (eg, along a viewing direction) of the first display matrix and the second display matrix. include In some embodiments, the device further includes frosted windows configured together to prevent formation of a moiré pattern formed by any overlap (eg, along a viewing direction) of the first display matrix and the second display matrix. . In some embodiments, the device further includes a first window that protects the first display matrix (eg, from external influences), and a second window that protects the second display matrix (eg, from external influences). In some embodiments, a first window contacts a first display matrix that contacts an intermediate support structure that contacts a second display matrix that contacts a second window to form a display composition. In some embodiments, a first window is attached to a first display matrix attached to an intermediate support structure attached to a second display matrix attached to a second window to form a display composition that is a laminate, where it forms a display composition. The attachment to do so is at least in part by using at least one polymer and/or resin. In some embodiments, the first window and/or the second window includes a dispersive material and/or a dispersive surface. In some embodiments, the intermediate support structure is transparent to allow viewing through the intermediate support structure when the first display matrix and the second display matrix stop projecting media. In some embodiments, the intermediate support structure is tinted or tintable. In some embodiments, the at least one controller is configured to instruct the first display matrix to project the first media and the second display matrix to project a second media different from the first media. In some embodiments, the at least one controller is configured to instruct the first display matrix to project the first media and the second display matrix to project a second media identical to the first media. In some embodiments, the intermediate support structure includes a dispersible material and/or a dispersible surface.

In another aspect, a non-transitory computer readable medium for viewing media on a display configuration includes at least one processor comprising: (a) a first display matrix configured for viewing first media; and (b) configured to be operably coupled to a second display matrix configured for viewing a second media, the first display matrix and the second display matrix being supported by an intermediate support structure, the intermediate support structure comprising (I) configured to facilitate viewing of first media from a first side of the intermediate support structure and (II) second media from a second side of the intermediate support structure opposite the first side, the display configuration comprising: a first display matrix , a second display matrix, and an intermediate support structure, the display construction being (i) movable and (ii) preventing the formation of a moiré pattern formed by any overlapping of the first display matrix and the second display matrix. and/or (iii) allow viewing through the display configuration when the first display matrix and the second display matrix stop projecting media, the non-transitory computer readable medium having instructions written thereon. wherein the instructions, when executed by the at least one processor, instruct the at least one processor to: (A) project a first media onto a first display matrix and/or (B) onto a second display matrix; Execute an action including instructing to project a second media.

In some embodiments, the computer readable medium includes instructions written thereon which, when executed by at least one processor, project a first medium and/or a second medium while the display arrangement is movable. In some embodiments, the computer readable medium includes instructions written thereon which, when executed by at least one processor, cause the display configuration to be electrically and/or automatically movable. In some embodiments, the display construction is configured to attach to at least one railing. In some embodiments, at least one railing is disposed on a floor and/or ceiling. In some embodiments, the display composition further includes at least one frosted window configured to prevent formation of a moiré pattern formed by any overlapping of the first display matrix and the second display matrix. In some embodiments, the display composition further includes frosted windows configured together to prevent formation of a moiré pattern formed by any overlapping of the first display matrix and the second display matrix. In some embodiments, the display configuration further includes a first window protecting the first display matrix, and a second window protecting the second display matrix. In some embodiments, a first window contacts a first display matrix that contacts an intermediate support structure that contacts a second display matrix that contacts a second window to form a display composition. In some embodiments, a first window is attached to a first display matrix attached to an intermediate support structure attached to a second display matrix attached to a second window to form a display composition that is a laminate, where it forms a display composition. Attachment to do so is by using at least one polymer and/or resin. In some embodiments, the first window and/or the second window includes a dispersive material and/or a dispersive surface. In some embodiments, the intermediate support structure is transparent to allow viewing through the intermediate support structure when the first display matrix and the second display matrix stop projecting media. In some embodiments, the intermediate support structure is tinted or tintable. In some embodiments, the computer readable medium includes instructions written thereon which, when executed by the at least one processor, direct to project the first media on a first display matrix and the first media on a second display matrix. Instructs to project a second media different from In some embodiments, the computer readable medium includes instructions written thereon which, when executed by the at least one processor, direct to project the first media on a first display matrix and the first media on a second display matrix. Instructs to project the same second media as In some embodiments, the intermediate support structure includes a dispersible material and/or a dispersible surface. In some embodiments, the at least one processor is operatively coupled to a network disposed within an enclosure in which the display configuration is disposed, wherein the computer readable medium includes instructions written thereon, the instructions to the at least one processor. When executed by the network, (a) to transmit data and power over cables, (b) to transmit cellular communications using at least a 4th or 5th generation cellular communications protocol, (c) to detect environmental characteristics of the enclosure and/or (d) be operatively coupled to or be part of a control system configured to control the enclosure. In some embodiments, the computer readable medium contains instructions written thereon, which instructions, when executed by at least one processor, cause the control system to control the environment of the enclosure, the security of the enclosure, the safety of the enclosure, and the safety of occupants within the enclosure. , the health of an occupant within the enclosure, and/or the comfort of an occupant within the enclosure, at least in part by controlling the enclosure. In some embodiments, the computer readable medium includes instructions written thereon, which instructions, when executed by at least one processor, cause a control system to control at least one device in an enclosure that is operatively coupled to a network. Instructs to partially control the enclosure.

In another aspect, a method of viewing media on a display configuration includes projecting a first media by a first display matrix and/or projecting a second media by a second display matrix, such that the first display The matrix and the second display matrix are supported by an intermediate support structure that (I) takes the first media from the first side of the intermediate support structure and (II) the second of the intermediate support structure opposite the first side. configured to facilitate viewing of a second media from a side, wherein the display configuration includes a first display matrix, a second display matrix, and an intermediate support structure, the display configuration being (i) removable; (ii) to prevent the formation of a moiré pattern formed by any overlapping of the first display matrix and the second display matrix, and/or (iii) when the first display matrix and the second display matrix stop projecting media; It is configured to allow viewing through the composition.

In some embodiments, the method further includes projecting the first media and/or the second media while the display composition is movable. In some embodiments, the method further includes electrically and/or automatically enabling the display configuration to move. In some embodiments, the method further includes attaching the display composition to the at least one railing. In some embodiments, the method further includes placing at least one railing on a floor and/or ceiling. In some embodiments, the method further includes using at least one frosted window within the display composition to prevent formation of a moiré pattern formed by any overlapping of the first display matrix and the second display matrix. . In some embodiments, the method further includes using frosted windows that together prevent formation of a moiré pattern formed by any overlapping of the first display matrix and the second display matrix. In some embodiments, the method further includes protecting the first display matrix with a first window, and protecting the second display matrix with a second window. In some embodiments, the method further includes forming a display composition with the first window in contact with the first display matrix in contact with the intermediate support structure in contact with the second display matrix in contact with the second window. . In some embodiments, the method includes attaching a first window to a first display matrix, attaching the first window to an intermediate support structure, attaching the intermediate support structure to a second display matrix, and attaching the second display matrix to a second display matrix. 2 forming a display composition by attaching to the window; and forming the attachment using at least one polymer and/or resin. In some embodiments, the method further includes using a dispersive material and/or a dispersible surface on the first window and/or the second window. In some embodiments, a transparent intermediate support structure is used to allow viewing through the intermediate support structure when the first display matrix and the second display matrix stop projecting media. In some embodiments, the method further includes using a tinted or tintable intermediate support structure. In some embodiments, the method further includes projecting a first media onto a first display matrix, and projecting a second media different from the first media onto a second display matrix. In some embodiments, the method further includes projecting a first media onto a first display matrix, and projecting a second media identical to the first media onto a second display matrix. In some embodiments, the method further includes using a dispersible material and/or dispersible surface on the intermediate support structure. In some embodiments, the method includes operatively coupling at least one processor to a network disposed within an enclosure in which a display configuration is disposed, and to (a) transmit data and power over cables to the network, (b) at least (c) operatively coupled to a plurality of different sensors that sense environmental characteristics of the enclosure; and/or (d) controlling the enclosure. Further comprising instructing the control system to be operably coupled to or part of it. In some embodiments, the method provides a control system at least partially by controlling the environment of the enclosure, the security of the enclosure, the safety of the enclosure, the safety of occupants within the enclosure, the health of occupants within the enclosure, and/or the comfort of occupants within the enclosure. It further includes the step of instructing to control. In some embodiments, the method further includes instructing the control system to control the enclosure at least in part by controlling at least one device in the enclosure that is operably coupled to the network.

In another aspect, an apparatus for viewing media includes a first window, the first window being configured for viewing through, the first window having a first side exposed to a first external environment, and a second side opposite the first side. has a side part -; First display matrix - the first display matrix is configured for viewing a first media on a third side thereof in contact with a second side of a first window, the first display media including a fourth side opposite the third side. Ham -; a middle window, the middle window being configured for viewing therethrough, the middle window having a fifth side in contact with the fourth side of the first display matrix, and a sixth side opposite the fifth side; Second display matrix - the second display matrix is configured for viewing a second media at a seventh side thereof in contact with a fifth side of the middle window, the second display media including an eighth side opposite the seventh side. -; and a second window - the second window is configured for viewing therethrough, the second window having a ninth side in contact with the eighth side of the second display arrangement, and opposite the ninth side and exposed to a second external environment. having a tenth side;

In another aspect, a kit for operably coupling at least one device to an existing framing system of a facility includes: (i) to receive at least one device and at least one cable configured to operatively couple to a local network of the facility; (ii) have two dimensions that visibly mimic at least a portion of the framing system and a third dimension that extends beyond the facility's framing system, and (iii) visibly conceal the framing system; a framing cap portion configured to camouflage and/or mimic the same; and an engagement aid configured to secure the framing cap portion to the facility's framing system.

In some embodiments, the framing cap portion includes one or more ventilation holes. In some embodiments, one or more ventilation holes are configured to facilitate gas flow from one end of the framing cap portion to an opposite end thereof. In some embodiments, one or more ventilation holes are configured to facilitate temperature regulation of the interior of the framing cap portion. In some embodiments, one or more ventilation holes are configured to facilitate temperature regulation of the interior of the framing cap portion during temperature changes in the framing system. In some embodiments, one or more ventilation holes are configured to facilitate gas flow in the vicinity of at least one device disposed within the framing cap portion. In some embodiments, one or more ventilation holes are configured to facilitate temperature regulation in the vicinity of at least one device disposed within the framing cap portion. In some embodiments, the framing cap portion includes an insulating coating configured to reduce temperature variations within the interior of the framing portion. In some embodiments, an insulating coating is disposed on the inside of the framing cap portion. In some embodiments, the insulating coating is disposed outside the framing cap portion. In some embodiments, the kit further includes an intermediate body disposed between the framing cap portion and the framing system. In some embodiments, the intermediate body is configured to reduce thermal equilibrium between the framing system and the framing cap portion. In some embodiments, the intermediate body includes an insulating material. In some embodiments, the insulating material includes a polymer, fabric, and/or foam. In some embodiments, the intermediate body is passive. In some embodiments, the passive intermediate body includes a thermally conductive plate or thermally conductive pipe. In some embodiments, the intermediate body is active. In some embodiments, the active intermediate body includes a thermostat, circulating coolant, thermally conductive plate, thermally conductive pipe, heater or cooler. The intermediate body may include a flexible intermediate body (eg, as disclosed herein). In some embodiments, the framing cap includes a first framing cap portion and a second framing cap portion, wherein the second framing cap portion is releasably mounted (e.g., reversibly mounted and mounted) to the first framing cap portion. released) and conceal the at least one cable within the first framing cap portion and the second framing cap portion. In some embodiments, the first framing cap portion and the second framing cap portion are configured to visually disguise and/or mimic the framing system. In some embodiments, the kit further includes a bundling aid configured to bundle the at least one cable together. In some embodiments, one of the first framing cap portion and the second framing cap portion includes a holder configured to retain the at least one cable therein. In some embodiments, configuring the second framing cap portion to be releasably mounted to the first framing cap portion includes engaging and releasing the second framing cap portion with the first framing cap portion. In some embodiments, engaging includes securing the second framing cap portion to the first framing cap portion using a fastening action. In some embodiments, fastening agents include snaps, adhesives, bands, or screws. In some embodiments, one of the first framing cap portion and the second framing cap portion includes a dent, and the other of the first framing cap portion and the second framing cap portion includes the first framing cap portion and the second framing cap portion. One of the framing cap portions includes a protrusion configured to flex resiliently, providing an biasing force to hold the protrusion within the dent when the second framing cap portion and the first framing cap portion are engaged. In some embodiments, one of the first framing cap portion and the second framing cap portion includes a holder configured to retain the at least one cable therein. In some embodiments, a bundling aid configured to bundle the at least one cable together. In some embodiments, one of the first framing cap portion and the second framing cap portion includes a holder configured to retain the at least one cable therein. In some embodiments, the local network is configured to connect to at least one controller. In some embodiments, at least one controller is included in a hierarchical control system. In some embodiments, at least one controller is configured to control at least one device. In some embodiments, a facility includes a plurality of different types of devices including at least one device. In some embodiments, at least one device includes multiple devices of the same type. In some embodiments, the at least one device includes at least one of a display component, an emitter, a sensor, an antenna, a transceiver, a radar device, and/or a network communication device. In some embodiments, at least one cable is configured to transmit power and communications over the one cable. In some embodiments, at least one cable is configured to transmit media, cellular communications, control communications, power, or any combination thereof. In some embodiments, at least one cable is configured to transmit at least one of data and power. In some embodiments, the at least one cable is configured to transmit (a) at least two types of communication, (b) power, or (c) both at least two types of communication and power over one cable. In some embodiments, at least one of the at least two types of communication conforms to at least a fourth generation (4G), or fifth generation (5G) cellular communication protocol. In some embodiments, at least one device is configured to receive different media conforming to different protocols. In some embodiments, at least one device includes sensors or an ensemble of devices including (b) a sensor and an emitter. In some embodiments, at least one device includes an ensemble of devices including at least two processors, at least two circuit boards, and/or a controller. In some embodiments, at least one device comprises an ensemble of devices that includes a graphics processing unit (GPU). In some embodiments, at least one device includes a device ensemble, and an interior of the device ensemble is configured for temperature regulation. In some embodiments, temperature regulation includes using a heat sink, heat pipe, and/or gas flow. In some embodiments, at least one device includes media displays configured to project as a video wall. In some embodiments, at least one device includes a matrix of media displays. In some embodiments, the local network is configured to facilitate control of the at least one device. In some embodiments, the local network is configured to facilitate control of the facility. In some embodiments, the local network is configured to facilitate control of the facility's environment. In some embodiments, the local network is configured to facilitate control of at least one other device in the facility. In some embodiments, the local network is configured to facilitate (a) taking into account the location of personnel within the facility, (b) tracking the location of personnel within the facility, or (c) any combination thereof. In some embodiments, the local network is communicatively coupled to the building management system. In some embodiments, the local network is configured to facilitate changing the tint of at least one window framed by the framing system.

In another aspect, a method of operatively coupling at least one device to an existing framing system of a facility includes coupling the at least one device to the facility's framing system; defines an interior configured to receive at least one cable (i) configured to operably couple to at least one device and to a local network of the facility; (ii) visibly display at least a portion of the framing system; having two dimensions that mimic, and a third dimension that extends beyond the framing system, (iii) visually concealing, camouflaging and/or concealing within a framing cap portion that mimics the framing system; and releasably securing the framing cap portion to the framing system at least in part by using an engagement aid.

In some embodiments, the framing cap portion includes one or more ventilation holes. In some embodiments, the method further includes using one or more ventilation holes for gas flow from one end of the framing cap portion to an opposite end thereof. In some embodiments, the method further includes regulating a temperature inside the framing cap portion using one or more ventilation holes. In some embodiments, the method further includes regulating a temperature inside the framing cap portion during temperature changes in the framing system, using one or more ventilation holes. In some embodiments, the method further includes flowing gas near at least one device disposed within the framing cap portion using one or more ventilation holes. In some embodiments, the method further includes regulating a temperature in the vicinity of at least one device disposed within the framing cap portion, using the one or more ventilation holes. In some embodiments, the method further includes using an insulating coating of the framing cap portion to reduce temperature variations within the framing portion. In some embodiments, an insulating coating is disposed on the inside of the framing cap portion. In some embodiments, the insulating coating is disposed outside the framing cap portion. In some embodiments, the method further includes reducing the temperature equilibrium between the framing system and the framing cap portion using an intermediate body disposed between the framing cap portion and the framing system. In some embodiments, the intermediate body includes an insulating material. In some embodiments, the insulating material includes a polymer, fabric, and/or foam. In some embodiments, the intermediate body is passive. In some embodiments, the passive intermediate body includes a thermally conductive plate or thermally conductive pipe. In some embodiments, the intermediate body is active. In some embodiments, the active intermediate body includes a thermostat, circulating coolant, thermally conductive plate, thermally conductive pipe, heater or cooler. In some embodiments, the framing cap includes a first framing cap portion and a second framing cap portion, and the method includes securing at least one wall of the first framing cap portion to the window framing; retaining at least one cable inside the second framing cap portion; and releasably securing the second framing cap portion to the first framing cap portion. In some embodiments, the method further includes engaging the at least one cable within the holder of the second framing cap portion. In some embodiments, the method further includes the first framing cap portion and the second framing cap portion disguising or mimicking the framing system. In some embodiments, the method further includes bundling the at least one cable into a bundle prior to retaining the at least one cable therein. In some embodiments, one of the first framing cap portion and the second framing cap portion includes a dent, and the other of the first framing cap portion and the second framing cap portion includes a protrusion. In some embodiments, the method resiliently bends at least one of the first framing cap portion and the second framing cap portion while moving the protrusion into alignment with the dent, whereby the second framing cap portion and the first framing cap portion are bent. Further comprising engaging the cap portion. In some embodiments, one of the first framing cap portion and the second framing cap portion includes a holder. In some embodiments, the method further includes retaining the at least one cable through the holder to retain the at least one cable therein. In some embodiments, the method further includes holding the at least one cable inside the framing cap portion with a holder. In some embodiments, the method further includes connecting the local network to the at least one controller. In some embodiments, the method further includes including at least one controller in the hierarchical control system. In some embodiments, the method further includes controlling the at least one device with the at least one controller. In some embodiments, a facility includes a plurality of different types of devices including at least one device. In some embodiments, at least one device includes multiple devices of the same type. In some embodiments, the at least one device includes a display component, an emitter, a sensor, an antenna, a transceiver, a radar device, and/or a network communication device. In some embodiments, the method further includes transmitting power and communications over one of the at least one cable. In some embodiments, the method further includes transmitting media, cellular communications, control communications, power, or any combination thereof over at least one cable. In some embodiments, the method further includes transmitting at least one of data and power over at least one cable. In some embodiments, the method comprises transmitting (a) at least two types of communication, (b) power, or (c) both at least two types of communication and power over one of the at least one cable. include additional In some embodiments, at least one of the at least two types of communication conforms to at least a fourth generation (4G), or fifth generation (5G) cellular communication protocol. In some embodiments, the method further includes receiving, by the at least one device, different media conforming to a different protocol. In some embodiments, at least one device includes sensors or (b) an ensemble of devices including a sensor and an emitter. In some embodiments, at least one device includes media displays that project media as a video wall. In some embodiments, at least one device includes a matrix of media displays. In some embodiments, the method further includes the local network facilitating control of the at least one device. In some embodiments, the method further includes allowing the local network to facilitate control of the facility. In some embodiments, the method further includes the local network facilitating control of the facility's environment. In some embodiments, the method further includes the local network facilitating control of one other device in the facility. In some embodiments, the method may involve a local network facilitating (a) taking into account the location of personnel within the facility, (b) tracking the location of personnel within the facility, or (c) any combination thereof. include additional In some embodiments, the method further includes communicatively coupling the local network to the building management system. In some embodiments, the method further includes facilitating the local network to change the tint of the at least one window framed by the framing system. In some embodiments, at least one device includes an ensemble of devices including at least two processors, at least two circuit boards, and/or a controller. In some embodiments, at least one device comprises an ensemble of devices that includes a graphics processing unit (GPU). In some embodiments, the at least one device comprises a device ensemble, wherein an interior of the device ensemble is configured for temperature regulation. In some embodiments, temperature regulation includes using a heat sink, heat pipe, and/or gas flow.

In another aspect, a system for charging a mobile device at a facility includes a structure comprising a framing, framing portion, or real asset of the facility; a charging device attached to the structure and/or integrated within the cavity of the structure, constituting a wireless charging station configured to provide wireless charging to a mobile device; and a network of facilities configured to provide power to the charging device.

In some embodiments, a mobile device includes a cellular phone, laptop computer, pad, or identification tag. In some embodiments, a mobile device includes a vehicle. In some embodiments, the mobile device includes a power tool. In some embodiments, the mobile device includes dental equipment. In some embodiments, a mobile device includes a medical device. In some embodiments, a physical asset includes (i) a service device, (ii) a safety device, (iii) a security device, and/or (iv) a health device. In some embodiments, service devices include refrigerators, stoves and ovens, microwave ovens, toasters, air fryers, vacuum cleaner systems, washing machines, dishwashers, clothes dryers, food processors, media players, media screens, radios, Includes music players, heaters, coolers, ventilators, lighting, tintable windows, automatic doors, or heating ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) systems. In some embodiments, the service device is configured to coordinate the environment of the facility. In some embodiments, the safety device includes an alarm, notification system, alarm light, sensor, door, window, or lock. In some embodiments, doors, windows and/or locks are automatic. In some embodiments, framing includes window framing or door framing. In some embodiments, window framing includes mullions or transoms. In some embodiments, (i) the window framing, (ii) the door framing, or (iii) the window framing and a portion of the door framing include a material adjacent to the charging device configured to facilitate wireless charging therethrough. In some embodiments, the material is configured to cause a lack of detectable blocking of electromagnetic fields, or a reduced level of blocking of electromagnetic fields. In some embodiments, wireless charging of the wireless charging station includes electromagnetic inductive charging. In some embodiments, window framing supports at least one display component. In some embodiments, the charging device is incorporated within the window framing, constituting a charging station adjacent to the display composition. In some embodiments, the charging station is a horizontal or substantially horizontal surface configured to support a mobile device. In some embodiments, window framing supports tintable windows. In some embodiments, the network is configured to provide power to the tintable window. In some embodiments, the network is configured to provide power to display components. In some embodiments, the framing portion includes a portion of a window framing, or a portion of a door framing. In some embodiments, a portion of the window framing includes a transom or mullion. In some embodiments, real assets include furniture, factory machinery, health related machinery, service devices, or any combination thereof. In some embodiments, the charging device is configured to provide electromagnetic induction charging to a mobile device. In some embodiments, the charging device includes an induction coil configured to generate a magnetic field. In some embodiments, the charging device may be configured to generate a magnetic field that varies in strength based on an alternating current. In some embodiments, the charging device is configured to provide resonant inductive coupling. In some embodiments, the charging device includes one or more induction coils and one or more capacitors configured to create an electrical circuit having a resonant frequency. In some embodiments, the charging device is included in a plurality of wireless charging stations, each of the plurality of wireless charging stations configured to (i) provide wireless charging to a mobile device and (ii) receive power from a network. In some embodiments, the charging device is a high power charging device configured to charge at a power level of at least about 700 watts (W). In some embodiments, a high power charging device configured to charge at a power level of at least about 700 Watts (W), 1 Kilowatt (KW), 10 KW, 11 KW, 100 KW, 200 KW, 300 KW, or 500 KW. It is a device. The charging device may be a high power charging device configured to charge a power level between any of the aforementioned power levels (eg, about 700 W to about 500 KW). In some embodiments, the charging device is a low power charging device configured to charge at a power level of up to about 500 watts (W). In some embodiments, the charging device is configured to charge at a power level of up to about 50 Watts (W), 100 W, 150 W, 200 W, 250 W, 300 W, 350 W, 400 W, 450 W, or 500 W. It is a low power charging device. The charging device may be a low power charging device configured to charge at a power level between any of the aforementioned power levels (eg, between about 50 W and about 500 W). In some embodiments, the wireless charging device is configured to charge a mobile device from a distance of up to about 1000 centimeters (cm). In some embodiments, a wireless charging device may have dimensions of up to about 0.5 centimeters (cm), 1 cm, 2 cm, 4 cm, 5 cm, 8 cm, 10 cm, 25 cm, 50 cm, 75 cm, 100 cm, 250 cm, It is configured to charge a mobile device from a distance of 500 cm, 900 cm and 1000 cm. A wireless charging device may be configured to charge a mobile device from a distance between any of the aforementioned distances (eg, about 0.5 cm to about 1000 cm). In some embodiments, a wireless charging device may be configured to charge a mobile device from a distance of up to about 50 feet. In some embodiments, the wireless charging device is configured to charge a mobile device from a distance of up to about 5 feet ('), 10', 20', 30', 40', 50'. A wireless charging device may be configured to charge a mobile device from a distance between any of the aforementioned distances (eg, about 5' to about 50'). In some embodiments, the network includes a control system and the charging device is configured to be controlled by the control system. In some embodiments, the control system is configured to turn the charging device on and off. In some embodiments, the control system is configured to schedule turning the charging device on and off at selectable times. In some embodiments, the control system is configured to control the mode of operation of the charging device. In some embodiments, the control system is a control system of a facility and is configured to facilitate controlling one or more devices of the facility. In some embodiments, the control system includes or is operatively coupled to a building management system (BMS). In some embodiments, the control system is a control system of a facility and is configured to facilitate controlling the environment of the facility. In some embodiments, operation of the charging device is configured to be manually controlled. In some embodiments, the manual control is configured to operate through an application module. In some embodiments, an application module may include a graphical user interface (GUI). In some embodiments, the application module is configured for installation on a mobile device to be charged. In some embodiments, application modules are configured on devices coupled to the network. In some embodiments, operation of the charging device is configured to be operated via an application module. In some embodiments, the application module is configured to indicate the location, operating mode, and/or operating state of the charging device. In some embodiments, the charging device is included in the plurality of charging devices, and the application module is configured to indicate the location, operating mode, and/or operating state of the plurality of charging devices. In some embodiments, an application module may include a graphical user interface (GUI). In some embodiments, the GUI may be configured to indicate the location of the user and/or mobile device to be charged relative to the facility. In some embodiments, the location of the user and/or the mobile device to be charged is displayed in a digital twin of the facility that includes the building information modeling (BIM) of the facility. In some embodiments, the GUI is configured to show a virtual representation of the location and/or status of charging devices within the facility. In some embodiments, the charging device is included in the plurality of charging devices, and the GUI is configured to show a virtual representation of the location and/or status of the plurality of charging devices within the facility. In some embodiments, the network is operatively coupled to a digital twin of a facility that includes a building information modeling (BIM) of the facility. In some embodiments, the network is configured to receive updates on the location and/or status of the charging device. In some embodiments, the digital twin and/or BIM is configured to receive updates on the location and/or status of the charging device. In some embodiments, a charging device is included in a plurality of charging devices, where the network sends updates to the location and/or status of the plurality of charging devices (eg, in real time, or at times of low user activity at the facility). configured to receive In some embodiments, the charging device is included in the plurality of charging devices, and the digital twin and/or BIM provides updates on the location and/or status of the plurality of charging devices (e.g., in real time, or with low user activity at the facility). time) is configured to receive. In some embodiments, the network is operatively coupled to the hierarchical control system. In some embodiments, the network is operatively coupled to a distributed network of controllers. In some embodiments, the network is configured to transmit communications and power over a single cable. In some embodiments, the network is deployed at least partially within one or more envelopes of a facility. In some embodiments, a facility includes a building. In some embodiments, the network is deployed at least partially within the envelope of a building. In some embodiments, the network is configured to be a first wiring network installed within a building.

In another aspect, a method of charging a mobile device at a facility includes operation of any of the systems disclosed above.

In another aspect, a method of charging a mobile device at a facility includes attaching and/or integrating a charging device constituting a wireless charging station to a structure and/or integrating within a cavity of the structure, the structure being a framing, framing portion, or real asset of the facility. contains -; wirelessly charging a mobile device through a wireless charging station; and providing power to the charging device through the facility's network.

In another aspect, an apparatus for charging a mobile device at a facility includes at least one controller configured to execute an operation of any of the systems disclosed above. In some embodiments, at least one controller includes circuitry.

In another aspect, an apparatus for charging a mobile device at a facility includes at least one controller configured to: (a) operably couple to a wireless charging station and a network; (b) enabling or directing the enabling of wireless charging of mobile devices via a wireless charging station comprising a charging device attached to the structure and/or incorporated within a cavity of the structure, the structure being a framing, framing portion of the facility; or including real property -; and (c) are individually or collectively configured to provide power to, or direct the provision of, power to charging devices over the facility's network. In some embodiments, at least one controller includes circuitry.

In another aspect, a kit for operably coupling at least one device to a network includes (i) defining a thermal coupling to the device, wherein the device is operable to enclose electronics and to the network of a facility in which the device is deployed. (ii) has a heat dissipation portion, (iii) is configured to be removably coupled to the device to facilitate dissipation of heat from the device, and (iv) is removable to a facility structure and/or fixture. and a heat sink, possibly configured to be mountable, wherein the heat sink is separate from the device.

In some embodiments, the kit further includes an engagement aid configured to secure the heat sink to a facility structure and/or fixture. In some embodiments, the engagement aid includes (i) a heat sink and (ii) at least one bracket configured to be removably mounted to a structure and/or fixture of the facility. In some embodiments, the heat sink is a modular heat sink. In some embodiments, the network is configured to couple to at least one controller. In some embodiments, at least one controller is included in a hierarchical control system. In some embodiments, at least one controller is configured to control at least one device. In some embodiments, at least one device is configured to control the environment of the enclosure. In some embodiments, a facility includes a plurality of different types of devices including at least one device. In some embodiments, at least one device includes multiple devices of the same type. In some embodiments, the at least one device includes at least one of a display component, an emitter, a sensor, an antenna, a transceiver, a radar device, and/or a network communication device. In some embodiments, the at least one cable is configured to transmit power and communications over the one cable and is configured to be operatively coupled to an electronic device. In some embodiments, at least one cable is configured to transmit media, cellular communications, control communications, power, or any combination thereof, and is configured to be operatively coupled to an electronic device. In some embodiments, the at least one cable is configured to transmit at least one of data and power and is configured to be operatively coupled to an electronic device. In some embodiments, the at least one cable is configured to transmit (a) at least two types of communication, (b) power, or (c) both at least two types of communication and power over the one cable; It is configured to be operably coupled to. In some embodiments, at least one of the at least two types of communication conforms to at least a fourth generation (4G), or fifth generation (5G) cellular communication protocol. In some embodiments, at least one device is configured to receive different media conforming to different protocols. In some embodiments, at least one device includes sensors or (b) an ensemble of devices including a sensor and an emitter. In some embodiments, at least one device includes an ensemble of devices including at least two processors, at least two circuit boards, and/or a controller. In some embodiments, the at least one device comprises an ensemble of devices including at least one graphics processing unit (GPU). In some embodiments, at least one device includes a device ensemble, and an interior of the device ensemble is configured for temperature regulation. In some embodiments, the network is configured to facilitate control of at least one device. In some embodiments, the network is configured to facilitate control of the facility. In some embodiments, the network is configured to facilitate control of the facility's environment. In some embodiments, the network is configured to facilitate control of at least one other device in the facility. In some embodiments, the network is communicatively coupled to the building management system. In some embodiments, the network is configured to facilitate changing the tint of at least one window framed by the window framing system. In some embodiments, the heat dissipation portion includes fins. In some embodiments, the fin features extend substantially in a straight line. In some embodiments, the fin features include cross-cuts. In some embodiments, the fin features are curved. In some embodiments, the fin features are flared. In some embodiments, fin features are discontinuous. In some embodiments, the fin features include needles. In some embodiments, fin features are regular or irregular. In some embodiments, the heat dissipation portion includes a plate adjacent to the device. In some embodiments, the heat dissipation portion includes an elemental metal or metal alloy. In some embodiments, the metal or metal alloy includes aluminum. In some embodiments, the metal of the metal alloy includes copper. In some embodiments, the heat sink includes an active cooler. In some embodiments, the active cooler is configured to flow air through the heat dissipation portion. In some embodiments, the active cooler is configured to flow liquid through the heat dissipation portion. In some embodiments, the active cooler is configured to flow thermally conductive gel through the heat dissipation portion. In some embodiments, the heat sink being configured to be removably coupled to the device includes the ability to be (i) mounted to the device and (ii) dismounted from the device. In some embodiments, the heat sink is configured to be removably mounted to structures and/or fixtures in a facility that are (i) mounted to structures and/or fixtures in a facility and (ii) mounted from structures and/or fixtures in a facility. Including the ability to unlock. In some embodiments, configuring the heat sink to be removably coupled to the device includes surface to surface bonding. In some embodiments, the heat sink being configured to be removably coupled to the device includes a surface to gas bond. In some embodiments, configuring the heat sink to be removably coupled to the device includes securing the heat sink to the device with tape, epoxy, clips, push pins, and/or fasteners.

In another aspect, a method for installing a kit in a facility includes using any of the kits disclosed above. In some embodiments, using the kit removably couples the heat sink to the device or disengages the heat sink from the device, reversibly (i) coupling the heat sink to the device and (ii) removing the heat sink from the device. Including facilitating to unbind.

In another aspect, a method for installing a kit in a facility includes operably coupling a device to a network of a facility in which the device is deployed, wherein the device is configured to enclose electronics; coupling a heat sink to the device, the heat sink having a heat dissipation portion and being separate from the device; removably (eg, mechanically) coupling the heat sink to the device to facilitate dissipation of heat from the device to the heat sink; and removably mounting the heat sink to structures and/or fixtures of the facility. In some embodiments, removably coupling the heat sink to the device facilitates reversibly (i) coupling the heat sink to the device and (ii) uncoupling the heat sink from the device.

In another aspect, a method for removing a kit from a facility surrounding at least one device operably coupled to a network includes a heat sink coupled to a heat sink such that coupling of the device to the heat sink facilitates dissipation of heat from the device to the heat sink. disengaging the heat sink from the device, the heat sink having a heat dissipating portion and being separate from the device, the device configured to enclose the electronics; disengaging (eg, mechanically) the heat sink from the device; and dismounting the heat sink from the facility's structures and/or fixtures.

In some embodiments, the above disclosure regarding heat sinks is applicable to other temperature regulating elements, such as those disclosed herein.

In another aspect, an apparatus for viewing media on a media display includes a first polarizer mounted between an emitting entity of the media display and a first expected position of an authorized viewer, wherein the emitting entity displays the media to an authorized user. wherein the light flowing from the emitting entity through the first polarizer and to the applied observer is configured to project toward a first expected position of the applied observer and from the applied observer by a transparent and/or translucent partition wall. configured to be blocked from flowing through a second polarizer disposed between the separated unauthorized observer's second expected location, the partition wall such that an emitting entity of a media display projects media towards the partition wall; Positioned between positions, the first polarizer is configured to cancel transmission of visible light emitted by the emitting entity by the second polarizer.

In some embodiments, the emitting entity of the media display emits unpolarized visible light. In some embodiments, the media display is an organic light emitting diode display. In some embodiments, the media display is a transparent light emitting diode display. In some embodiments, the septum includes transparent and/or translucent windows. In some embodiments, the septum includes transparent and/or translucent walls. In some embodiments, the bulkhead includes a transparent and/or translucent door. In some embodiments, the bulkhead comprises at least a portion of an exterior wall of the facility. In some embodiments, the bulkhead includes at least a portion of an interior wall of the facility. In some embodiments, the septum is made of glass, polycarbonate plastic, poly methyl methacrylate (PMMA or acrylic), polyethylene terephthalate (PET), amorphous copolyester (PETG), polyvinyl chloride (PVC), liquid silicone rubber ( LSR) liquid silicone rubber (LSR), cyclic olefin copolymer, polyethylene (PE), ionomer resin, transparent polypropylene (PP), fluorinated ethylene propylene (FEP), styrene methyl methacrylate (SMMA), styrene acrylonitrile resin (SAN), polystyrene (universal - GPPS), or methyl methacrylate acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (MABS). In some embodiments, the glass comprises an unfrosted, unsanded, sanded, or frosted grade. In some embodiments, the first polarizer includes a polarizing film. In some embodiments, the first polarizer is mounted on or is part of the screen of the media display. In some embodiments, the first polarizer is mounted to a bezel of the media display. In some embodiments, the first polarizer is mounted on or within a display configuration that is a media display. In some embodiments, the first polarizer is mounted within the display configuration between the emissive entity and an outer panel of the display configuration. In some embodiments, the first polarizer is configured to be mounted on a frame movable between the first expected position and the partition wall. In some embodiments, the second polarizer includes a polarizing film. In some embodiments, the second polarizer is configured to be mounted to a transparent and/or translucent surface of the septum. In some embodiments, the second polarizer is configured to be mounted in a framing surrounding the septum. In some embodiments, the bulkhead includes a display composition and the second polarizer is configured to be mounted to, and/or is part of and/or disposed within, the display composition. In some embodiments, the second polarizer is configured to be mounted to a frame movable between a first expected position and a second expected position. In some embodiments, a media display is configured to be operably coupled to an ensemble of devices disposed within a facility of the media display. In some embodiments, a device ensemble includes (i) a sensor, (ii) a sensor and an emitter, or (iii) a sensor and a transceiver. In some embodiments, an ensemble of devices may (i) facilitate controlling the facility's environment, (ii) facilitate location of personnel and/or assets within the facility, (iii) facilitate controlling one or more other devices in the facility. and/or (iv) facilitate facility management. In some embodiments, the media display is configured to be coupled to a network that facilitates control of other functions of the facility of the media display. In some embodiments, the media display is configured to be coupled to a network having a cable configured to transmit both communication and power. In some embodiments, the media display is configured to be coupled to a network that is configured to transmit cellular communications compliant with a communications protocol including a fourth generation (4G) or fifth generation (5G) communications protocol. In some embodiments, the media display is configured to be coupled to a network configured to transmit cellular communications, control communications, still image communications, video communications, sensor data, other media communications, or other data communications. In some embodiments, the media display is configured to be coupled to a network configured to transmit one or more protocols including at least one data communication protocol for automatic control of the subsystem. In some embodiments, the media display is configured to be coupled to a network configured to transmit infrared (IR) signals and/or radio frequency (RF) signals. In some embodiments, radio frequencies include ultra-wideband radiation. In some embodiments, the media display is configured to be operatively coupled to a power source and is configured to be coupled to a network configured for transmission of power, where the power source is, optionally, a main power source, a backup power generator, or an uninterruptible power source ( uninterrupted power source (UPS). In some embodiments, the media display is configured to be coupled to a network configured to transmit a signal representative of energy or power consumption, where power consumption is, optionally, power consumption by a heating system, a cooling system, and/or lighting. and the signal optionally facilitates monitoring the power consumption of an individual room or group of rooms. In some embodiments, the media display is configured to be coupled to a network configured to (i) utilize radio frequency signals and/or (ii) utilize at least one wireless protocol that facilitates communication with one or more sensors. In some embodiments, radio frequencies include ultra-wideband radiation. In some embodiments, the media display is configured to be coupled to the control system of the facility of the media display. In some embodiments, a facility of a media display includes a facility associated with the media display, or a facility in which the media display is placed. In some embodiments, the control system includes distributed controllers having a hierarchical structure. In some embodiments, the control system includes distributed controllers with at least three hierarchical levels. In some embodiments, at least one controller of the control system is located outside the facility. In some embodiments, at least one controller of the control system is located in a cloud. In some embodiments, the control system is configured to (i) control the environment of the facility, (ii) position personnel and/or assets within the facility, (iii) control one or more other devices in the facility, and/or ( iv) be configured to administer the facility;

In another aspect, a method for viewing media on a media display includes providing and/or using any component of any device disclosed above.

In another aspect, a method for viewing media on a media display includes mounting a first polarizer between an emitting entity of the media display and a first expected position of an authorized viewer, wherein the emitting entity displays the media to an authorized user. wherein light flowing from the emitting entity through the first polarizer and into the applied observer is separated from the applied observer by a transparent and/or translucent partition wall and a first expected position of the applied observer. is configured to be blocked from flowing through a second polarizer disposed between the second expected position of an unauthorized observer, the partition wall such that an emitting entity of a media display projects media towards the partition wall; The first polarizer is configured to cancel transmission of visible light emitted by the emitting entity by the second polarizer, and the visible light is directed in a direction of the first polarizer and the second polarizer.

In another aspect, a method for obstructing viewing of media on a media display includes considering a first polarizer while mounting a second polarizer, the first polarizer being the first polarizer of an emitting entity of the media display and an authorized viewer. 1 expected position, wherein the emitting entity is configured to project media towards an authorized user, wherein a first polarizer is such that light flowing from the emitting entity through the first polarizer and to the applied observer is directed to the first configured to be blocked from flowing through a second polarizer disposed between the expected position and a second expected position of an unauthorized observer separated from the authorized observer by a transparent and/or translucent partition, the partition being an emitting entity of the media display. is positioned between the first expected position and the second expected position to project the media towards the septum, the second polarizer being configured to cancel transmission of visible light emitted by the emitting entity by the first polarizer, the visible light passing through the first polarizer. It is directed in the direction of the polarizer and the second polarizer.

In another aspect, non-transitory computer readable program instructions for charging a mobile device at a facility, when read by one or more processors, cause the one or more processors to execute operations of any of the systems disclosed above or their direct the execution.

In another aspect, a non-transitory computer program product for maintaining a media display includes instructions written therein which, when executed by one or more processors, cause the one or more processors to: to execute an action that includes an action of

In some embodiments, a method for viewing media includes viewing media on a display configuration operably coupled to a viewing (eg, tintable) window using any of the systems and/or devices disclosed herein. start something

In another aspect, non-transitory computer readable program instructions for charging a mobile device at a facility, the non-transitory computer program instructions, when read by one or more processors operably coupled to a wireless charging station and a network, the one or more Causes the processor, individually or collectively, to: (a) enable or direct the enabling of mobile devices through wireless charging stations comprising charging devices attached to and/or integrated within a cavity of a structure; - the structure includes the framing, framing portion, or real property of the facility; and (b) providing power to, or instructing the provision of, power to the charging device via the facility's network. In some embodiments, program instructions are embodied within one or more media.

In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a system, apparatus (eg, controller), and/or non-transitory computer readable medium (eg, software) that implements any of the methods disclosed herein. .

In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a method of using any of the systems, computer readable media, and/or devices disclosed herein, eg, for their intended purpose.

In another aspect, an apparatus includes at least one controller configured to be operatively coupled to a controller programmed to direct a mechanism used to implement (eg, execute) any method disclosed herein. do. In some embodiments, at least two operations (eg of a method) are directed/executed by the same controller. In some embodiments, at least two actions are directed/executed by different controllers.

In another aspect, an apparatus includes at least one controller configured (eg, programmed) to implement (eg, execute) any method disclosed herein. At least one controller may implement any of the methods disclosed herein. In some embodiments, at least two operations (eg of a method) are directed/executed by the same controller. In some embodiments, at least two actions are directed/executed by different controllers.

In another aspect, a system includes at least one controller programmed to direct the operation of at least one other device (or component thereof), and at least one controller operably coupled to the device (or component thereof). include A device (or component thereof) may include any device (or component thereof) disclosed herein. At least one controller may be configured to direct any device (or component thereof) disclosed herein. At least one controller may be configured to be operably coupled to any device (or component thereof) disclosed herein. In some embodiments, at least two operations (eg of a device) are directed by the same controller. In some embodiments, at least two actions are directed by different controllers.

In another aspect, a computer software product comprising a non-transitory computer-readable medium having program instructions stored thereon, wherein the instructions, when read by at least one processor (eg, a computer), cause the at least one processor to to direct a mechanism disclosed in to implement (eg, execute) any method disclosed herein, wherein the at least one processor is configured to be operably coupled to the mechanism. The mechanism may include any device (or any component thereof) disclosed herein. In some embodiments, at least two operations (eg of a device) are directed/executed by the same processor. In some embodiments, at least two operations are directed/executed by different processors.

In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a non-transitory computer-readable medium comprising machine-executable code that, when executed by one or more processors, implements any of the methods disclosed herein. In some embodiments, at least two operations (eg of a method) are directed/executed by the same processor. In some embodiments, at least two operations are directed/executed by different processors.

In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a non-transitory computer-readable medium comprising machine-executable code that, when executed by one or more processors, accomplishes the instructions of the controller(s) (eg, as disclosed herein). to provide. In some embodiments, at least two operations (eg of a controller) are directed/executed by the same processor. In some embodiments, at least two operations are directed/executed by different processors.

In another aspect, the present disclosure provides a computer system comprising one or more computer processors and non-transitory computer readable media coupled thereto. The non-transitory computer readable medium contains machine executable code that, when executed by one or more processors, implements any method disclosed herein and/or accomplishes the instructions of the controller(s) disclosed herein.

The content of this Summary section is provided in this disclosure as a simplified introduction and is not intended to be used to limit the scope of any invention disclosed herein or the scope of the appended claims.

Additional aspects and advantages of the present disclosure will become readily apparent to those skilled in the art from the following detailed description, in which only exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure are shown and described. As will be appreciated, the present disclosure is capable of other and different embodiments, and its several details may be modified in various obvious respects, all without departing from the present disclosure. Accordingly, the drawings and description are to be considered illustrative in nature and not restrictive.

These and other features and embodiments will be described in more detail with reference to the drawings.

Inclusion by reference

All publications, patents and patent applications mentioned in this specification are incorporated herein by reference to the same extent as if each individual publication, patent or patent application was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference.

The novel features of the invention are set forth with particularity in the appended claims. A better understanding of the features and advantages of the present invention may be obtained by reference to the following detailed description, which describes exemplary embodiments in which the principles of the present invention are employed, and to the accompanying drawings or diagrams (also referred to herein as "Figures"). You will be able to.
1A and 1B show various window and display configurations.
2 schematically shows a display component assembly.
3 schematically illustrates a display component assembly.
4 schematically shows a hinge.
5 schematically illustrates various fastener and display component assemblies.
6 schematically illustrates various fasteners, display component assemblies, and wiring.
7 schematically illustrates various fastener and display component assemblies.
8 schematically depicts various views of a display construction assembly and applicator.
9 schematically depicts various views of a display composition assembly.
10 schematically illustrates various fastener options and display component assemblies.
11 schematically illustrates various operations in forming a display composition assembly.
12 schematically illustrates various fastener and display component assemblies.
13 schematically depicts the various layers within an electrochromic construct.
14a and 14b schematically depict various views of an integrated glass unit.
15 schematically illustrates a control hierarchy scheme and building.
16 schematically illustrates a processing system.
Figure 17 schematically shows the display component assembly and the controller and power supply assembly.
18 is a flow chart illustrating an example of a method of operation for a display component.
19 is a flow chart illustrating an example of a method of operation for a display component.
20 schematically shows a control scheme for display components.
21A and 21B schematically depict various window and display components.
22a and 22b schematically depict various window and display components.
23 schematically illustrates various window and display configurations.
24 schematically illustrates various window and display configurations.
25 schematically illustrates various windows and display configurations.
26 schematically shows an disassembly diagram (eg, an exploded view) of a box including circuit parts.
27a and 27b schematically show various views of a box containing circuitry.
Fig. 28 schematically shows a display composition and associated components.
29A to 29D schematically illustrate various display configurations.
30A and 30B schematically illustrate various display configurations.
31A and 31B schematically depict various display configurations.
32 schematically shows an disassembly diagram (eg, an exploded view) of a box including circuit parts.
33a to 33d schematically show various views of a box containing circuitry.
34a to 34e schematically show various views of a box containing circuitry.
35 schematically depicts various views of display constructions and associated components (eg, portions thereof).
36 schematically depicts various views of display constructions and associated components (eg, portions thereof).
37 schematically depicts various views of display constructions and associated components (eg, portions thereof).
38 schematically depicts various views of display constructions and associated components (eg, portions thereof).
39 schematically depicts various views of display constructions and associated components (eg, portions thereof).
40 schematically depicts various views of a portion of a display composition and associated components (eg, portions thereof).
41 schematically depicts various views of display constructions and associated components (eg, portions thereof).
42 schematically depicts various views of a portion of a display construction and associated components.
43 schematically depicts various views of a portion of fasteners and associated components.
Fig. 44 schematically illustrates display components and associated frame parts.
45 schematically illustrates a display composition view to an observer.
46 schematically depicts various views of display components and associated frame parts.
47 schematically illustrates various parts of the display construction, associated circuitry, and framing portion.
48 schematically depicts various views of display components and associated frame parts.
49 illustrates various framed window systems and their components.
50 shows various cross-sections of a framing cover (eg, framing cap).
51A and 51B show various views of a portion of a framing system.
52 shows various windows and display components within the framing system.
53 schematically shows various views of a housing (eg, compartment) and heat sink containing circuitry.
54 schematically illustrates a perspective view of a heat sink, structure, housing (eg, compartment) containing various circuitry and cabling.
Fig. 55 schematically illustrates viewing media displays in a facility.
Fig. 56 schematically illustrates viewing media displays in a facility.
57 schematically illustrates a display component assembly.
58 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an operating method for media display.
59 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an operating method for media display.
The drawings and components within them may not be drawn to scale. Various components of the drawings described herein may not be drawn to scale.

Although various embodiments of the present invention have been shown and described herein, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that these embodiments are provided by way of example only. Numerous variations, modifications and substitutions may be devised by those skilled in the art without departing from the invention. It should be understood that various alternatives to the embodiments of the invention described herein may be employed.

Terms such as “a,” “an,” and “the” are not intended to refer to only a single entity, but include general classes of which specific examples may be used for illustration purposes. The terminology herein is used to describe a particular embodiment of the invention(s), but their use is not intended to limit the invention(s).

When referring to ranges, ranges are meant to be inclusive of the bounds unless otherwise specified. For example, a range between the value 1 and the value 2 means that the boundary value is included, and includes the value 1 and the value 2. The boundary value inclusion range will span any value from about value 1 to about value 2. As used herein, the terms “adjacent” or “adjacent to” include “next to,” “adjacent to,” “contacting with,” and “proximate to.”

The term “operably connected” or “operably connected” means that a first element (eg, mechanism) is coupled (or connected) to a second element to cause the second element and/or the intended operation of the first element. refers to allowing Bonding can include physical or non-physical bonding. Non-physical coupling may include signal induced coupling (eg, wireless coupling). Coupling may include physical coupling (eg, physically connected) or non-physical coupling (eg, via wireless communication).

As used herein, including in the claims, the conjunction “and/or” in a phrase such as “comprising X, Y, and/or Z” refers to any combination or plurality of X, Y, and Z. refers to including For example, these phrases are intended to include X. For example, this phrase is intended to include Y. For example, these phrases are intended to include Z. For example, this phrase is intended to include X and Y. For example, this phrase is intended to include X and Z. For example, this phrase is intended to include Y and Z. For example, these phrases are intended to include a plurality of X's. For example, this phrase is intended to include a plurality of Y's. For example, such phrases are intended to include a plurality of Z's. For example, this phrase is intended to include a plurality of X's and a plurality of Y's. For example, this phrase is intended to include a plurality of X's and a plurality of Z's. For example, this phrase is intended to include a plurality of Y's and a plurality of Z's. For example, this phrase is intended to include a plurality of X's and Y's. For example, this phrase is intended to include a plurality of X's and Z's. For example, this phrase is intended to include the plural Y and Z. For example, this phrase is intended to include an X and a plurality of Y's. For example, this phrase is intended to include X and a plurality of Z's. For example, this phrase is intended to include Y and a plurality of Z's.

An element “configured” to perform a function (eg, a mechanism) includes structural features that enable the element to perform that function. Structural features may include electrical features such as circuitry or circuit elements. Structural features may include circuitry (eg, including electrical or optical circuitry). Electrical circuitry may include one or more wires. The optical circuitry may include at least one optical element (eg, a beam splitter, a mirror, a lens, and/or an optical fiber). Structural features may include mechanical features. Mechanical features may include latches, springs, closers, hinges, chassis, supports, fasteners, or cantilevers, and the like. Performing a function may include using a logical feature. Logical features may include programming instructions. Programming instructions may be executable by at least one processor. Programming instructions may be stored on or encoded on a (eg, non-transitory) medium that is accessible by one or more processors.

In some embodiments, a display composition associated with a viewing (eg, tintable viewing) window is provided. The viewing window may include an integrated glass unit. The display construction may include one or more glass panes. A display (eg, a display matrix) may include light emitting diodes (LEDs). An LED may include an organic material (eg, an organic light emitting diode abbreviated herein as "OLED"). An OLED may include a transparent organic light emitting diode display (abbreviated herein as “TOLED”), where a TOLED is at least partially transparent. A display may have 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, 7000 or 8000 pixels in its basic length scale. A display may have any number of pixels in between the aforementioned numbers of pixels (e.g., from about 2000 pixels to about 4000 pixels, from about 4000 pixels to about 8000 pixels, or from about 2000 pixels to about 8000 pixels) in its native length scale. 8000 pixels). The basic length scale may include the diameter, length, width, or height of the bounding circle. The Basic Length Scale may be abbreviated as "FLS" herein. The display configuration may include a high-resolution display. For example, a display configuration may have at least about 550, 576, 680, 720, 768, 1024, 1080, 1920, 1280, 2160, 3840 (at 30 Hz or 60 Hz). , 4096, 4320, or 7680 pixels x at least about 550, 576, 680, 720, 768, 1024, 1080, 1280, 1920, 2160, 3840, 4096, It may have a resolution of 4320 or 7680 pixels. A first number of pixels may specify the height of the display, and a second number of pixels may specify the length of the display. For example, the display may be a high resolution display with a resolution of 1920 x 1080, 3840 x 2160, 4096 x 2160, or 7680 x 4320. The display may be a standard definition display, an enhanced definition display, a high definition display, or an ultra-high definition display. The display may be rectangular. The image projected by the display matrix is displayed at a frequency (e.g., refresh rate) of at least about 20 Hz, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz, 75 Hz, 80 Hz, 100 Hz, or 120 Hertz (Hz). can be refreshed. The FLS of the display composition is at least 20", 25", 29", 30", 35", 40", 45", 49", 50", 55", 58" 60", 65", 80", 90" or 98" inches ("). The FLS of the display composition may be any value between the foregoing values (e.g., about 20" to about 55", about 55" to about 100", or about 20" to about 100"). ") can be

In some embodiments, at least a portion of a window surface within the facility is used to display various media using a glass display construction. The display may be used to view (eg, at least partially) an environment outside a window (eg, an outdoor environment), eg, when the display is not operating. The display can be used to display media (eg, as disclosed herein) to augment an external view with (eg, optical) overlays, augmented reality, and/or lighting (eg, the display can act as a light source). has exist). Media can be used for entertainment and non-entertainment purposes. Media can be used for video conferencing. For example, media may be used for tasks (eg, data analysis, drafting, and/or video conferencing). For example, media may be used for educational, health, safety, purchasing, monetary or entertainment purposes. The media may be presented to personnel (eg, remote employees) who are not in the enclosure in which the media display is placed. The media may present a person in an enclosure in which the media display is placed. For example, a media display may mirror a person (eg, and their actions, eg, in real time) within an enclosure in which the media display and the local person are placed. Media can be used as a coaching tool by mirroring local personnel. For example, the mirroring media can serve as a fitness coaching tool, speech coaching tool, posture coaching tool, and/or behavior coaching tool. The media may present personnel and remote personnel in the enclosure in which the media display is placed, such as within a collage, overlay and/or branching display. Media can be manipulated (eg, by using display constructs). Utilizing the display configuration may be direct or indirect. An indirect use of the media may be using an input device such as an electronic mouse or keyboard. An input device may be communicatively coupled (eg, wired and/or wirelessly) to the media. Direct use may be using the display configuration as a touch screen using a user (eg, a finger) or a pointing device (eg, an electronic pen or stylus). The pointing device may be made of and/or coated with a low-wear material (eg polymer). The low-abrasive material can be configured to facilitate contact (eg, repeatedly) with a display construction with minimal damage (eg, scratching) to the display construction. Low wear materials may include polymers or resins (eg, plastics). A pointing device can be passive or active. An active pointing device may be operatively coupled to a display structure and/or network. An active pointing device may include circuitry. The active pointing device may include a remote control. A pointing device may facilitate pointing of an operation related to the media presented by the display composition. The pointing device may facilitate (eg, real-time and/or on-site) interaction with the media presented by the display composition.

In some embodiments, media may be displayed by a transparent media display configuration. A transparent display construction configured to display media may be disposed on or coupled to (eg, attached to) a window, door, wall, partition, or any other architectural element of a facility. Building elements can be fixed or non-fixed. Architectural elements (eg, windows, walls, or partitions) may be fixed or movable (eg, movable windows or doors). The architectural element may include a tintable window. The architectural element may include a tintable material (eg, an optically switchable device such as an electrochromic device). An optically switchable device can change its transparency, absorbance, or color, such as at least in the visible spectrum. The user can control the tint state of architectural elements and/or the use of media, for example separately or in conjunction with each other. A user within one enclosure looking out of the enclosure via the transparent media display can optionally see both the environment outside the enclosure and the media via the media display.

Embodiments described herein relate to vision windows with tandem (eg, transparent) display configurations. In certain embodiments, the vision window is an electrochromic window. The electrochromic window can include solid state and/or inorganic electrochromic (EC) devices. The vision window may be in the form of an integrated glass unit (IGU). When an IGU includes an electrochromic (abbreviated herein as "EC") device, it may be referred to as an "EC IGU". An EC IGU may tint (eg, darken) the room in which it is placed and/or provide a tinted (eg, darker) background compared to an untinted IGU. Tinted IGUs can provide a desired (eg, necessary) background for acceptable (eg, good) contrast on (eg, transparent) display constructions. In another example, windows with (eg, transparent) display constructions can replace televisions (abbreviated herein as “TVs”) in commercial and residential applications. Together, the (eg transparent) display construction and the EC IGU can provide a visual privacy glass function, eg because the display can enhance the privacy provided by EC glass alone. Embodiments disclosed herein also describe specific methods, apparatus, and systems for mounting a display construct (eg, a transparent display) to a framing system of a vision window.

1A shows an example of a window 102 framed with a window frame 103 (partial view shown) and a fastener structure 104 comprising a first hinge 105a and a second hinge 105b. This hinge facilitates rotation of the display component 101 about the hinge axis, for example in the direction of arrow 111 . The window may be an electrochromic window. The window may be in the form of an EC IGU. In one embodiment, one or more display configurations (eg, transparent displays) that are at least partially transparent (eg, 101) are

It is mounted on a window frame (e.g., 103). In one embodiment, one or more display configurations (eg, transparent displays) include T-OLED technology, although it should be understood that the present invention should not be limited by or to such technology. In one embodiment, one or more display components (eg, transparent displays) are mounted to the frame (eg, 103) via fastener structures (eg, 104). In one embodiment, the fastener structure (also referred to herein as a “fastener”) includes a bracket. In one embodiment, the fastener structure includes an L-bracket. In one embodiment, the L-bracket includes a length that is close to or equal to the length of the side of the window (eg, and in the example shown in FIG. 1A , also the length of fastener 104). In an embodiment, the default length scale (eg, length) of a window is up to 60 feet ('), 50', 40', 30', 25', 20', 15', 10', 5' or 1'. The FLS of a window may have any value between the above values (eg, 1' to 60', 1' to 30', 30' to 60', or 10' to 40'). In an embodiment, the basic length scale (eg, length) of a window is at least about 50', 60', 80', or 100'. In one embodiment, a display configuration (eg, a transparent display) includes an area that (eg, substantially) matches the surface area of a lite (eg, a window). The fastener structure may be mounted to a structure (e.g., a frame part such as a mullion) via a locking mechanism (e.g., snap fitting lock) and/or screw(s), and may be configured for, e.g., slip and snap attachment. there is. The fastener may include a mounting plate. A fastener may be configured to allow its associated cabling and/or wiring to reside in a support structure cavity (eg, frame portion) without applying pressure to the support structure (eg, fixture). The support structure may include a clip (eg, a spring clip) to hold the fastener in place.

In certain embodiments, the area of the display approximates the vision area of the window (eg, the area within the window's framing system (eg, see 1 in FIG. 1B )). In one embodiment, one or more display components (eg, transparent displays) together cover (eg, approximately and/or substantially) the vision area of the window (eg, see 2 and 3 in FIG. 1B ). In one embodiment, the transparent display includes an area that is about half of the vision area of the (eg, tintable) window. In one embodiment, two or more displays are mounted over a single vision window (see 2 and 3 in FIG. 1B). The display composition may cover at least a portion of the (eg, tintable) window. The display component covers at least about 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, or 99% of the visible portion of the (e.g., tintable) window. can cover The area occupied by the display composition may be the entire (100%) of the visible portion of the (eg, tintable) window. The area occupied by the display composition is any percentage of the visible portion of the (e.g., tintable) window between the foregoing percentages (e.g., from about 10% to about 100%, from about 10% to about 50%, or from about 50%). % to about 100%). Sometimes, multiple display components may cover a (eg, tintable) window. Display constructions may be mounted in one or more layouts and/or configurations, such as to maximize design flexibility. A plurality of fasteners may be coupled to (eg, each of) a plurality of display elements (eg, to allow for swiveling of the display element). FIG. 1B shows examples of various windows in a building's façade 120, which includes windows 122, 123, and 121 and display components 1, 2, and 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1B , the display composition 1 is at least partially transparent and is disposed over the window 123 such that the entirety of the window 123 is covered by the display composition (e.g., the display composition 1 has a window 123), the user can view the external environment (eg, flowers, glass, and trees) through the display composition 1 and the window 123. The display component 1 is coupled to the window with fasteners that facilitate rotation of the display component about an axis parallel to the lower horizontal edge of the window, and this rotation is made in the direction of arrow 127 . In the example shown in FIG. 1B , display constructions 2 and 3 are at least partially transparent, and the entirety of windows 121 each covers (e.g. extends to) about half of the surface area of window 121. ) is placed on the window 121 to be covered by the two display components, and the user can view the external environment (eg, flowers, glass and trees) through the display components 2 and 3 and the window 121. The display component 2 is coupled to the window 121 with a fastener that facilitates rotation of the display component about an axis parallel to the left vertical edge of the window, such rotation in the direction of arrow 126 . The display component 3 is coupled to the window with a fastener that facilitates rotation of the display component about an axis parallel to the right vertical edge of the window 121, and this rotation is made in the direction of arrow 125.

In some embodiments, the display construction is coupled to a structure (eg, fixture). Structures may include windows, walls, or boards. The display construction may be coupled to the structure with fasteners. For example, when the display component is operating, there may be a certain distance between the display component and the structure. This distance may be up to about 0.5 meters (m), 0.4 m, 0.3 m, 0.2 m, 0.1 m, 0.05 m, 0.025 m, or 0.01 m.

In some embodiments, the E-box is operatively coupled to or includes a power supply. The power supply may be an electrical device that supplies electrical power to an electrical load. The power supply may convert the current from the source into a precise voltage, current and/or frequency to supply power to the load. The power supply may limit the current drawn by the load to a safe level (eg, according to jurisdictions and/or safety standards), and/or may shut off the current (eg, in case of an electrical fault), and/or may regulate power (e.g., to prevent electronic noise and/or voltage surges on the input from reaching the load), correct the power factor, and/or (e.g., in case of a temporary interruption of source power) to facilitate continuous operation of the load). The load may be a media display (eg, an OLED display). The power supply may be an electrical power converter. The power supply may be a separate stand-alone device. A power supply may be included in the E-box. The stand-alone power supply device may be placed within a structure such as a fixture. A structure may include a window frame portion (eg, a mullion or transom), or a wall. The power supply device may be placed at a distance from the E-box and/or timing controller. This distance may be at least about 30 feet ('), 50', 100', 200', 300'. The E-box may or may not be part of a fastener (eg, may be attached to a fastener). In some embodiments, the E-box (eg, including any analog-to-digital converter) may be located at a distance from the fastener (eg, may not be part of the fastener).

In some embodiments, a housing of an electronic component (eg, circuitry) includes at least one heat exchanger. For example, the E-box, power supply housing, and/or timing controller housing (eg, fasteners) may include one or more heat exchangers (eg, as disclosed herein). The heat exchanger may be a fan. Heat exchangers can be passive or active. The heat exchanger may include heat pipes. A heat exchanger can include components configured to efficiently absorb and/or transfer heat. For example, the heat exchanger may include a metal slab (eg, heat sink). The metal slab may include elemental metals or metal alloys.

In some embodiments, a housing of an electronic component (eg, fastener) may include one or more fans. A fan can direct gas (eg, air) from one of its sides to the other (eg, push gas into or draw gas from the surrounding environment). The direction of fan rotation can determine its ability to push/pull gas. A fan may have a basic length scale (eg, height, length, width, radius, or radius of a bounding circle). The basic length scale (FLS) of the fan may be up to about 5 centimeters (cm), 4 cm, 3 cm, 2.5 cm, 2 cm, 1.5 cm, 1 cm, or 0.5 cm. FLS can have any value between the foregoing values (eg, between about 5 cm and about 0.5 cm, between about 5 cm and about 2 cm, or between about 2 cm and about 0.5 cm). The height and length of the fan can be (eg, substantially) the same. The width of the fan may be up to about half, one-third, one-fourth, or one-fifth of the height and/or length of the fan. The fan may have multiple blades (eg, at least 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 blades). In some embodiments, the fan may be bladeless. The fan may require a low voltage, such as up to about 1.5 Volts (V), 2 V, 3 V, 4 V, 5 V, 6 V, 7 V, 8 V, 9 V, or 10 V. The speed of the fan is at least about 5,000 revolutions per minute (KRPM), 5.5 KRPM, 6 KRPM, 6.5 KRPM, 7 KRPM, 7.5 KRPM, 8 KRPM, 8.5 KRPM, 9 KRPM, 9.5 KRPM, 10 KRPM, 10.5 KRPM, 11 KRPM , 11.5 KRPM, or 12 KRPM. The fan may have a low noise signature. The low noise signature can have up to about 10.0 decibels (dbA), 15 dbA, 20, 25 dbA, or 30 dbA, where the dbA values are adjusted for the different sensitivity of the human ear to sound of different frequencies. A low-noise signature can be less than speech (eg, of about 65 dbA). A low-noise signature can be a maximum (e.g., about 10 dbA) breathing noise, (e.g., about 20 dbA) a quiet study room, (e.g., about 40 dbA) a soft whisper, or (e.g., about 50 dbA to about 65 dbA) It could be an office environment. The fan's noise level may comply with jurisdictional standards, such as standards promulgated by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). The pan may have a weight of up to about 5 grams (g), 6 g, 8 g, or 10 g. The fan is rated at least about 0.02 cubic meters per minute (M ³ /min), 0.03 M ³ /min, 0.04 M ³ /min, 0.05 M ³ /min, 0.06 M ³ /min, 0.07 M ³ /min, 0.08 M ³ /min , 0.09 M ³ /min, 0.1 M ³ /min, 0.15 M ³ /min, 0.2 M ³ /min, 0.3 M ³ /min, 0.4 M ³ /min, or 0.5 M ³ /min. can The fan may have a conductance capacity between any of the conduction capacities mentioned herein (eg, from about 0.02 M ³ /min to about 0.05 M ³ /min, from about 0.05 M ³ /min to about 0.1 M ³ /min, or from about 0.1 M ³ /min to about 0.5 M ³ /min).

In some embodiments, at least two of the plurality of circuit boards may be positioned in a manner that facilitates shielding, heat exchanging and/or cooling elements disposed therebetween. At least one shielding element may be disposed between a first circuit board and a second circuit board positioned adjacent to each other (eg directly). Shielding elements may include electrical and/or electromagnetic (eg, radio frequency) shields. The shield may or may not act as a heat exchanger and/or cooling element. The housing of the electronic component may include a heat exchanger and/or cooling element separate from the shield. The heat exchanger and/or cooling element may include a heat pipe, or metal slab. Metals may include elemental metals or metal alloys. The metal may be configured for (eg, efficient and/or rapid) conduction of heat. The metal may include copper, aluminum, brass, steel or bronze. The cooling element may comprise a fluid, gas or semi-solid (eg gel) material. Cooling elements can be active and/or passive. The cooling element may include a circulating material. The cooling element may be operatively coupled to an active cooling device (eg, a thermostat, cooler, and/or refrigerator). The active cooling device may be disposed outside the device ensemble housing. The cooling element may be disposed within a fixture (eg floor, ceiling, wall or framing) of an enclosure (eg building or room) in which the housing of the electronic component is disposed. Fixtures may include mullions or transoms.

In some embodiments, display component assemblies may accept one or more types of connectors for media signals and/or electrical. At least one connector and/or socket to one or more drivers and/or receivers, eg for use in, for example, a serial communication system (eg RS485 (in and out)). Communication can be bi-directional. A connector and/or socket may include a connector to the optical cable(s). Connector and/or socket types may include HDMI, Display Port (DP) inputs and/or outputs or alternating current (AC) inputs and/or switches. 17 shows a controller including an HDMI input unit 1701, a DP1 input unit 1702, an RS485 input unit 1703, an AC switch and an AC input unit 1704, an RS485 output unit 1705, and a DP output unit 1706; and An example of the side of the power supply assembly 1700 is shown. Figure 17 shows a controller and power supply assembly 1710, window controller 1712, IGU 1715, framing cap 1718 (sometimes referred to as a "beauty cap") connected to main power line 1711. , window frame 1719, circuitry 1716 (e.g., including boosters and/or drivers for the display matrix), hinge (e.g., hinge 1717), display component 1714, cover 1720, and A perspective disassembly view (eg, exploded view) of a display composition frame (eg, edge bezel) 1713 for the display composition is shown. The display construction frame may be a cover for the touch screen component(s). The window controller can be placed to the side of the window, closer to or farther from the window. The window controller can be placed in (or on) the window frame, in (or on) the wall, in (or on) the ceiling, in (or on) the floor. The hinges may or may not be temporarily locked (eg, using inserts (eg, slits or crevices), protrusions, and/or springs (eg, spring plungers)).

In some embodiments, the display construction is mated with a viewing window (eg, an integrated glass unit, abbreviated herein as “IGU”). The display composition may be configured to be positioned over at least a portion of the (eg, tintable) window. For example, the display composition may be configured to overlap at least a portion of the window. The display configuration may be configured to facilitate simultaneous viewing from one side of a window (eg, the inside environment) to its opposite side (eg, the outside environment). The display configuration may be positioned with respect to the user's field of view looking through the window (or any portion thereof).

In some embodiments, a controller is operatively coupled (eg, communicatively coupled) with a display component. Communication may be wired and/or wireless. The controller may automatically control the display configuration at least in part. The controller may be a timing controller (eg, T-CON), eg, as disclosed herein. The timing controller may be specific for each display configuration (eg aligned for each emitting entity matrix). Control may include electronic and/or optical control. The controller may include a microcontroller. The controller may be placed adjacent to the glass (eg IGU) and/or display construction. A controller may be placed within a window frame (eg, a transom or mullion). In some embodiments, a mullion (eg, 131 in FIG. 1B ) is a vertical run of window framing, and a transom (eg, 130 in FIG. 1B ) is a horizontal run of window framing. The window frame may hold (eg, directly or indirectly) the glass and/or display construction. The glass may be tintable glass. The tintable glass can be controlled (eg, using at least one controller). For example, tintable glass may be controlled by a hierarchy of controllers (eg, see FIG. 15). The hierarchy of controllers can be static or dynamic (eg, the hierarchical designation of controllers is dynamically changed). One or more controllers that control the viewing (eg, tintable) window may or may not control a display composition (also referred to herein as a “media display composition”).

In some embodiments, the display construction includes a transparent support structure such as glass. The transparent support structure may be in the form of one or more windows, such as glass panes. For example, a display construction may include a display matrix (eg, an array of lights) disposed between two transparent support structures (eg, between two glass panes). The array of lights may include an array of colored lights. For example, there is an array of red, green and blue lights. For example, there is an array of cyan, magenta and yellow lights. The array of lights may include lighting colors used in electronic screen displays. The array of lights may include an array of LEDs (eg OLEDs, eg TOLEDs). A matrix display (eg, an array of lights) may be at least partially transparent (eg, to the average human eye) when not operating, such as when not projecting media, for example. Transparent OLEDs facilitate transitions of a significant fraction (e.g., greater than about 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 80%, 90% or 95%) of the intensity and/or wavelength perceived by the average human eye. can do. A matrix display may create minimal obstruction to a user viewing through the array, for example when the emitting entities are not projecting light. An array of lights may form minimal obstruction to a user viewing through a window in which the array is disposed, for example when the emitting entity is not projecting light. The display matrix (eg array of lights) may be maximally transparent, eg when the emitting entity is not projecting light. At least one (eg, glass) pane of the display construction may have a regular glass thickness. A regular (eg glass) window may have a thickness of at least about 1 millimeter (mm), 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm or 6 mm. A regular (eg, glass) window has a thickness between any of the foregoing values (eg, 1 mm to 6 mm, 1 mm to 3 mm, 3 mm to about 4 mm, or 4 mm to 6 mm). can have At least one (eg, glass) pane of the display construction may have a thin glass thickness. The thin (eg, glass) window may be up to about 0.4 millimeters (mm), 0.5 mm, 0.6 mm, 0.7 mm, 0.8 mm, or 0.9 mm thick. The thin (eg, glass) window may have a thickness between any of the above values (eg, 0.4 mm to 0.9 mm, 0.4 mm to 0.7 mm, or 0.5 mm to 0.9 mm). The transparent support structure (eg glass) of the display construction may be at least transmissive (eg in the visible spectrum). For example, a transparent support structure (eg, glass) may be at least about 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99% transmissive. The glass may have a transmittance percentage value between any of the foregoing percentages (eg, from about 80% to about 99%). The display construction may include one or more windows (eg, glass windows). For example, a display composition may include multiple (eg, two) windows. The windows may have (eg, substantially) the same thickness, or different thicknesses. The front facing window may be thicker than the rear facing window. The rear-facing window may be thicker than the front-facing window. Forward may be the direction of a prospective observer (eg, in front of the display composition 101, looking at the display composition 101). Backward may be the direction of the (eg, tintable) window (eg, 102). One transparent support structure (eg glass) may be thicker than the other transparent support structure (eg glass). The thicker transparent support structure (eg glass) may be at least about 1.25*, 1.5*, 2*, 2.5*, 3*, 3.5*, or 4* thicker than the thinner transparent support structure (eg glass). The symbol "*" represents the mathematical operation of "times". The transmittance of the display composition (including one or more windows and display matrix (eg, light array or LCD)) is at least about 20%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, or 90%. The display composition may have a transmittance percentage value between any of the foregoing percentages (e.g., from about 20% to about 90%, from about 20% to about 50%, from about 20% to about 40%, from about 30% to about 40% , about 40% to about 80%, or about 50% to about 90%). A higher transmittance percentage refers to a higher intensity and/or broader spectrum of light passing through a material (eg, glass). Transmittance may be that of visible light. Transmittance can be measured as visible transmittance (abbreviated herein as "Tvis"), which refers to the amount of light in the visible portion of the spectrum that passes through a material. Transmittance may be related to the intensity of incident light. The display construction may transmit at least about 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99% of the visible spectrum (eg, wavelength spectrum) of light therethrough. The display composition may transmit percentage values between any of the foregoing percentages (eg, about 80% to about 99%). In some embodiments, instead of an array of lights, a liquid crystal display is used. 2 shows a schematic example of a display composition assembly 200 prior to lamination thereof, comprising a thicker support structure (eg, glass pane) 205, a first adhesive layer 204, a display matrix 203 ); 212), and this display component is coupled to fasteners 213.

The display matrix has reflectance and/or color properties. The display matrix may be colored, gray scale or black and white. A display matrix may have a color depth. The color depth may be at least about 2.5, 5, 10, 12.5, or 1.5 billion colors. Color depth is any value between the aforementioned values (e.g., from about 2.5 billion colors to about 1.5 billion colors, from about 2.5 billion colors to about 1.25 billion colors, or from about 1 billion colors to about 1.5 billion colors). dog colors). The display composition may have a contrast ratio of at least about 100000, 120000, 150000, 170000, or 200000 to 1. The display configuration may have a contrast ratio to 1 (e.g., from about 100000:1 to about 200000:1, from about 100000:1 to about 150000:1, or from about 150000:1 to 200000:1) between any of the above reference values. 1) can have. The reflectivity of the display composition may be up to about 2%, 4%, 8%, 10%, 14%, or 18%. The reflectivity of the display composition may have any value in between the above values (eg, from about 2% to about 18%, or from about 2% to about 14%).

In some embodiments, at least one glass pane of the display construction and/or within the IGU is reinforced. At least one glass of the display construction and/or IGU may be native glass (eg, not subjected to a tempering and/or tempering process). The glass may be tempered glass. Tempered glass may be heat strengthened, heat tempered, or chemically strengthened. Chemically strengthened glass may be chemically tempered glass. Chemically strengthened glass may include Gorilla glass. Glass may include SentryGlass ^(R) used. Chemically strengthened glass may include glass doped with one or more ions (eg, cations). The cation may be an alkali (eg potassium) or alkaline earth cation. A glass may contain one or more pigments. Glass can allow the passage of UV light (eg, its wavelength and/or intensity) therethrough. Glass can reduce (eg, prevent) penetration of UV light (eg, its wavelength and/or intensity) therethrough. Glass can absorb at least a portion of UV light (eg, its wavelength and/or intensity). In some embodiments, the glass may include a surface treatment (eg, sanding).

In some embodiments, the display construction may include a binder (eg, a laminate and/or adhesive). In some embodiments, the display construction may include a binder comprising a polymer and/or resin. A binder may be disposed between the glass window and the display matrix. The binder may be selected to facilitate formation of the composition (eg, adhesion of the display matrix to a glass window) with minimal (eg, no) damage to the display matrix. The binder can be cured by heat and/or UV treatment. The temperature of the heat treatment can be one that minimally damages the display matrix (eg, does not measurably and/or significantly damage the display matrix). Not damaging the array to a significant degree may refer to not damaging the array to an extent that affects its intended purpose (eg, performance as a display according to its specifications). The binder may include at least one organic polymer. The at least one organic polymer may include polyvinyl butyral (PVB), ethylene-vinyl acetate (EVA), polyacrylamide, SGP resin (eg Dupont's SGP 5000). The binder may include, for example, OCA by 3M (eg, 3M 8211, 3M 8212, 3M 8213, 3M 8214, 3M 8215, 3M 8171, or 3M 8172). The polymer(s) can permit the passage of UV light (eg, its wavelength and/or intensity) therethrough. The polymer may reduce (eg, prevent) penetration of UV light (eg, its wavelength and/or intensity) therethrough. The polymer can absorb at least a portion of UV light (eg, its wavelength and/or intensity).

In some embodiments, the display construction includes lamination. The display construction may include a tintable device (eg, an electrochromic device). The display construction may be free of tintable devices (eg, electrochromic devices). The tintable device may be laminated onto the display composition (to form a single display composition unit). For example, the display construction may include a deposited electrochromic layer construction (eg, deposited on the backside of a media display (eg, the backside of an LED)). The display construction may include one or more layers (eg, deposited and/or laminated layers) to protect the media display from radiation (eg, UV and/or IR radiation). The added layering may constitute a film (eg, electrochromic device, UV protection layering, and/or IR protection layering). The film may be part of a display construction. Films can facilitate longer operating life of display constructions. Films can facilitate greater contrast in displayed media. A display construction (eg, including an electrochromic film) may be coupled to the tintable (eg, electrochromic) window. The film can be any tintable window capability (e.g. liquid crystal device, suspended particle device, microelectromechanical systems (MEMS) device (e.g. micro shutter), or any configured to control light transmission through the window. technology) can be configured. The liquid crystal device may include a polymer dispersed liquid crystal layer.

In some embodiments, the display composition may include a binder in the form of at least one layer. The binder may include at least one optically clear adhesive layer (abbreviated herein as an “OCA” layer). For example, a display construction may include two binder layers. The binder layer may have a thickness of at least about 0.2 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.4 mm, 0.5 mm, 0.6 mm, 0.7 mm, 0.8 mm, 0.9 mm or 1 mm. The binder layer may have a thickness of any value between the above values (eg, from about 0.2 mm to about 1 mm, from about 0.2 mm to about 0.6 mm, or from about 0.7 to about 1 mm). The binder thickness may be selected to minimize weight while sufficiently bonding the formations to form highly resistant formations that can, for example, be machine cut (eg, that can have high die-cut machine resistance). Binders can increase the durability and/or optical properties of a display composition compared to a display composition without a binder. The binder may be (eg, substantially and/or completely) transparent (eg, to visible light). Binders may be uncolored. The binder can contact the (eg, largest) surface of the display matrix and the (eg, largest) surface of the window (eg, glass pane), thereby bonding the display matrix to the window. The binder may contribute minimally (eg, no contribution) to optically and/or visually distorting the media displayed by the display.

In some embodiments, the window(s), binder and display matrix are cured prior to placement. Curing may be effected by UV light, moisture and/or heat. The curing method may be selected to preserve the function of the display matrix and to minimize any optical distortion (eg, to maximize transmittance, to reduce haze and/or gas gaps such as air gaps). Binders can increase the durability of display constructions. For example, the binder can reduce the fragility of the display construction and/or reduce its flammability. The binder, for example, (i) minimizes losses due to any Fresnel reflections, (ii) transmits all colors with minimal distortion through the display composition, and/or (iii) transmits all colors through the display composition. It may facilitate adjustment of the refractive index of the window relative to the ambient air (eg, where the observer is present) to enhance the projected image. The distortion of color can be attributed to its passage through the binder, through the glass window and into the ambient air. The display composition (eg, binder therein) may preserve and/or improve the operating operating temperature range of the display matrix. The binder may prevent one or more gases and/or debris (eg, dirt or sebum) from reaching the display matrix. The display construction (eg binder, glass and/or any coating) may prevent physical disturbance to the display matrix (eg due to contact). The contact may be a direct contact by the user.

In some embodiments, the IGU and/or display construction may include a coating (eg, an anti-reflective coating). Coatings can improve the optical performance of glass and/or display constructions. Coatings can be applied over glass windows, binder layers, display matrices, and/or electrochromic constructs. The coating may be deposited in the form of an anti-reflective, anti-glare, anti-condensation, scratch-resistant, anti-smudge treatment, and/or UV protection treatment.

In some embodiments, the display construction may include a seal. The seal may be disposed between the two glasses of the display composition with the display matrix disposed therebetween. The seal may include a polymer/resin (eg, any polymer/resin disclosed herein). The seal may include a carbon based (eg organic) polymer or a silicone based polymer. The seal may protect the display construction from light (eg, UV), moisture, oxygen, physical contact (eg, physical damage), debris, and/or other environmental components.

In some embodiments, the display construction is durable over an extended life. The expected lifetime may be at least about 2y (years), 5y, 10y, 15y, 25y, 50y, 75y, or 100y. The expected lifetime can be any value between the foregoing values (eg, from about 5y to about 100y, from about 2y to about 25y, from about 25y to about 50y, or from about 50y to about 100y). The extended lifetime may be at least 20Kh (thousand hours), 30Kh, 50Kh, 100Kh, 500Kh, or 1000Kh. The extended lifetime of the display composition may have any value between the foregoing values (eg, from about 20 Kh to about 1000 Kh, from about 20 Kh to about 100 Kh, or from about 100 Kh to about 1000 Kh). The number of hours may refer to the number of hours that a display configuration is operating, such as for its intended purpose. The lifetime of a display construction may depend on its operating time and/or any environmental conditions (eg, UV light, humidity and/or temperature in its deployed location).

In some embodiments, the display construction is fastened to a fixture (eg, a window frame or wall) holding a (eg, tintable) window, such as by a fastening mechanism (also referred to herein as a “fastener”). A fastener may include one or more components. For example, fasteners may include brackets, hinges, and covers. Fasteners may be permanent or non-permanent. Non-permanent fasteners may be removed manually and/or automatically. For example, the fastener may include one or more screws fastening it to the window frame. Fasteners may include hinges and/or brackets. The hinge may be flexible. The bracket and/or cover (or any portion thereof) may be inflexible or inflexible. Fasteners (eg, including hinges and/or brackets) may not be transparent. The fastener (eg, any of its components) may include elemental metals, metal alloys, allotropes of elemental carbon, polymers, or composite materials. At least two components of the fastener may be made of (eg, substantially) the same type. At least two components of the fastener may be made of different material types. The elemental metal may include aluminum. Metal alloys may include steel. The fasteners may include non-corrosive materials. At least a portion of the fastener (eg, bracket and/or cover) may be configured to support the weight of the display composition, eg, without (eg, significant) deformation over its intended lifetime (eg, as disclosed herein). there is. The display construction may weigh at least about 5 Kg (kilograms), 10 Kg, 15 Kg, 20 Kg, 25 Kg, 30 Kg, 35 Kg, 40 Kg, or 50 Kg. The display construction may weigh any weight between the foregoing weights (eg, 5 Kg to 50 Kg, 5 Kg to 25 Kg, or 25 Kg to 50 Kg). 3 shows an assembly 300 (shown in partial view) in which a display matrix 311 is disposed between a first window 312 and a second window 313 as part of a display configuration, and two glass windows 312 , 313) and coupled to the display structure, shows an example of a vertical section of an L-shaped bracket 302, which is coupled to a hinge 303.

In some embodiments, at least a portion of the outer surface of the bracket is smooth. In some embodiments, at least a portion of the outer surface of the bracket has a glossy or matte texture. Smooth may refer to an outer surface having a Ra value of at most 60 microns (pm), 40 μm, 20 μm, 10 μm, 5 μm, or 1 μm.

The fasteners may be configured for easy installation and/or removal of the display construction from a supporting structure (eg, a window frame and/or wall). Removal may be for servicing, replacement, and/or upgrading of the display construction and/or any part of the structure (or any associated device). For example, the fasteners may allow for (eg, easy) removal and/or insertion of display components. For example, fasteners may allow for (eg, easy) removal and/or insertion of the framing portion to which the fasteners are attached. For example, a fastener may allow for (eg, easy) removal and/or insertion of a tintable window supported by a frame to which the fastener is attached. Facilitation may refer to low labor costs, low labor ratings (eg, low labor qualifications), and/or short labor hours. The fastener may be configured to slide and/or lock for installation on a support structure (eg, fixture).

In some embodiments, connecting material is disposed between the display construction and fasteners (eg, and brackets and/or covers). The connecting material may include a polymer (eg, as disclosed herein). The connecting material may include a sealing gasket. The joint material may be curable (eg, by heat, moisture and/or UV). The connecting material may have a low resistance. The connecting material may include at least one polymer and/or at least one resin. The connection material may have a low electrical resistance such that it is suitable for use as a packing material in the electronics industry (eg for smart phones, packaging, liquid crystal displays and personal computers). The joint material may include polyethylene terephthalate (PET), a very high bond (VHB) material (eg, 3M VHB 4926), or SR, or SRS-40P. The connecting material may include an acrylic material. The connecting material can retain its properties and shape at ambient temperature. The tensile strength of the connecting material may be at least about 0.60 megapascals (MPa), 0.63 MPa, 0.66 MPa, 0.68 MPa, or 0.70 MPa. The shear strength of the connecting material may be at least about 0.54 MPa, 0.60 MPa, 0.620 MPa, 0.64 MPa, or 0.68 MPa. Shear strength may be less than tensile strength. Shear strength and/or tensile strength are determined by the fastener (or any part of the fastener to which the display configuration is connected by a connecting material (eg adhesive)) over the expected life and/or time of use of the display component, for example. It may be to make it easier to maintain the display construction. The connecting material may be rigid and/or flexible. The connecting material may be an adhesive. The connecting material may be softer before its curing and harder after its curing. The connecting material may be selected such that it supports at least the load (eg, weight) of the display construction during constant and/or varying conditions (eg, depending on its intended purpose). Brackets may include straight portions, curved portions, and/or corners. Brackets may not have corners. Brackets can be straight or curved. The bracket may include two straight parts (eg, two arms) forming a (eg, approximate) angle. The angle may be right or obtuse. The bracket may be "L" shaped. An arm of the bracket and/or cover may be placed between the two windows and/or may contact the display matrix and/or contact the binder.

In some embodiments, the wire is hidden from the user's view by the fastener (eg, or any component thereof). For example, a bracket and/or cover may hide one or more (eg, electrical) wires connected to the display matrix, such as from a user. A wire may be connected to the bracket and/or cover. The bracket and/or cover may include a recessed portion configured to receive the wire(s). In some embodiments, the cover and bracket are the same component (eg 531). The recessed portion may be obscured from the user's view (eg, disposed in a rear portion of the bracket and/or cover). The wire(s) may be connected to a display matrix (eg, a light array or LCD). The wire(s) may be connected to the controller. The controller may include a timing controller and/or a microcontroller. Connection material (eg, connectors) may be disposed along the width of the display composition (eg, along the fastener structure 104 ). The connecting material may be disposed along at least about 50%, 80%, or 90% of the width of the display composition. The fastener may include a curved portion. The fastener may include a non-curved portion.

In some embodiments, the fastener includes a hinge. In some embodiments, the hinge includes two leaves connected by a joint, the joint forming an axis around which the leaf is configured to move. The first leaf of the hinge may be operatively coupled (eg, connected) to the bracket and/or cover. The second leaf of the hinge may be operatively coupled (eg, connected) to a fixture. Fixtures can be walls or window frames. A hinge may facilitate movement of a display composition about a hinge axis. The joint may facilitate opening of the hinge to an acute, right, obtuse, flat angle (eg, 180°), or full rotation (eg, about 360°). Fastening the hinge to the fixture and display construction (eg, via a bracket and/or cover) facilitates movement of the display construction about the axis of the hinge joint. Such movement may facilitate servicing the display construction without obstruction to windows (eg, IGUs) and/or fixtures. Maintenance may include, for example, cleaning, repairing, and/or replacing the display construction and any parts or components thereof.

In some embodiments, a fastener may include multiple components. A plurality of components may include brackets, covers, hinges and/or boards. The display construction may be coupled (eg, connected) to the bracket and/or cover. A bracket and/or cover may be coupled to one leaf of the hinge. Other leaves of the hinge may be indirectly coupled to the fixture by directly coupling the other hinge leaf to a board directly connected to the fixture. The board may include any of the fastener materials disclosed herein (eg, elemental metals and/or metal alloys). A fastener may include multiple components of the same type. For example, a fastener may include multiple hinges, multiple brackets, multiple covers, and/or multiple boards. The plurality of fastener components may be at least 2, 3, 4, 5, 8 or 10 components (eg, of the same type or of different types). A hinge may include a set of hinge components (eg, a knuckle and a pintle). A fastener may include a plurality of sets of hinge components. A set of hinge components may be aligned to have a single hinge axis. The fastener can be formed from two swiveling leaves about the axis of the hinge component set. At least one of the leaves (eg, each of them) may include a single slab comprising half of a plurality of hinge components (eg, knuckles), such that (eg, as shown in the example of FIG. 37 ) two When the leaves are integrated, they allow multiple sets of functional hinge components to be created. In some embodiments, two leaves with respective hinge components, each formed from a single slab of material, form a plurality of operative hinge components, each with a single set of hinges. Forms a fastener that is stronger and/or more durable than bonding the display composition to a sphere. In some embodiments, two leaves with respective hinge components, each formed from a single slab of material, form a plurality of operative hinge components, each with a single set of hinges. It forms a fastener that is easier to install, maintain and/or replace than coupling the display component to a sphere. In some embodiments, two leaves each having a respective hinge component to form a plurality of operative hinge components, each of the two leaves being formed from a single slab, are coupled to a plurality of separate fasteners each having a single set of hinges. Facilitates more precise alignment of the display arrangements compared to combining the display arrangements. Such a single fastener incorporates a heat exchanger (eg, fan), directs heat exchange (eg, within the fastener and/or along a display component), and/or couples one or more circuit boards to the fastener. provides additional benefits such as

In some embodiments, at least one leaf of the hinge includes one or more apertures. At least one of the one or more holes is configured to allow a screw to pass through to (eg, reversibly) connect the hinge to a fixture (eg, a window frame) and/or a bracket. Connection of the fastener (or any component thereof) to the display construction and/or fixture (eg, window frame) may be (I) irreversible (eg, using a connecting material) or (II) (eg, one or more screws). ) can be reversible. The fixture and/or board may use both irreversible and reversible connections between itself and the display component. For example, the hinge can be connected reversibly to the window frame and irreversibly to the bracket. For example, the hinge can be connected reversibly to the bracket and irreversibly to the window frame. For example, the hinge can be reversibly connected to the window frame and reversibly connected to a bracket that will be irreversibly connected (eg glued) to the display construction. For example, the hinge can be reversibly connected to a wall and reversibly connected to a cover that will be irreversibly connected (eg, glued) to a display construction. For example, the hinge can be reversibly connected to the board and can be reversibly connected to a cover that will be irreversibly connected (eg, glued) to the display construction. The board may be reversibly (eg, via screw(s)) or irreversibly (eg, via a binding agent (eg, adhesive)) to the fixture. Figure 4 shows a first leaf 401 having a plurality of holes (eg 411) allowing movement of the screw in one direction; and a second leaf 402 having a plurality of holes allowing movement of the screw in a second direction, which first direction may be perpendicular to the second direction. there is. The hinge shown in Figure 4 has a joint 420 that facilitates rotation of the first leaf relative to the second leaf. In some embodiments, the first leaf has hole(s) with a long axis in a first direction and the second leaf has hole(s) with a long axis in a second direction, the first direction being the same as the second direction. Forms a non-zero angle (eg, the first direction may be perpendicular to the second direction). The relative orientation of these long axes can be measured when the hinge is closed and the two leaves are placed on top of each other. In some embodiments, the bracket may be an extension of the leaf of the hinge. In some embodiments, the bracket may be coupled (eg, fastened) to the leaf of the hinge, such as reversibly (eg, via screw(s)) or irreversibly (eg, via adhesive). In some embodiments, the cover may be an extension of the leaf of the hinge. In some embodiments, the cover may be coupled (eg, fastened) to the leaf of the hinge, such as reversibly (eg, via screw(s)) or irreversibly (eg, via adhesive).

In some embodiments, the electrical circuitry is communicatively coupled to the display arrangement. The electrical circuitry can (i) boost a signal sent to the display matrix and/or (ii) transmit power reaching the display matrix from the power supply. In some embodiments, the circuitry may include touch screen circuitry. In some embodiments, the touch screen circuitry can be discrete (eg, and disposed within the touch screen sensor cover). In some embodiments, circuitry may connect the touch screen sensor(s) to a power supply. In some embodiments, the touch screen circuitry may have a separate connector to the power supply.

5 shows a first cover portion 501, an L bracket, a thermal pad 505, a flexible electrical connector such as a 506 (MXC) connector, a circuit portion 502 (e.g., a booster board), a flexible insulator 503, and shows an example of an assembly 520 in which a display construction 500 (shown in partial view) is connected to a fastener that includes a second cover portion 504; 510 shows a schematic bottom view of a circuitry board with screws and connections, which circuitry board is attached to the cover. Assembly 520 includes at 530 a display component 536, flexible wiring (eg, MXC) 535, a first portion 531 of a cover that is a bracket (partial view shown), a gasket (eg, flexible insulator). ) 533 (shown in partial view), circuitry 532 (shown in partial view), and a second portion 534 of the cover (shown in partial view) from different perspectives. The flexible insulator may be a foam gasket (eg poron). A flexible insulator may have a compression of at least 25%. The bracket may have one or more thermal pads disposed thereon. Referring to FIG. 5 , in one embodiment, an L-bracket 501 is shown extending across the linear dimension of the transparent display (and attached to the cover glass 500), such an L-bracket 501 is 1 cover. In one embodiment, bracket 501 may be up to about 10 feet long. The circuitry (eg signal booster) may be connected to the display matrix by one or more flexible wires (eg MXC). Sometimes a plurality of circuitry boards (eg, at least two, three or four boards) may be disposed within the fastener (eg, between the first cover and the second cover). 5 shows an example of two circuit boards 502 and 507 . One or more (eg flexible) connectors may connect the circuitry board to the flexible display matrix. The number of flexible connectors (eg, MXCs) may be at least 2, 5, 6, 8 or 10. 5 shows examples of flexible connectors 516 , 535 , and 506 . One or more (micro) cable bundles and/or (eg micro) coaxial cables may couple (i) circuitry (eg, a booster) disposed within the fastener to (ii) a controller (eg, a timing controller). One or more (micro) cable bundles and/or (eg micro) coaxial cables may be connected to a circuit board (eg a booster board) by connectors. The number of electrical connectors (eg, connectors 630 (partial view shown), such as IPLEX connectors) between the circuit board and the controller may be at least one, two, three, four, or five. 5 shows an example of an electrical cable 513 connecting a board (eg, a driver board) and a controller (eg, a timing controller). One or more fine wire bundles can connect a controller (eg T-CON) to a booster board that connects to a flexible connector (eg MXC cable) to a display matrix (eg TOLED). The fasteners may be configured to secure, receive and/or hide cables and/or wiring from an observer of the display construction.

The electrical circuitry (eg, and any connecting cables thereof) may be at least partially masked from the user's view by the fastener (or any component thereof, such as a hinge and/or board). The electrical circuitry (eg, and any connecting cables thereof) may be at least partially protected from contact by a user. The bracket, cover, board and/or hinge may have an openable portion. The openable portion can swivel about an axis (eg, the openable portion can swivel about a secondary hinge to facilitate its swiveling). A fastener can have one or more of its component types (eg, one or more brackets, one or more covers, one or more boards, one or more primary hinges, and/or one or more secondary hinges). One or more components of the fastener may span the FLS of the display construction and/or viewing window, or portion thereof. The openable and/or removable portion may facilitate servicing the electrical circuitry (eg, and any connecting cables thereof) without disassembling fasteners, eg, from a support structure to which it is coupled and/or from a display construction. there is. The use of an open (with or without any secondary hinge) is the use of (i) the E-box and/or power supply box and (ii) the circuitry attached to the display component (e.g., the display component and/or touch screen related circuitry). It may facilitate (eg, reversible) detachment of the connection cabling between them. Such (eg, reversible) cabling attachment and detachment may allow replacement and/or servicing of the E-box and/or power supply without disassembling fasteners from the support structure and/or from the display structure. Such (eg, reversible) cabling attachment and detachment may allow replacement and/or servicing of display components and/or fasteners without disassembling the E-box and/or power supply unit. Such (eg, reversible) cabling attachment and detachment may allow for separation (eg, disconnection) between (I) a display element-fastener assembly and (II) an E-box and/or power supply unit. The display component-fastener assembly may optionally include a touch screen facilitator (eg, sensor and emitter panel). For example, an openable and/or removable portion (eg, secondary hinge) may facilitate servicing the booster board or any cables and/or connectors connected thereto. Maintenance may include removal, repair, replacement and/or cleaning. For example, the board may have secondary openings that facilitate exposing at least a portion of the controller and/or wiring. Figure 10 shows an example of a secondary opening comprising portions 1017 and 1021 as part of a fastening system. A cushion may be disposed between the openable and/or removable portion and the electrical circuitry (eg, and any connecting cables thereof). The cushion may protect and/or prevent movement of electrical circuitry (eg, and any connecting cables thereof). It may be protected from light, temperature (eg heat or cold), contact, moisture and/or oxygen. The cushion may include a polymeric foam (eg polyurethane). The cushion may include a foam gasket. Such a cushion may help maintain a (eg, reasonable) bend radius on the wire(s). Wiring may include, for example, microflex-complete (MXC) cable(s) to connect circuitry to a controller (eg, timing controller) and/or power supply. Wiring may be coupled to circuitry through one or more connectors (eg, IPEX or micro connectors). Micro connectors can connect circuitry (eg, disposed within fasteners) to the display matrix. The circuitry may include a booster board. A micro connector may have a plurality of wires bonded within an envelope, for example. Wiring may include coaxial cable(s).

In some embodiments, the fastener may include a regression forming an opening. The regression may be a quadratic aperture. The regression can be centered at the middle length of the fastener. Regression may or may not be covered. The covering of the regression may or may not be reversible. For example, the covering can be a secondary hinge leaf. The covering may be bolted to the fastener with screw(s) and/or clips. The fastener may include two hinge leaves that engage with the knuckle and pintle mechanism to form a hinge. Regression can be covered when the fastener is in its closed hinge position. Regression can be (reversibly) covered when the (primary) fastener hinge(s) are in their closed position. The regression can be (reversibly) open when the (primary) fastener hinge(s) are in their open position. 10 shows a cover 17017 covering an opening in fastener 1021 . The width of _the regression (eg, see the broken line _arrow W in FIG. 41 ) is at most about 95%, 90%, 80%, 70%, 60%, It can be extended by 50%, 40% or 30%. The regression may be from the edge of the hinge leaf towards its inner portion. A regression can be, for example, an opening in the hinge leaf (eg a window in the hinge leaf) having the extension referenced above as its width. The length of the opening (eg, _regression , eg, see the dashed line arrow L in FIG. 41 ) is at most about 60%, 50%, 40% of the total length of the hinge leaf (eg see the dashed line arrow L _total in FIG. 41 ) It can be extended by 30%, 20% or 10%. The regression extends to a width and/or length that can facilitate connecting and/or disconnecting any connectors that couple the circuit board to display components and/or touch screen related devices (e.g., sensor and emitter panels). It can be. The opening (eg, regression) may or may not be centered in the length and/or width of the fastener (or any hinge leaf thereof).

In some embodiments, the controller may include a timing controller (abbreviated herein as “T-CON”). A timing controller may control the timing of operation of various components of the display matrix (eg, when LEDs are lit in the display matrix). The timing controller can convert between the row and column driver signaling required by the display matrix and the video signal. Media signals can be sent to the T-CON board via communication interfaces such as Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS), Embedded DisplayPort (eDP), Mobile Industry Processor Interface (MIPI®), Display Serial Interface (DSI), or VX1. there is. Circuitry (eg, chips and/or controllers therein) may include a 60 Hz-120 Hz frame rate converter. The timing controller may refresh the charge to minimize attenuation of the optical response of the LCD chemistry(s) in response to the charge, eg, at a rate to keep the signal uniform, avoid attenuation, and/or properly update. there is. A controller (eg, T-CON) may be disposed at a distance from a display element assembly comprising a display element and a fastening system (eg, fastener).

In some embodiments, the display configuration is operably coupled (eg, connected by wires) to the power supply. The circuitry is operably coupled (eg, connected by wires) to the power supply. Connections can be direct or indirect. An indirect connection may be made through circuitry (eg, a booster). The power supply may be a secondary power supply. The power supply may be coupled to a city power source (eg, a power plant), and/or a building power source (eg, a generator, solar cell(s), and/or wind turbine). The power source may be renewable and/or non-renewable. Power may be coupled to the BMS. A power source may be coupled to the network infrastructure (eg, as disclosed herein). The power source may supply power at about 240 V or 120 V (eg, home current) AC. The secondary power source may include a converter that reduces the voltage (eg, up to about 24 volts (V), 48 V, or 54 V). 6 shows a fastener 602 (partial view shown) to a display construction 601 (shown in a partial view) connected via wiring 603 (shown in a partial view) to circuitry (not shown) disposed within the fastener. FIG. 20 shows an example of a perspective view of an assembly 600 including display components coupled to circuitry and fasteners, to which the wiring is secured by hooks, such as hooks 604 . The hook may be a tie mount. 6 shows a perspective view of hinge leaf 634 to which wiring 633 is connected, which wiring is connected to circuitry 632, which hinge leaf 634 is connected to hinge leaf portion 635 (partial view shown). ), and a hinge leaf portion 636 connected to a fixture (not shown) by screws 637. Hinge leaf portions 635 and 636 are part of the same hinge leaf. 6 shows a side view example of an assembly 620 that includes a fastener 662 coupled to a fixture (not shown) with a screw, such as 661, which comes out of its body and engages a hook 666. and a dangling wire 667. Wiring 667 includes (i) circuitry (not shown) disposed within fastener body 662, and (ii) display matrix 664 disposed between thicker glass 665 and thinner glass 663. It is connected to a display component (partial view shown) comprising a. 6 shows a side view example of an assembly 612 (similar to 620) disposed in a vertical section of a window frame 610. 6 shows an example of an electrical wiring 630 that may be used in a display component assembly. The fasteners may include drivers and/or booster boards. Circuitry may facilitate data (eg, network communication) and/or power transmission.

The secondary power source may supply direct current (DC) voltage. A secondary power source may be placed adjacent to the display structure and/or IGU. A secondary power source may be placed within a window frame, within a wall, within a floor, or within a ceiling. The controller of the display arrangement may be arranged separately from its power supply. The shortest distance from (i) the display component, booster board, driver board, and/or timing controller (eg, T-CON) to (ii) the power supply is at least about 0.25 meters (m), 0.5 m, 1 m, 1.5 m. m, 2 m, 2.5 m, 3 m, 3.5 m, 4 m, 4.5 m, 5 m, 5.5 m, 6 m, 6.5 m, 7 m, 8 m, 10 m, or 20 m. The shortest distance from (i) the display component, booster board, driver board, and/or timing controller to (ii) the power supply is any value between the foregoing values (e.g., about 0.25 to about 20 m, about 0.25 m to about 0.25 m). 5 m, from about 5 m to about 7 m, or from about 7 m to about 20 m). For example, the shortest distance from (i) the driver and/or booster board to (ii) the power supply and/or T-CON is at least about 1.5 m, 2 m, 2.5 m, 3 m, 3.5 m, 4 m, 4.5 m, 5 m, 5.5 m, 6 m, 6.5 m, 7 m, 8 m, or 10 m. The shortest distance from (i) the driver and/or booster board to (ii) the power supply and/or T-CON is any value between the foregoing values (e.g., about 1.5 to about 10 m, about 1.5 m to about 5 m). , or from about 5 m to about 10 m). The shortest distance from (i) the display component and/or booster board to (ii) the power supply and/or T-CON is any value between the foregoing values (e.g., about 5' to about 30', about 10' to about 25', or about 15' to about 20'). For example, the shortest distance from (i) driver board and/or display components to (ii) power supply and/or T-CON is at least about 5', 10', 15', 20', 25', 25' , 30', 50', 100', 200', or 300' (feet). The shortest distance from (i) the display component and/or booster board to (ii) the power supply and/or timing controller is any value between the foregoing values (e.g., about 5' to about 300', about 10' to about 25'). ', about 15' to about 20', about 20' to about 50', about 50' to about 200', or about 100' to about 300').

In some embodiments, a local controller may control a viewing (eg, tintable) window and/or display component (eg, as part of an IGU). A local controller may be part of a control network. The control network may be a hierarchical control network (eg, as disclosed herein). The hierarchy of controllers in a control network can be static or dynamic. The local controller may be placed adjacent to the display structure and/or IGU. A local controller can be placed within a window frame, within a wall, within a floor, or within a ceiling. In some embodiments, one local controller controls a viewing (eg, tintable) window and a display component (eg, media displayed by the display component). In some embodiments, separate controllers control viewing (eg, tintable) windows and display elements (eg, media displayed by the display elements). Communication between the local controller and other components of the network interface may be wired and/or wireless. Wired communication is coaxial cable, twisted pair, NM cable, underground feeder (UF) cable, thermoplastic high heat resistant nylon coated (THHN) wire, thermoplastic heat and water resistant nylon coated (THWN) wire, standard telephone line, or category 3 (Cat 3) cable, and/or Category 5 (Cat 5) cable. A control system (eg, a local controller) may be communicatively coupled to the display composition by wired and/or wireless communication (eg, via a timing controller (T-CON)). For example, the display configuration may be connected to the local controller via one or more wires and/or wirelessly. For example, a T-CON can be connected to a local controller through one or more wires. The shortest distance from (i) the display component and/or T-CON to (ii) the local controller is at least about 0.25 meters (m), 0.5 m, 1 m, 1.5 m, 2 m, 2.5 m, 3 m, 3.5 m , 4 m, 4.5 m, 5 m, 5.5 m, 6 m, 6.5 m, 7 m, 8 m, and 10 m. The shortest distance from (i) the display component and/or T-CON to (ii) the local controller is any value between the foregoing values (e.g., about 0.25 to about 10 m, about 0.25 m to about 5 m, about 5 m). to about 7 m, or from about 7 m to about 10 m). The distance may correspond to a minimum measurement of the wire length (eg, when the display component is communicatively coupled to the local controller at least partially via a wire). The shortest distances between (I) the display component and the local controller and (II) the local controller and the power supply may be (eg substantially) the same. The shortest distances between (I) the display configuration and the local controller and (II) the local controller and the power supply may not be (eg substantially) equal. The shortest distances between (I) the timing controller and the local controller and (II) the local controller and the power supply may be (eg, substantially) equal. For example, the shortest distance between (I) the timing controller and the local controller may be shorter than between (II) the local controller and the power supply. For example, the shortest distance between (I) the timing controller and the local controller may be longer than between (II) the local controller and the power supply. The shortest distances between (I) the timing controller and the local controller and (II) the local controller and the power supply may not be (eg substantially) equal. For example, the shortest distance between (I) the timing controller and the local controller may be shorter than between (II) the local controller and the power supply. For example, the shortest distance between (I) the timing controller and the local controller may be greater than between (II) the local controller and the power supply.

7 shows an L-bracket 701, a circuit part 702 (eg, a booster board), a cable(s) 703, a foam gasket 704, a screw 705, a tape 706, and a second circuit part 701 shown in cross section. 1 glass window 707, adhesive (eg OCA) 708, display matrix 709, second glass window 710, cover 714, bumper 712, adhesive 713, and viewing window ( 711) (partial view shown), shows an example of a vertical cross-section of a portion of a display construction coupled to the circuitry and fasteners. The display construction may include a flexible bumper (eg, polymer or resin) separating it from the window (eg, 711). The bumper may prevent glass-to-glass contact between the display composition and/or the window (e.g., a tintable window), which may result in damage to the display composition and/or window (e.g., prevent cracking and/or breakage) ). The bumper may increase the safe operation of swiveling the display composition about, for example, a hinge axis. In one embodiment, in cross section, the L bracket is defined by one or more right angles, but these angles may be other than 90 degrees. In the illustrated embodiment, the L-bracket is attached to the cover glass (eg 707) via adhesive elements. In an embodiment, the adhesive element is an adhesive tape. In one embodiment, the adhesive tape comprises a VHB type tape. In one embodiment, the adhesive element is a liquid or gel adhesive that bonds the L-bracket to the cover glass. The cover glass (eg 707) may be plastic, glass or other transparent material. In one example the thickness of the cover glass may be about 4 mm, but it may be thicker or thinner than 4 mm. The cover glass can be part of a display construction (eg, transparent display) and/or the display construction (eg, transparent display) element can be laminated to the cover glass. In the example shown in FIG. 7 , a second cover glass 710 is laminated to a transparent display element 709 , such that the transparent display element 709 (eg, T-OLED) is a cover glass 707 and a second cover It is interposed between the glass 710. The formed laminate structure may lie with respect to the viewing window (eg, 711 ) or may be parallel to but spaced apart from the viewing window. The laminate structure comprising the first glass pane 707, the display matrix 709 and the second glass pane 710 (e.g., the second glass cover) is a transparent display assembly (also referred to herein as a "display composition") can be regarded as

In one embodiment, the adhesive element has sufficient strength to support the weight of the transparent display assembly. As shown, one side of the L-bracket (eg, 701) is used as the surface for the adhesive element, and at least this surface area is attached to the transparent display assembly through the cover glass (eg, 707).

As shown in the example shown in FIG. 7 , cover 714 is attached to L-bracket 701 . In this example, the L-bracket 701 includes an overhang portion on the vertical leg. Together with the cover 714, a chamber is formed in which the circuitry 702 for the display matrix is accommodated. Circuitry 702 may be in the form of a circuit board (eg, a driver and/or booster board). In one embodiment, the cover seals the electronics from the environment via one or more gaskets. In one embodiment, the L-bracket 701 is configured to provide movement and/or physical connection between a frame of a window and a display component (eg, see FIG. 1A ). In one embodiment, circuitry 702 is coupled to the display matrix through one or more conductors, such as ribbon cables, flex circuits, and/or other wired connections 175 . In some embodiments, wired connection 175 (see FIG. 2B ) may be a micro coaxial cable (eg, see 802 in FIG. 8 ). In an embodiment, the wired connection 802 may terminate in an L-bracket with a multi-pin connector (see 803 in FIG. 8 ).

In some embodiments, the display configuration includes a touch screen. The display construction may include one or more optical sensors at its edge to facilitate functioning of the touch screen by the user(s). A touch screen may receive contact (eg, touch) input from the user(s) and deliver an output response. The response may be functional, and the response may include a change in visual data or sound. A touch screen may use a display matrix. A display configuration may be operatively coupled to an information processing system (eg, including one or more processors and/or network interfaces). The user(s) may use the information processing system via simple (eg, single) or multi-touch gestures by touching a display component window facing the user(s). A touch can be made using a special device (eg, a stylus or electronic pen) or one or any part of one's body (eg, more fingers). A special device can be adapted to the display configuration. Touchscreens include resistive touchscreens, surface acoustic wave touchscreens (eg using ultrasound), capacitive touchscreens, infrared grid touchscreens (eg using photodetectors), optical imaging (eg using CMOS sensors), infrared It can be an acrylic projection (eg, with infrared LEDs), a distributed signal touchscreen, or an acoustic pulse recognition touchscreen. The display construction is enhanced according to the requirements of touch screen technology. For example, when sensors (eg COMS) and/or projectors (eg LEDs) are required for a touch screen, they are added to the display arrangement, for example by placing them inside a frame surrounding at least a portion of the display arrangement. .

In some embodiments, the display configuration can act as a touch screen. A frame may include one or more sensors disposed on or within the frame. A frame may include circuitry, one or more connectors (eg, to a power supply and/or network system), and any optical components (eg, reflectors, mirrors, prisms, beam splitters, and/or lenses). The sensor detects the presence and position of a user's finger, stylus, marker, smart pen, and/or other marking and/or indicating device within an area bounded by the frame shape (eg, an area spanning the surface of the transparent display assembly). can be configured to Sensors may be disposed along and/or within the length of one or more frame portions (eg, within a channel defined by one or more frame portions). One or more frame parts may include sensors, circuitry and/or connections. One or more frame parts may include at least one, two, three, or four frame parts (eg, 1012, 1019, and 1020). The frame portion may be a bezel. The frame portion may include a groove. The frame portion may be configured to hold the display composition. The width of the frame portion grooves may be configured to accommodate the width of the display composition. In some embodiments, every edge (eg, side) of the display composition may include a touch screen frame. The circuitry may process the signal from the sensor and output a signal indicative of the position of the marking or indication device within the area bounded by the frame. The frame may include connections to other circuitry, including circuitry disposed on or coupled to the transparent display assembly (eg, circuitry on an L-bracket). The circuitry may include, but is not limited to, one or more of a processor, memory, display, analog and/or digital circuitry.

The frame can provide a transparent display assembly with interactive display functionality (eg, white board functionality). A fixed or moved position of a user's finger or display device relative to the transparent display can be sensed by a sensor of the frame within an area bounded by the frame, and a signal representing the position can be generated by circuitry in the frame. A signal indicating a position within the area bounded by the frame may include a signal compatible with the display technology of the display. In some embodiments, the signal representing the position within the area bounded by the frame is a Universal Serial Bus (USB, e.g., USB 2.0) and/or Content Management System (CMS) signal (e.g., High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) signal or display port (DP) signal), but is not limited thereto. Signals representing the fixed or moved position of a user's finger or display device within the area of the frame may be processed by software and/or circuitry associated with the frame and/or transparent frame assembly. The processed signal may be displayed on the transparent display assembly, for example in the form of a representation of a fixed or moving position (eg, as a written, printed, shaped). The software associated with the frame and/or transparent display may include (i) display of the sensed position of a user's finger or other display device on another display or device, (ii) interaction with the transparent display and frame by more than one user. other functions including but not limited to interaction, (iii) export of displayed content, (iv) import of displayed content, (v) clearing of displayed content, and/or (vi) selection of display color. It can be configured to provide. In one embodiment, the frame may include one or more commercially available touch screens (eg, from FlatFrog USA Inc., 333 West San Carlos Street, San Jose, CA 95110).

10 shows a display arrangement 1010, components of a fastener including a leaf 1021, primary hinges 1018 and 1015 allowing swiveling of the display arrangement about their axes, and portions of circuitry 1016 (e.g., Shows an example of a secondary hinge (comprising portion 1017) that facilitates exposure of the booster board and/or driver board. Leaf 1021 has an opening that facilitates access to circuitry 1016 through the opening covered by hinge leaf 1017 . The display configuration 1010 is framed by a touch screen sensor array 1013 and protective covers 1012 and 1019 covering the sensor array with protective framing. Display configuration 1050 shows a touch screen sensor array 1052 covered with and assembled with display configuration 1050 and assembled fasteners 1056 . In some examples, the secondary hinge (eg, 1017) is not present (eg, as in example 3504). In some embodiments, fasteners (including primary hinges) have openings through which at least a portion of circuitry (eg, a PCB) is visible and/or accessible. For example, at least some of the connectors within the circuitry may be viewable and/or accessible through the opening. For example, at least some of the connectors between the circuitry and the display component are shown in an opening (eg, allowing viewing of connector 3509 attached to circuitry 3530 (eg, including a booster and/or driver board)). may be observable and/or accessible through aperture 3504 at 35).

In one embodiment, the fastener includes one or more parts (eg, hinges) configured to provide a physical connection of the transparent display to the window. In one embodiment, one or more portions of the fastener are configured to provide movement between the transparent display and a light in the window (eg, using a hinge of the fastener).

Referring to FIG. 4 , in one embodiment, the L-bracket includes one or more hinges, such as hinge 400 . In one embodiment, the hinge includes a plurality of elongated holes or slots. In one embodiment, an axis of extension of at least one of the plurality of apertures is orthogonal to an axis of extension of at least one other aperture of the plurality of apertures. This allows a way to install the transparent display assembly to the window frame. For example, one or more hinges (eg, 400) are mounted to the window frame through holes that provide distance for the transparent display assembly to be removed from the window (eg, 711). Prior to its mounting, an L-bracket (e.g., 701) pre-mounted to the transparent display assembly may be attached to the other leg of one or more hinges (e.g., 400), which may be attached to a plurality of other orthogonal to those on the other leg of the hinge. Provides for centering the L-bracket/transparent display element within the visible area of the window, through the hole, between the framing elements.

Referring to FIG. 7 , in one embodiment, one or more hinges have a joint 750 connecting a first hinge leaf 752 and a second hinge leaf 753 shown in a closed position 791 . The open position is shown at 720, where the dotted arrow 790 indicating the relative movement of the first hinge leaf may be referred to herein as the "first leg" and the second hinge leaf may be referred to herein as the "first leg". 2 legs". The first leg may be coupled to or include the bracket. Fasteners comprising hinge leaves 752 and 753 are coupled to display construction 754 (shown in partial view) and window 751 (shown in partial view). The second leg may be coupled to window frame 755 . In one embodiment, one or more hinges are configured to enable movement of the transparent display assembly away from or towards the viewing window. In one embodiment, the movement is rotatable about a longitudinal axis, or pivot. In one embodiment, during movement of the transparent display relative to the viewing window, movement of the transparent display assembly may break circuitry 757 (eg, booster and/or driver boards), conductors 758 such as ribbon cables, and/or the transparent display. It does not occur to other wiring elements used to couple to circuitry. FIG. 7 shows an example of a display composition 784 (shown in partial view) coupled to the first hinge leaf 782 . Hinge leaf 782 is coupled by a joint 780 to a second hinge leaf 783 coupled to a cover 785 coupled to a window frame for window 781 (shown in partial view).

This configuration provides longer life to the electrical connection between the display and the controller (eg, T-CON) because the connection is affected by movement and friction associated with movement of the transparent display and fastener (eg, bracket) assembly. because it does not receive

Referring to FIG. 8 , in one embodiment, seals are provided along at least three edges of the transparent display assembly, such as along the edges of the laminate assembly as described herein. In an embodiment, the seal is in the form of a silicone or other transparent plastic, resin, or other polymeric cap (or bumper) that fits over the edge of the laminate transparent assembly to seal the unit. The seal may provide a bumper function between the second cover glass (eg, 710 of FIG. 7 ) and the window (eg, 711 of FIG. 7 ). 8 shows a seal and display applied according to arrows 811, 812, 813 along three sides of a display configuration 850, such as by use of an applicator (eg, syringe gun) 810. An example of a perspective view of a structure 850 is shown. Display configuration 850 is coupled to fasteners 530 on which wires 802 connect the display matrix within the display configuration to circuitry disposed within fasteners (not shown). The display construction 850 also includes a thicker support structure (eg, glass window) 804 , a thinner support structure (eg, glass window) 805 , adhesive layers 806 and 808 , display matrix 807 and seal 809 as a vertical section 830 of a portion of a display construction. The seal may protrude from the supporting structure (eg, a glass window) and/or act as a bumper. The projections of the seal may be random or directional. For example, the protrusion may be directed towards one side of the display configuration (eg, intended to touch the window). The protrusion of the seal may be (eg, substantially) uniform or non-uniform (eg, toward one side of the display construction).

9 shows an example of a cover 903 (shown in cross section) that can be used to hide the L-bracket 904 from view. Cover 903 may be removably attached to window frame 905 . Power and communication can be delivered to the transparent display assembly via wires 906 contained within window frame 905 in this example. The L-brackets may allow servicing or replacement of the transparent display, and/or servicing or replacement of any circuitry (eg, disposed within a fastener of which the bracket is a part). 9 shows an example of a transparent display assembly having a display construction comprising a (eg glass) window 907, a display matrix 908, and a (eg glass) window 902, which display construction comprises a frame coupled to or consisting of (905). The frame may include parts coupled to each other or configured to be coupled to each other. A frame may include at least three parts. The frame may include a shape that matches (eg, approximates) the shape of at least a portion of the periphery of the display construction (eg, the transparent display assembly). The frame may be bonded or attached to the side (or edge) of the display construction (eg, transparent display assembly). In one embodiment, the frame portions are coupled together to form a frame shape, such as after the frame portions are coupled to a display construction (eg, a transparent display assembly). In one embodiment, frame portions may be joined together to form a frame shape, such as before the frame portions are coupled to a display construction (eg, a transparent display assembly). A display construction (eg, a transparent display assembly) may be positioned within the area bounded by the frame shape. The frame portion may include a channel (eg, a U-shaped channel) configured to receive and/or retain the sides of the transparent display assembly therein.

9 shows an example of a window frame (eg, mullion) portion 951 to which a fastener 953 is attached (the fastener includes a hinge/lock 952). Fasteners 953 are electrically disposed on display construction 954 (shown in partial view), and on first window 955, enclosed environment 957, second window 956, and window 956. It is coupled to an integrated glass unit 961 (IGU) (shown in partial view) comprising a color changing composition 958. The enclosed environment within the IGU may be an insulated, sealed (eg, hermetically sealed) and/or inert environment. 9 shows a power unit and/or controller (e.g., timing controller), collectively indicated at 959, disposed within frame portion 951 and moving from the environment outside window frame 951 to display component 954. Examples of electrical wiring and/or communication paths 960 are shown. Electrical wiring and/or communication paths may travel through the window frame to the IGU. Electrical wiring and/or communication paths may travel through the controller and/or power assembly to the IGU. The window may be of a transparent rigid material (eg glass or a polymer such as plastic). Transparent may be at least at wavelengths that are sensitive to the average human observer.

The present invention should not be limited by the embodiments, aspects and advantages disclosed above, as other embodiments, aspects and advantages, including one or more of the following, are within their scope. In one embodiment, the present invention includes a structure (eg, fastener), wherein the structure (eg, fastener) is comprised of a first portion and a second portion, the first portion and the second portion being mutually related. It is configured to move about. In one embodiment, the structure includes one or more brackets. In one embodiment, the structure includes one or more hinges. In one embodiment, the structure includes one or more electrical connectors. In one embodiment, the electrical connector includes a micro coaxial cable. In one embodiment, the electrical connector includes one or more ribbon cables. In one embodiment, the structure is configured to be mounted in a display configuration (eg, including a transparent display). In one embodiment, the transparent display is a T. OLED display. In one embodiment, a display construction (eg, including a transparent display) includes one or more optically clear glass, hardened polymer (eg plastic), or hardened resin. In one embodiment, the structure includes one or more electronic circuitry configured to communicate with a display matrix (eg, a transparent display matrix). In one embodiment, the structure is configured to be mounted to a frame. In one embodiment, the frame includes a window frame. In one embodiment, the structure is configured to be mounted to the FLS (eg length) of the transparent display. In one embodiment, the structure comprises a length, where the length is from about 0.1 feet to about 10 feet. In one embodiment, the first portion of the fastener includes at least one bracket and the second portion of the fastener includes one or more hinges. In one embodiment, the structure includes a display matrix and an adhesive element, wherein the display matrix is mounted to the first part and/or the second part, eg via an adhesive element. In one embodiment, the adhesive element comprises an adhesive tape. In one embodiment, the adhesive tape includes VHB tape. In one embodiment, the first portion of the fastener and/or the second portion of the fastener are configured to be mounted to a viewing window (eg, a tintable window). In one embodiment, a first portion of the fastener is configured to be mounted to a display structure and a second portion is configured to be mounted to a window (where the second portion comprises a hinge). In one embodiment, the hinge includes a plurality of elongated apertures, wherein an axis of extension of at least one of the plurality of apertures is orthogonal to an axis of extension of at least one other aperture of the plurality of apertures.

In one embodiment, the invention includes a frame. The frame may consist of a transparent display and fasteners (including brackets) configured to provide movement and physical connection between the frame and a display component (eg, including a transparent display). In one embodiment, the frame includes a window frame. In one embodiment, the bracket includes an L-bracket, where the L-bracket is coupled to a frame and a display component (eg, including a transparent display). In one embodiment, the bracket is coupled to the transparent display via an adhesive structure. In one embodiment, the adhesive structure includes an adhesive tape. In one embodiment, the bracket includes one or more hinges. In one embodiment, the hinge is configured to provide movement of a display construction (eg, including a transparent display) relative to a fixture (eg, a window frame). In one embodiment, the movement includes rotational movement. In one embodiment, the movement is about a horizontal axis. In one embodiment, the movement is about a vertical axis. In one embodiment, the frame includes lights (eg, window panes). In one embodiment, the bracket is configured to move the face of the transparent display closer to or relative to the face of the light. In one embodiment, the frame defines an interior area (eg, which is the surface of a window within the frame), where the transparent display includes a height and width defining an area that fits within the interior area. In one embodiment, an area of a display configuration (eg, including a transparent display) fits within (eg, substantially) all of the interior area. In one embodiment, the area of the transparent display fits within 1/2 or less than 1/2 of the inner area. In one embodiment, the structure includes one or more conductors, ribbon cables and/or connectors, and the one or more conductors, ribbon cables and/or connectors provide an electrical connection between the control and the transparent display.

In some embodiments, an assembly is formed having a display construction and fasteners. The display construction may be glued to at least one component of the fastener, such as a bracket. 11 shows an example of the steps for constructing an assembly of a display construction and fastener. At 1110, the display composition 1112 has an area 1112 designated for adhesive application. At 1120 , adhesive is applied over the adhesive designation area according to an arrow, such as 1121 . At 1130, fasteners 1131 (eg, L brackets) are placed over the adhesive designated area with applied adhesive disposed thereon. Items 1121, 1131, and 1112 show portions of display components. The fasteners and display components may be disposed in the same plane or in different planes. At least a portion of the fasteners may be disposed in the same plane or in a different plane relative to the display configuration. The display construction may be coupled to the fastener at an angle (eg, as shown at 1210 of FIG. 12 ). The display construction and fasteners may form one plane (eg, as shown at 1220). 12 shows an example of a display component 1211 forming an angle with the fastener 1218 and a display component 1221 forming a flat plane with the fastener 1228 . A display construction may include an illuminating entity (eg, an LED) that illuminates more in one direction than in another (eg, in a forward direction more than in a backward direction). An image displayed by the display matrix may be more clearly visible from one side of the display matrix than from the opposite side. The display configuration may include two display matrices of illuminating entities (eg, LED matrices) disposed back to back. At least one of the two display matrices (eg, each of them) has its more illuminating side facing away from the rear (and facing the viewer) and its less illuminating side facing backward (and facing away from the viewer). ) can be placed. A back-to-back arrangement of display matrices in a display configuration can facilitate clear image viewing from both sides of the display configuration. A display configuration having a back-to-back display matrix may use flat fasteners (eg, 1228). In some embodiments, the two display components are such that at least one of the display components (eg, each of them) has its more illuminating side facing away from the rear (and towards the viewer) and its less illuminating side facing away from the rear (and facing the viewer). They can be placed adjacent to each other in a back-to-back configuration so that they can face backwards (and face away from the viewer). The two back-to-back display components can use flat fasteners (eg, 1228) to fasten both display components to the structure (eg, fixture).

In some embodiments, a window is placed within an enclosure. In some embodiments, an enclosure includes an area defined by at least one structure. At least one structure may include at least one wall. An enclosure may contain and/or enclose one or more sub-enclosures. At least one wall may be made of metal (eg, steel), clay, stone, plastic, glass, plaster (eg, gypsum), polymer (eg, polyurethane, styrene, or vinyl), asbestos, or fiberglass. , concrete (eg, reinforced concrete), wood, paper, or ceramic. At least one wall may include wire, brick, block (eg, cinder block), tile, drywall, or frame (eg, steel frame).

In some embodiments, the enclosure includes one or more openings. One or more openings may be reversibly closable. One or more openings may be permanently open. The fundamental length scale of one or more openings may be smaller than the fundamental length scale of the wall(s) defining the enclosure. The basic length scale may include the diameter, length, width, or height of the bounding circle. A surface of one or more openings may be smaller than a surface of the wall(s) defining the enclosure. Aperture surface can be a percentage of the total surface of the wall(s). For example, the aperture surface may be about 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, or 1% of the wall(s) in dimension. The wall(s) may include a floor, ceiling or sidewall. The closable opening may be closed by at least one window or door. An enclosure may be at least part of a facility. An enclosure may contain at least a portion of a building. The building may be a private building and/or a commercial building. A building may contain one or more floors. A building (eg its floor) is a room, hall, foyer, attic, basement, balcony (eg internal or external balcony), stairway, hallway, elevator shaft, fagade, mezzanine ( mezzanine), penthouse, garage, porch (eg, enclosed porch), terrace (eg, enclosed terrace), cafeteria, and/or at least one of a duct. A building may include a family home. The building may be an apartment building (eg, a multi-residential building) or a single family home. A facility may include one or more buildings. In some embodiments, an enclosure may be stationary and/or mobile (eg, train, airplane, ship, vehicle (eg, car), or rocket).

Certain disclosed embodiments provide a network infrastructure within an enclosure (eg, facility such as a building). Network infrastructure is available for a variety of purposes, such as providing telecommunications and/or power services. Communication services may include high-bandwidth (eg, wireless and/or wired) communication services. The communication service may be for occupants of the facility and/or for users outside the facility (eg, building). The network infrastructure may operate in cooperation with, or in part substitute for, the infrastructure of one or more cellular carriers. The network infrastructure may be provided in a facility that includes electrically switchable windows. An example of a component of a network infrastructure includes high-speed backhaul. The network infrastructure may include at least one cable, switch, physical antenna, transceiver, sensor, transmitter, receiver, radio, processor, and/or controller (which may include a processor). A network infrastructure may include and/or be operatively coupled to a wireless network. The network infrastructure may include wiring. One or more sensors may be deployed (eg, installed) in the environment as part of and/or after installing the network. The network infrastructure may be configured to facilitate at least third generation (3G), fourth generation (4G) or fifth generation (5G) cellular communications. The network may be configured to facilitate media transmission (eg, transmission of presentations, stills, or video (eg, movies, and/or advertisements)). A network may be configured for simultaneous data and power communication (eg, over the same cable, such as a coaxial cable).

In some embodiments, the enclosure includes one or more sensors. Sensors may determine whether the occupants of the enclosure are more comfortable, pleasant, beautiful, healthy, productive (eg, in terms of occupant performance), easier to live (eg, work), or any of these factors. It can facilitate controlling the environment of an enclosure, so that it can have any combination of environments. The sensor(s) may be configured as low resolution or high resolution sensors. A sensor may provide an on/off indication of the presence and/or occurrence of a particular environmental event (eg, one pixel sensor).

In various embodiments, the network infrastructure supports a control system for one or more viewing windows, such as electrochromic (eg, tintable) windows. A control system may include one or more controllers operably coupled (eg, directly or indirectly) to one or more windows. In some embodiments, an electrochromic window is an example of an optically switchable window, a tintable window, and/or a smart window. The concepts disclosed herein can be applied to other types of switchable optical devices including, for example, liquid crystal devices or suspended particle devices. For example, a liquid crystal device and/or a suspended particle device may be implemented instead of or in addition to an electrochromic device.

In some embodiments, a tintable window exhibits a (eg, controllable and/or reversible) change in at least one optical property of the window, eg, when a stimulus is applied. Stimulation may include optical, electrical, and/or magnetic stimulation. For example, the stimulus may include an applied voltage. One or more tintable windows may be used to control lighting and/or glare conditions, for example, by modulating the transmission of solar energy propagating through it. One or more tintable windows may be used to control the temperature within a building, for example by modulating the transmission of solar energy propagating through it. Control of solar energy can control the heat load imposed on the interior of a facility (eg, building). Control can be manual and/or automatic. Controls may be used to maintain one or more requested (eg, environmental) conditions, such as occupant comfort. Control may include reducing energy consumption of heating, ventilation, air conditioning, and/or lighting systems. At least two of heating, ventilation, and air conditioning may be induced by separate systems. At least two of heating, ventilation, and air conditioning may be induced by a single system. Heating, ventilation, and air conditioning may be induced by a single system (abbreviated herein as “HVAC”). In some cases, a tintable window can be responsive to (eg, and communicatively coupled to) one or more environmental sensors and/or user controls. The tintable window may include an electrochromic window (eg, may be an electrochromic window). The window may be located in a range from the inside to the outside of a structure (eg, facility, building). However, this need not be the case. The tintable window may operate using a liquid crystal device, a suspended particle device, a microelectromechanical systems (MEMS) device (eg, micro shutter), or any technology configured to control light transmission through the window. Windows (e.g., with MEMS devices for tinting) are disclosed in US Patent Application No. 14/443,353, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In some cases, one or more viewing (eg, tintable) windows may be located inside a building, eg, between a conference room and a hallway. In some cases, one or more viewing (eg, tintable) windows may be used in automobiles, trains, aircraft, and other vehicles, for example in lieu of manual and/or non-tinting windows.

In some embodiments, the tintable window includes an electrochromic device (referred to herein as an “EC device” (abbreviated herein as ECD), or “EC”). The EC device may include at least one coating comprising at least one layer. At least one layer may include an electrochromic material. In some embodiments, the electrochromic material exhibits a change from one optical state to another when a potential is applied across the EC device, for example. The transition of an electrochromic layer from one optical state to another may be, for example, reversible, semi-reversible, or irreversible ion insertion and charge-balancing into the electrochromic material (eg, by intercalation). can be caused by a corresponding injection of electrons. For example, the transition of an electrochromic layer from one optical state to another can be caused by, for example, reversible ion insertion into the electrochromic material (eg, by intercalation) and corresponding charge-balancing electrons. Can be caused by injection. Reversible can be for the expected lifetime of the ECD. Semi-reversible refers to a measurable (eg, noticeable) degradation in the reversibility of the tint of a window over one or more tinting cycles. In some cases, the fraction of the ions responsible for the optical transition is irreversibly bound to the electrochromic material (e.g., and thus, the induced (altered) tint state of the window returns to its original tinted state. not reversible). In various EC devices, at least some (eg, all) of the irreversibly bound ions may be used to compensate for “blind charges” in the material (eg, ECD).

In some embodiments, suitable ions include cations. Cations may include lithium ions (Li+) and/or hydrogen ions (H+) (ie, protons). In some embodiments, other ions may be suitable. Intercalation of cations may be present in the (eg metal) oxide. Changes in the intercalation state of ions (eg, cations) into the oxide can lead to visible changes in the tint (eg, color) of the oxide. For example, oxides can transition from a colorless state to a colored state. For example, intercalation of lithium ions into tungsten oxide (WO3-y (0 < y < about 0.3)) can cause the tungsten oxide to change from a transparent state to a colored (eg, blue) state. . An EC device coating as described herein is placed within the visible portion of the tintable window such that tinting of the EC device coating can be used to control the optical state of the tintable window.

13 shows an example of a schematic cross-section of an electrochromic composition 1300 in accordance with some embodiments. The EC device coating comprises a substrate 1302, a transparent conductive layer (TCL) 1304, an electrochromic layer (EC) 1306 (sometimes referred to as a cathodic coloring layer or a cathodic tinting layer), an ion conducting layer or region ( IC) 1308 , a counter electrode layer (CE) 1310 (sometimes referred to as an anode coloring layer or an anode tinting layer), and a second TCL 1314 . Elements 1304, 1306, 1308, 1310, and 1314 are collectively referred to as electrochromic stack 1320. A voltage source 1316 operable to apply an electrical potential across the electrochromic stack 1320 has the effect of transitioning the electrochromic coating from, for example, a clear state to a tinted state. In another embodiment, the order of the layers is reversed relative to the substrate. That is, the layers are present in the following order: substrate, TCL, counter electrode layer, ion conducting layer, electrochromic material layer, TCL.

In various embodiments, the ion conductor region (eg 1308 ) may be formed from a portion of the EC layer (eg 1306 ) and/or a portion of the EC layer (eg 1310 ). In such an embodiment, an electrochromic stack (eg, 1320) may be deposited to include a cathodic colored electrochromic material (EC layer) in direct physical contact with the anodic colored counter electrode material (CE layer). An ionic conductor region (sometimes referred to as an interfacial region, or a substantially electronically insulating ion conducting layer or region) may be formed where the EC and CE layers meet, for example through heating and/or other processing steps. there is. Examples of electrochromic devices (including, for example, those fabricated without depositing a discrete ionic conductor material) are disclosed in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 13/462,725, filed May 2, 2012, entitled "ELECTROCHROMIC DEVICES." , which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In some embodiments, the EC device coating may include one or more additional layers, such as one or more passive layers. Passive layers can be used to improve certain optical properties, provide moisture resistance, and/or provide scratch resistance. These and/or other passive layers may serve to hermetically seal the EC stack 1320. Various layers, including transparent conductive layers (eg, 1304, 1314) may be treated with antireflective and/or protective layers (eg, oxide and/or nitride layers).

In certain embodiments, the electrochromic device is configured to cycle reversibly (eg, substantially) between a transparent state and a tinted state. Reversibility may be within the expected lifetime of the ECD. The expected lifetime may be at least about 2y (years), 5y, 10y, 15y, 25y, 50y, 75y, or 100y. The expected lifetime may be any value between the foregoing values (eg, from about 5y to about 100y, from about 2y to about 25y, from about 25y to about 50y, or from about 50y to about 100y). A potential can be applied to the electrochromic stack (e.g., 1320) such that when the window is in a first tinted state (e.g., transparent), the electrochromic material (e.g., 1306) can be in a tinted state. Available ions may be present primarily at the counter electrode (eg, 1310). When the potential applied to the electrochromic stack is reversed, ions can be transported across the ion conducting layer (e.g., 1308) into the electrochromic material, causing the material to enter a second tinted state (e.g., a tinted state). there is.

It should be understood that references to the transition between a clear state and a tinted state are not limiting and suggest only one example of an electrochromic transition that may be realized. Unless otherwise specified herein, whenever reference is made to a transition between a transparent state and a tinted state, the corresponding device or process includes other optical state transitions such as non-reflective to reflective, and/or transparent to opaque. In some embodiments, the terms “transparent” and “bleached” refer to an optically neutral state, eg, an untinted, transparent and/or translucent state. In some embodiments, the "color" or "tint" of the electrochromic transition is not limited to any wavelength or range of wavelengths. Selection of appropriate electrochromic material and counter electrode material can control the associated optical transition (eg, from tinted to untinted state).

In certain embodiments, at least some (eg, all) of the materials making up the electrochromic stack are inorganic, solid (ie, solid state), or both inorganic and solid. Since various organic materials tend to degrade over time, especially when tinted building windows are exposed to heat and UV light, inorganic materials offer the advantage of reliable electrochromic stacks that can function for a long time. . In some embodiments, materials in the solid state may provide the advantage of minimal contamination and minimal leakage problems, as materials in the liquid state sometimes do. One or more of the layers in the stack may contain some amount (eg measurable) of organic material. The ECD or any portion thereof (eg, one or more of the layers) may contain little or no measurable organic matter. The ECD or any portion thereof (eg, one or more of the layers) may contain one or more liquids, which may be present in minor amounts. A small amount may be an amount of up to about 100 ppm, 10 ppm, or 1 ppm of ECD. The solid state material may be deposited (or otherwise formed) using one or more processes employing a liquid component, such as certain processes employing sol-gel, physical vapor deposition, and/or chemical vapor deposition.

14 shows an example of a cross-sectional view of a tintable window implemented in an insulated glass unit (“IGU”) 1400, in accordance with some implementations. It may be desirable for an IGU to serve as a basic structure for holding an electrochromic window (also referred to herein as “lights” and singular “light”) when provided for installation within a building. IGU lights can be single-substrate or multi-substrate structures. The light may include, for example, a laminate of two substrates. An IGU (eg, with a double or triple pane configuration) can provide a number of advantages over single pane configurations. For example, multi-pane constructions may provide improved insulation, sound insulation, environmental protection, and/or durability when compared to single-pane constructions. A multi-window configuration may provide increased protection against ECD. For example, an electrochromic film (eg, as well as associated layers and conductive interconnects) may be formed on an interior surface of a multi-pane IGU, and may be formed by inert gas filling within an interior volume of the IGU (eg, 1408). can be protected The inert gas fill may provide at least some (thermal) insulation for the IGU. The electrochromic IGU may have thermal barrier capabilities, such as by a tintable coating that absorbs (and/or reflects) heat and light.

In some embodiments, an “IGU” includes two (or more) substantially transparent substrates. For example, an IGU may include two glass panes. At least one substrate of the IGU may include an electrochromic device disposed thereon. One or more windows of the IGU may have a separator disposed therebetween. The IGU may be of a hermetically sealed construction, eg may have an interior area isolated from the surrounding environment. A “window assembly” may include an IGU. A “window assembly” may include a (eg, stand-alone) laminate. A "window assembly" may include one or more electrical leads for connecting the IGUs and/or laminates, for example. Electrical leads can operably couple (eg, connect) one or more electrochromic devices to a voltage source, switch, etc., and can include a frame supporting the IGU or laminate. A window assembly may include a window controller, and/or a component of a window controller (eg, a dock).

14 shows an example implementation of an IGU 1400 that includes a first window 1404 having a first surface S1 and a second surface S2. In some implementations, the first surface S1 of the first window 1404 faces an external environment, such as outdoors or an external environment. The IGU 200 also includes a second window 1406 having a first surface S3 and a second surface S4. In some implementations, the second surface (eg, S4) of the second window (eg, 1406) provides an interior environment, such as that of a home, building, vehicle, or compartment thereof (eg, an enclosure therein, such as a room). Headed.

In some implementations, the first and second windows (eg, 1404, 1406) are transparent or translucent, such as to light at least in the visible spectrum. For example, each of the windows (eg, 1404, 1406) may be formed from a glass material. The glass material may include architectural glass and/or shatterproof glass. Glass may include silicon oxide (SOx). The glass may include soda lime glass or float glass. The glass may include at least about 75% silica (SiO ₂ ). Glass may include an oxide such as Na ₂ O or CaO. Glass may contain alkali or alkaline earth oxides. Glass may contain one or more additives. The first window and/or the second window may comprise any material having suitable optical, electrical, thermal and/or mechanical properties. Other materials (eg substrates) that may be included in the first window and/or the second window may include plastic, semi-plastic and/or thermoplastic materials such as poly(methyl methacrylate), polystyrene, polycarbonate, allyl diglycol carbonate, SAN (styrene acrylonitrile copolymer), poly(4-methyl-1-pentene), polyester, and/or polyamide. The first window and/or the second window may include a mirror material (eg silver). In some implementations, the first window and/or the second window can be reinforced. Tempering may include tempering, heating, and/or chemical strengthening.

In some embodiments, the sensor(s) are operatively coupled to at least one controller and/or processor. Sensor readings may be obtained by one or more processors and/or controllers. A controller may include a processing unit (eg, CPU or GPU). The controller can receive input (eg, from at least one sensor). The controller may include circuitry, electrical wiring, optical wiring, sockets, and/or outlets. A controller can deliver an output. A controller may include multiple (eg sub-) controllers. A controller may be part of a control system. The control system may include a master controller, a floor controller (eg, it includes a network controller), and a local controller. A local controller can be a window controller (eg, it controls an optically switchable window), an enclosure controller, or a component controller. For example, a controller may be a hierarchical control system (e.g., a main controller directing one or more controllers, e.g., floor controllers, local controllers (e.g., window controllers), enclosure controllers, and/or component controllers). Including) may be part of. The physical location of controller types in a hierarchical control system can vary. For example, at a first time: a first processor may assume the role of a main controller, a second processor may assume the role of a floor controller, and a third processor may assume the role of a local controller. At a second time: the second processor may assume the role of main controller, the first processor may assume the role of floor controller, and the third processor may remain in the role of local controller. At a third time: the third processor may take on the role of main controller, the second processor may take on the role of floor controller, and the first processor may take on the role of local controller. A controller may control one or more devices (eg, may be directly coupled to a device). A controller may be placed proximate to one or more devices it is controlling. For example, a controller may include an optically switchable device (eg, an IGU), an antenna, a sensor, and/or an output device (eg, a light source, a sound source, an odor source, a gas source, an HVAC outlet, or a heater). can control. In one embodiment, a floor controller may direct one or more window controllers, one or more enclosure controllers, one or more component controllers, or any combination thereof. The floor controller may include a floor controller. For example, a floor (eg, including network) controller may control a plurality of local (eg, including window) controllers. A plurality of local controllers may be located within a portion of a facility (eg, within a portion of a building). A portion of the facility may be a floor of the facility. For example, a floor controller can be assigned to a floor. In some embodiments, a floor may include a plurality of floor controllers, depending on, for example, floor size and/or number of local controllers coupled to the floor controller. For example, a floor controller can be assigned to a portion of a floor. For example, a floor controller may be assigned to a subset of local controllers located within a facility. For example, a floor controller may be assigned to a portion of a facility's floor. A master controller may be coupled to one or more floor controllers. Floor controls may be located within the facility. The master controller may be located within the facility or outside the facility. A master controller can be deployed in the cloud. The controller may be part of or operatively connected to the building management system. A controller may receive one or more inputs. A controller may produce one or more outputs. The controller can be a single input single output controller (SISO) or multiple input multiple output controller (MIMO). A controller may interpret the received input signal. A controller may obtain data from one or more components (eg, sensors). Acquisition may include reception or extraction. Data may include measurement, estimation, determination, generation, or any combination thereof. The controller may include feedback control. The controller may include feed-forward control. Control may include on-off control, proportional control, proportional integral (Pl) control, or proportional integral derivative (PID) control. Control may include open-loop control or closed-loop control. The controller may include closed loop control. The controller may include open loop control. The controller may include a user interface. The user interface may include (or be operatively coupled to) a keyboard, keypad, mouse, touch screen, microphone, speech recognition package, camera, imaging system, or any combination thereof. Output may include a display (eg, screen), a speaker, or a printer. FIG. 15 shows an example of a control system architecture 1500 that includes a master controller 1508 controlling a floor controller 1506, which in turn controls a local controller 1504. In some embodiments, the local controller controls one or more IGUs, one or more sensors, one or more output devices (eg, one or more emitters), or any combination thereof. 15 illustrates an example configuration in which a master controller is operatively coupled (eg, wirelessly and/or wired) to a building management system (BMS) 1524 and database 1520 . Arrows in Fig. 15 indicate communication paths. The controller may be operably coupled (eg, directly/indirectly and/or wired and/or wirelessly) to the external source 1510 . External sources can include networks. An external source may include one or more sensors or output devices. External sources may include cloud-based applications and/or databases. Communication may be wired and/or wireless. An external source may be located outside the facility. For example, the external source may include one or more sensors and/or antennas disposed, for example, on a wall or on a ceiling of a facility. Communication can be unidirectional or bidirectional. In the example shown in FIG. 15, all communication arrows are bi-directional. 15 shows an example of a perspective view of an enclosure 1501 (eg, building).

A controller may monitor and/or direct changes in operating conditions of devices, software, and/or methods described herein. Control can include adjusting, manipulating, limiting, directing, monitoring, adjusting, tampering, altering, mutating, inhibiting, confirming, guiding, or managing. Controlled (e.g., by a controller) may include attenuated, modulated, altered, supervised, restrained, trained, modulated, restrained, supervised, manipulated, and/or guided. there is. Control may include controlling a controlled variable (eg, temperature, power, voltage, and/or profile). Control can include real-time or offline control. Calculations used by the controller may be performed in real time and/or offline. The controller may be a manual or non-manual controller. The controller may be an automatic controller. The controller can act upon request. The controller may be a programmable controller. The controller can be programmed. A controller may include a processing unit (eg, CPU or GPU). The controller can receive input (eg, from at least one sensor). A controller can deliver an output. A controller may include multiple (eg sub-) controllers. A controller may be part of a control system. The control system may include a master controller, floor controller, local controller (eg enclosure controller, or window controller). A controller may receive one or more inputs. A controller may produce one or more outputs. The controller can be a single input single output controller (SISO) or multiple input multiple output controller (MIMO). A controller may interpret the received input signal. A controller may obtain data from one or more sensors.

Acquisition may include reception or extraction. Data may include measurement, estimation, determination, generation, or any combination thereof. The controller may include feedback control. The controller may include feed-forward control. Control may include on-off control, proportional control, proportional integral (Pl) control, or proportional integral derivative (PID) control. Control may include open-loop control or closed-loop control. The controller may include closed loop control. The controller may include open loop control. The controller may include a user interface. The user interface may include (or be operatively coupled to) a keyboard, keypad, mouse, touch screen, microphone, speech recognition package, camera, imaging system, or any combination thereof. Output may include a display (eg, screen), a speaker, or a printer.

The methods, systems and/or apparatus described herein may include a control system. A control system may be in communication with any of the devices (eg, sensors) described herein. The sensors may be of the same type or of a different type, for example as described herein. For example, the control system may be in communication with the first sensor and/or the second sensor. A control system may control one or more sensors. A control system may control one or more components of a building management system (eg, lighting, security, and/or air conditioning systems). The controller may adjust at least one (eg, environmental) characteristic of the enclosure. The control system may use any component of the building management system to regulate the environment of the enclosure. For example, the control system may regulate the energy supplied by the heating element and/or by the cooling element. For example, the control system may regulate the speed of air flowing through the vents into and/or out of the enclosure. A control system may include a processor. A processor may be a processing unit. A controller may include a processing unit. The processing unit may be centralized. A processing unit may include a central processing unit (abbreviated herein as “CPU”). The processing unit may be a graphics processing unit (abbreviated herein as “GPU”). The controller(s) or control mechanisms (including, for example, a computer system) may be programmed to implement one or more methods of the present disclosure. A processor may be programmed to implement the methods of the present disclosure. A controller may control at least one component of a molding system and/or apparatus disclosed herein.

16 shows a schematic example of a computer system 1600 programmed or otherwise configured with one or more operations of any of the methods presented herein. The computer system controls (e.g. directs, monitors) various features of the methods, devices and systems of the present invention, such as, for example, controlling heating, cooling, lighting and/or ventilation of an enclosure, or any combination thereof. and/or control). A computer system can be part of or be in communication with any sensor or device (eg, including a sensor and/or emitter) ensemble disclosed herein. A computer may be coupled to one or more mechanisms and/or any portion thereof disclosed herein. For example, a computer may be coupled to one or more sensors, valves, switches, lights, windows (eg, IGUs), motors, pumps, optical components, or any combination thereof.

In some embodiments, the circuitry is operatively (eg, communicatively) coupled to a network of enclosures (eg, facilities comprising buildings). The circuitry may include a driver board or controller. The controller may be any controller disclosed herein (eg, a timing controller, a touch screen controller, and/or any controller of a (eg, hierarchical) control system). A controller may be operatively coupled to the device ensemble. A device ensemble may include a sensor or emitter. For example, a device ensemble may include a plurality of sensors, a plurality of emitters, a sensor, an emitter, or any combination thereof. The emitter may be a light (eg LED) or sound (eg buzzer or loudspeaker) emitter. The sensor may sense any environmental property of the environment (eg, light, temperature, chemical inclusions (eg, in the atmosphere), or sound). Chemical content includes volatile organic compounds (VOCs), carbon dioxide, oxygen, carbon monoxide, hydrogen sulfide, oxygen, nitrogen, nitric oxide (NO) and nitrogen dioxide (NO ₂ ), inert gases, noble gases (eg, radon), chlorophores, ozone, It may contain formaldehyde, methane, or ethane, or moisture. The control system may be configured to control the environment (eg, via a network) using, for example, a building management system. A control system may be configured to control (eg, over a network) ventilation, heating, air conditioning, air conditioning, lighting, security, safety, fire, or sound systems of an enclosure (eg, facility). The control system can be configured to control (eg, over a network) the at least one tintable window, display composition, and/or touch screen. A network may facilitate updating any of the software (eg, non-transitory computer readable media) associated with a device to which it is operably (eg, communicatively) coupled. A network can facilitate updating any of the logic (eg, control logic) associated with a device to which it is operably (eg, communicatively) coupled. Logic can be built into software. A network may facilitate updating any of the data streams associated with a device to which it is operably (eg, communicatively) coupled. Updates can be made in real time. The network may facilitate response times and/or update times with delays of up to about 2 milliseconds (ms), 3 ms, 4 ms, 5 ms, 7 ms, 10 ms, or 15 ms. The network may facilitate low-latency communication. The display components, touch screen functionality, and/or tintable windows may (eg, each) have a unique identification (alphanumeric) code. The display components, touch screen functionality, and/or tintable windows may (eg, each) be uniquely recognized by the network and/or control system. A display construct, touch screen functionality, and/or tintable window may be uniquely identified as a device and/or node by a network and/or control system (eg, respectively).

In some embodiments, devices (eg, display components, touch screen functionality, and/or tintable windows) are communicatively coupled to the network. Third party devices and/or data streams (eg, third party media providers) may use network authentication protocols to communicate with, for example, control systems and/or other devices. A network authentication protocol may open one or more ports for network access. The port(s) may be opened when an organization and/or facility authenticates (eg, via network authentication) the identity of a device attempting to operatively couple (and/or physically couple) to a network. Operably coupling may include communicably coupling. An organization and/or facility may authorize (eg, using the network) a device's access to the network. Access may or may not be restricted. Restrictions may include one or more security levels. The identity of the device may be determined based on credentials and/or certificates. Credentials and/or certificates may be verified by the network (eg, by a server operably coupled to the network). The authentication protocol may or may not be specific for physical communication (eg, Ethernet communication) in a local area network (LAN) using packets, for example. Standards may be maintained by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). Standards may specify the operational characteristics of physical media (eg, target devices) and/or networks (eg, Ethernet). Networking standards may support virtual LANs (VLANs) over local area networks (eg, Ethernet). The standard may support power over a local area network (eg, Ethernet). A network may provide communication through a power line (eg, coaxial cable). The power may be direct current (DC) power. The power may be at least about 12 Watts (W), 15 W, 25 W, 30 W, 40 W, 48 W, 50 W, or 100 W. Standards can facilitate mesh networking. The standard may facilitate local area network (LAN) technology and/or wide area network (WAN) applications. Standards may facilitate physical connections between target devices and/or infrastructure devices (hubs, switches, routers), such as by various types of cables (eg, coaxial, twisted pair, copper cables, and/or fiber cables). there is. An example of a network authentication protocol may be 802.1X, or KERBEROS. Network authentication protocols may include secret key encryption. The network may support (eg, communication) protocols including 802.3, 802.3af (PoE), 802.3at (PoE+), 802.1Q, or 802.11s. The network may support a communication protocol for a building automation and control (BAC) network (eg, BACnet). PoE communication can be facilitated using cables such as twisted pair cables or coaxial cables. The cable may include an IX industrial cable, or an IX extreme performance polymer locking wireline cable. A protocol may define the service(s) used to communicate between the various devices coupled to the network. The one or more devices may include sensors, emitters, tintable windows, display components, touch screen functionality, controllers, transceivers, antennas, third party media provider related equipment, personal computers, mobile circuitry (e.g., laptops, cellular phones, touch pads). and/or any other (eg, third party) device. Protocol services may include device and object discovery (eg, Who-ls, l-Am, Who-Has, and/or l-Have). Protocol services may include Read-Property and Write-Property (eg, for data sharing). Network protocols may define object types (e.g., acted upon by services). A protocol can be defined as one or more data links and/or physical layers (e.g., ARCNET, Ethernet, BACnet/IP, BACnet/IPv6, BACnet/MSTP, Point-To-Point over RS-232, Master-Slave/ over RS-485). Token-Passing, ZigBee, and/or LonTalk) can be defined. The protocol may be dedicated to the device (eg, Internet of Things (loT) device and/or machine to machine (M2M) communication). The protocol may be a messaging protocol. The protocol may be a publish-subscribe type protocol. Protocols can be configured for messaging transport. A protocol can be configured for remote devices. The protocol can be configured for devices with small code footprints and/or minimal network bandwidth. A small code footprint can be configured to be handled by a microcontroller. A protocol may have multiple quality of service levels, including (i) at most once, (ii) at least once, and/or (iii) exactly once. Multiple quality of service levels can increase the reliability of message delivery in a network (eg, to its target). The protocol may facilitate messaging (i) between a device and a cloud and/or (ii) between a cloud and a device. A messaging protocol is configured to broadcast a message to a group of devices (eg, as described herein), such as sensors and/or emitters. The protocol may conform to the Organization for the Advancement of Structured Information Standards (OASIS). The protocol may support security schemes such as authentication (eg, using tokens). The protocol may support an access delegation standard (eg OAuth). The protocol directs information about a second application (and/or website) to a first application (and/or website) without providing the second application with a security code (eg, token and/or password) for the first application. ) can support granting access. The protocol may include Message Queuing Telemetry Transport (MQTT) or Advanced Message Queuing Protocol (AMQP) protocol. The protocol may be configured for a message rate of at least one message per second (eg, per publisher), or more messages per second (eg, per publisher). The protocol may be configured to facilitate message payload sizes of up to about 64, 86, 96, or 128 bytes. The protocol may be configured to run a protocol conformance (eg MQTT) library and/or communicate with any device (eg from a microcontroller to a server) connected to a conformance broker (eg MQTT broker) over a network. . Each device (eg, target device, sensor, or emitter) can be a publisher and/or subscriber. At least one broker can handle millions, or less than millions of simultaneously connected devices. A broker can handle at least about 100, 10000, 100000, 1000000, or 10000000 simultaneously connected devices. In some embodiments, the broker receives at least some (eg, all) of the messages, filters the messages, determines who is interested in each message, and/or those subscribed devices (eg, , the broker is responsible for sending the message to the client). The protocol may require an internet connection to the network. The protocol may facilitate bi-directional and/or synchronous peer-to-peer messaging. The protocol may be a binary wire protocol. Examples of such network protocols, control systems, and networks are disclosed in a US Provisional Patent entitled "MESSAGING IN A MULTI CLIENT NETWORK" filed on March 26, 2020, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Application Ser. No. 63/000,342.

In some embodiments, the controller(s) directly associated with the display configuration are operatively coupled to one or more controllers of the facility. One or more controllers of a facility may be a hierarchical control system. For example, a display construction may be operatively coupled to one or more controllers in a facility via a Power over Ethernet (PoE) connection.

A computer system may include a processing unit (eg, 1606) (“processor,” “computer,” and “computer processor” as used herein). The computer system may include a memory or memory location (e.g., 1602) (e.g., random access memory, read-only memory, flash memory), an electronic storage unit (e.g., 1604) (e.g., hard disk) for communicating with , a communication interface (e.g., 1603) (e.g., a network adapter) for communication with one or more other systems, and peripheral devices (e.g., 1605) such as caches, other memory, data storage, and/or electronic display adapters. can include In the example shown in FIG. 16 , memory 1602, storage unit 1604, interface 1603, and peripheral device 1605 communicate with processing unit 1606 through a communication bus (solid line), such as a motherboard. . The storage unit may be a data storage unit (or data store) for storing data. A computer system can be operatively coupled to a computer network ("network") (eg, 1601) with the aid of a communication interface. The network can be the Internet, the Internet and/or an extranet or an intranet and/or an extranet in communication with the Internet. In some cases, the network is a communication and/or data network. A network may include one or more computer servers enabling distributed computing, such as cloud computing. The network may in some cases implement a peer-to-peer network with the aid of a computer system, enabling a device coupled to the computer system to behave as either a client or a server.

A processing unit may execute a series of machine readable instructions, which may be implemented as a program or software. Instructions may be stored in memory locations such as memory 1602 . Instructions may be directed to a processing unit, which may subsequently program or otherwise configure the processing unit to implement a method of the present disclosure. Examples of operations performed by a processing unit may include fetch, decode, execute and rewrite. A processing unit may interpret and/or execute instructions. Processors include microprocessors, data processors, central processing units (CPUs), graphics processing units (GPUs), systems on a chip (SOCs), coprocessors, network processors, application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), and application specific instruction set processors (ASIPs). , a controller, a programmable logic device (PLD), a chipset, a field programmable gate array (FPGA), or any combination thereof. A processing unit may be part of a circuit such as an integrated circuit. One or more other components of system 1600 may be included in the circuitry.

The storage unit may store files such as drivers, libraries, and stored programs. The storage unit may store user data (eg, user preferences and user programs). In some cases, the computer system may include one or more additional data storage units external to the computer system, eg, located on a remote server that communicates with the computer system via an intranet or the Internet.

A computer system may communicate with one or more remote computer systems over a network. For example, a computer system may communicate with a remote computer system of a user (eg, an operator). Examples of remote computer systems are personal computers (eg, portable PCs), slat or tablet PCs (eg, Apple® iPad, Samsung® Galaxy Tab), phones, smartphones (eg, Apple® iPhone, Android supported devices, Blackberry®) or personal digital assistants. A user (eg, client) may access a computer system through a network.

The methods described herein may be implemented via machine (eg, computer processor) executable code stored in an electronic storage location of a computer system, such as, for example, memory 1602 or electronic storage unit 1604 . Machine executable or machine readable code may be provided in the form of software. During use, processor 1606 may execute code. In some cases, the code may be retrieved from a storage unit and stored in memory for ready access by a processor. In some circumstances, an electronic storage unit may be excluded, with machine executable instructions stored in memory.

The code may be precompiled and configured for use with a machine having a processor adapted to execute the code, or it may be compiled during runtime. The code may be supplied in a programming language of choice such that the code may be executed in pre-compiled or as-compiled form.

In some embodiments, a processor includes code. The code may be program instructions. Program instructions may cause at least one processor (eg, computer) to direct a feed forward and/or feedback control loop. In some embodiments, program instructions cause at least one processor to direct a closed loop and/or open loop control scheme. Control may be based at least in part on one or more sensor readings (eg, sensor data). One controller can direct multiple operations. At least two actions may be directed by different controllers. In some embodiments, different controllers may direct at least two of operations (a), (b) and (c). In some embodiments, different controllers may direct at least two of operations (a), (b) and (c). In some embodiments, a non-transitory computer readable medium causes each different computer to direct at least two of operations (a), (b) and (c). In some embodiments, different non-transitory computer readable media cause each different computer to direct at least two of operations (a), (b) and (c). A controller and/or computer readable medium may direct any of the devices or components thereof disclosed herein. A controller and/or computer readable medium may direct any operation of the methods disclosed herein.

In some embodiments, at least one display composition and associated integrated glass unit(s) are operated in concert with each other. Control of at least one display composition and associated tintable window (eg, integrated glass unit(s)) may be achieved through integration of control of the tintable window and control of the display composition. For example, the display construction and tintable glass may be operatively (eg, communicatively) coupled to a control system, such as via a network. Control of at least one display component may be made via Ethernet. The tint level of the tintable window(s) may be adjusted when one or more associated display components are in use. The tint level of the tintable window may automatically change (eg, darken) when one or more display components are in use. Automatically changing (eg, darkening or brightening) the tint level of the tintable window(s) may be based at least in part on outer radiation and/or display contrast. Automatically changing the tint level of a tintable window may be based at least in part on privacy (eg, limiting the ability of someone outside the facility to view the display composition). When the tintable window(s) are in use, a region of the tintable window can (automatically) change (eg, darken or lighten) its tint level. A region of tintable windows may include a plurality of tintable windows. Zones can include (i) tintable windows facing a particular direction of an enclosure (eg, a facility), (ii) a plurality of tintable windows on a particular face of a facility (eg, a facade), (iii) tintable windows on a particular floor of a facility. windows, (iv) multiple tintable windows of a particular type of room and/or activity (e.g., open space, office, conference room, classroom, hallway, parlor, or cafeteria), (v) the same fixture (e.g., interior or exterior) a tintable window disposed on a wall), and/or (vi) a plurality of user-defined tintable windows (e.g., a group of tintable windows within a room or on a façade that is a subset of a larger group of tintable windows; For example, a conference room that has a display configuration on one of its 8 tintable windows can include 8 tintable windows—zones—which can be tinted. (Automatic) tinting of the tintable window may be based at least in part on whether the display composition is showing active content (eg, content intended for user viewing) or inactive content. Automatically changing the tint level of a tintable window when at least one display component is in use may be overridden by a user (eg, by manually adjusting the tint level). A user may override automatic tinting of the tintable window(s) using mobile circuitry (eg, by means of a remote controller, virtual reality controller, cellular phone, electronic notepad, laptop computer, and/or similar mobile device).

In some embodiments, at least one display composition and associated tintable window(s) may be adjacent to a heat dissipation system (eg, heater). Heat adjacent to display components (e.g., heat generated by display components, any touch screens, circuitry, power supplies, adjacent sensors, adjacent emitters, and/or solar radiation (e.g., transmitted through a tintable window)) is dissipated It can be. Heat can be transferred through conduction, convection, and/or electromagnetic waves (radiation). Heat can be actively or passively removed. Heat may be removed through convection and/or conduction. Active heat removal can be controlled (eg, using a control system). Active (eg, forced) convection (eg, a fan) can create an airflow to dissipate heat adjacent to the display composition(s). Air flow can be in the gap (eg, between the tintable window(s) and the display composition(s)). One or more temperature sensor(s) adjacent to, integrated with, and/or operatively coupled to the display configuration(s) provide a temperature and signal signal to initiate forced convection when a first (high) temperature threshold is reached. can detect The temperature sensor(s) may (automatically) shut down the display component(s) when a second (higher) temperature threshold is reached (eg, to prevent malfunction and/or damage). Damage can be permanent or temporary. The first temperature threshold may have a lower temperature value than the second temperature threshold. The threshold may depend on ambient temperature. Ambient temperature may include the temperature outside the enclosure in which the display composition is disposed, or the temperature within the enclosure in which the display composition is disposed. Heat penetrating through the tintable window(s) may be limited (eg, through the use of low emissivity (Lo-E) glass), eg, to reduce the heat load on the display construction(s).

In some embodiments, operation of the at least one display composition and associated tintable window(s) includes maintenance tasks associated with the display composition(s). Control of maintenance tasks (eg, pixel compensation, temperature, use, and/or reset) of the display configuration may be automatic (eg, using a control system). Pixel compensation may include adjusting the brightness of a pixel within a display composition based at least in part on how the pixel has been used over its lifetime. For example, what wavelength and/or intensity the pixel emitted and optionally for how long. For example, how often those wavelengths and/or intensities were projected by the pixels. For example, what is displayed by that pixel (eg video with motion or static display). Display composition temperature, fan speed, degree of display composition usage, and/or type of display composition usage may be monitored over time. Monitoring can be done by a control system. Monitoring may use sensors coupled to the network (eg, and to the control system). Monitoring may be in situ and/or in real time while the display component is projecting the media. The control system may use image processing to evaluate the state of one or more emitting entities (eg, LEDs or other lights) of the display construction. A sensor may include a camera (eg, a still or video camera). The camera may include a pixel array (eg, a charge coupled device (CCD) camera). The camera may be configured for digital imaging (eg, a CCD or complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) camera). A camera may include a photographic plate. The camera may be sensitive to a color gamut (eg, the full range of colors seen by the average human eye). The control system may monitor the display composition continuously and/or intermittently (eg, at predetermined intervals). The control system may record data relating to continuously or intermittently monitoring the display components. Data may be recorded at predetermined intervals and/or when a threshold is reached. The threshold may be a thermal, electrical and/or optical threshold. The threshold may be time dependent (eg, temperature above 50° C. for more than about 1 minute). Display construction adjustment (eg, resetting) may be based at least in part on such monitoring of display construction (eg, optical, thermal, and/or electrical) properties (eg, according to a time threshold). A threshold can be a value or a function (eg, a time and/or space dependent function). The space may be related to the type of enclosure in which the display composition is placed. For example, a display composition in a conference room may have a lower error tolerance than a display composition in an aisle. Monitoring of the display construction may provide predictions regarding the lifespan of the component(s) (eg, pixels, electrical circuitry, filters and/or fans) of the display construction. Monitoring the display composition (eg, over time) can proactively compensate for any expected attenuation of the display composition or its components (eg, pixels, electrical circuitry, filters and/or fans). Monitoring and/or diagnosis of the display construction may be via a network (eg, a network disposed at least partially within the skin of a facility). Monitoring and/or diagnostics of the display components may be accomplished by the control system. Adjusting (eg, resetting) a display component may include turning the display component off and on (automatically and/or controllably). A display component may be subject to 1 per time interval (e.g., at least about every 24, 36, 48, or 72 hours), e.g., when a pixel of the display component may be susceptible to malfunction (e.g., burn failure). can be cycled twice. The time interval may depend on the type and/or severity of the predicted failure (eg, the predicted failure of one pixel, or the predicted failure of a group of pixels). The time interval for cycling may depend on the type of viewing of the display composition. For example, static observation performed for longer than a predetermined time threshold (eg, using a display composition as a sign) may increase the risk of pixel misbehaving (eg, failure). When a display composition is used for static viewing as opposed to moving video, more frequent on/off cycling can reduce the risk of pixel misfiring in static viewing. The control system can predict (eg, via a software module) maintenance and/or replacement of a display configuration or any of its components (eg, based on the monitored pixel state). The prediction may be based at least in part on real-time sensor measurements of the output of the display component (eg, compared to expected output). The prediction may be based, at least in part, on previous sensor measurements of the output of the display configuration (eg, compared to expected output), such as performed in a laboratory or other testing facility (eg, fatigue testing). The prediction may be based at least in part on observations of the display components to be maintained/replaced. The prediction may be based at least in part on observations of display configurations other than those to be maintained/replaced (eg, test display configurations). The prediction may be based at least in part on the average pixel state, eg, taking into account the illumination profile of the display composition and/or any of its individual pixels. The control system may provide notification regarding anticipated replacement and/or maintenance. Such anticipation may permit the performance of proactive maintenance and/or replacement. Such predictions may allow reserve stocks of respective display configurations to be maintained and/or replaced. Such forecasting may permit timely scheduling of personnel to perform such maintenance and/or replacement.

18 illustrates an example of operation related to at least one display component and associated tintable window(s). Control of the at least one display composition and the associated tintable window(s) may be achieved through integration of control of the tintable window(s) and control of the display composition. Control of at least one display element may be achieved through a network. At block 1801, the tint level of at least one tintable window is adjusted when one or more associated display construction(s) are in use and/or in preparation for use of the display construction. For example, the tint level of the tintable window(s) can be automatically dimmed when one or more display component(s) are in use. Automatically darkening the tint level of the at least one tintable window may be based on (i) outer radiation, (ii) the media displayed on the display composition, (iii) the type of media displayed (e.g., static or changing), and/or or (iv) based at least in part on a privacy request. Automatically darkening the tint level of the tintable window(s) may be based at least in part on privacy (eg, limiting the ability of someone outside the facility to view the display composition). When one or more display components are in use, a region of a tintable window may have its tint level changed (eg, darkened). A region of tintable windows may include a plurality of tintable windows facing a particular direction in a facility, may be a plurality of tintable windows on a particular side of a facility, and/or may include a plurality of tintable windows on a particular floor of a facility. window, can be multiple tintable windows within a particular type of room (e.g., open space, office, conference room, classroom, cafeteria), and/or multiple tintable windows that are user-defined (e.g., tintable A group of tintable windows in a room or on a fargard that is a subset of a larger group of windows, eg, a conference room with a display composition on one of the eight tintable windows, is an area of eight tintable windows. tint can be darkened). The zone can be any zone disclosed herein. Automatic tinting of the tintable window may be based at least in part on whether the display composition is showing active content (eg, content intended for user viewing) or inactive content. At block 1803, automatically darkening the tint level of a tintable window can be overridden by a user manually adjusting the tint level of one or more tintable windows. A user can automatically tint tintable window(s) using mobile circuitry (e.g. remote controller, virtual reality controller, cellular phone, electronic notepad, laptop computer, battery (e.g. drone battery), and/or smart watch). can be overridden. At block 1804, heat adjacent to the display composition (e.g., heat generated by solar radiation transmitted through the tintable window and/or any component associated with the display composition) is transferred to (e.g., a fan or any other heat exchanger). may be dissipated (using the automatic actuation of ) and removed passively and/or actively (eg, controllably). A temperature sensor adjacent to or integrated with the display composition may sense the temperature and signal to initiate an active heat exchange operation (eg, initiate forced convection) when a first high temperature threshold is reached. The temperature sensor may stop the display component(s) when reaching the second higher temperature threshold. Operation 1805 shows the (eg, automation) forecast and/or prediction of maintenance task(s) (eg, pixel compensation, temperature, usage, and/or reset) of the display configuration. Pixel compensation is based at least in part on how much a pixel within a display configuration has been used, how often that pixel has been used, and/or what is displayed by that pixel (e.g., video with motion or static display). This may include adjusting the brightness. Display composition temperature, active heat exchange intensity (eg, fan speed) and/or amount of display composition usage may be monitored. Display configuration adjustments (eg, resetting) may be based at least in part on monitoring display configuration properties. As a pixel degrades, it may require more current and/or voltage to produce the requested output. Adjusting the display composition may include adjusting the intensity of one or more pixels of the display composition to produce the requested output. Monitoring of a display construction may provide predictions regarding the health and/or predicted lifespan of components (eg, pixels, electrical circuitry, filters and/or fans) within the display construction. The control system can notify and/or proactively compensate for any expected attenuation of components associated with the display composition. Monitoring and/or diagnosis of the display components may be achieved at least partially through a network that may be located within the skin of the facility. At block 1807, the display configuration is optionally adjusted and/or reset. Tuning and/or resetting may include automatically turning display components off and on to, for example, increase pixel lifespan and/or reduce pixel output malfunctions.

In some embodiments, operation of the at least one display composition and associated tintable window(s) is based at least in part on a state of the at least one display composition. The status of the display components may be inspected, monitored and/or verified as to whether at least one display component is turned on. When at least one display component is not turned on, a default and/or manual tint level of the tintable window(s) may be activated. The (eg, on/off) state of a display component may be checked periodically. When at least one display component is turned on (eg, operating), it may be determined whether the display component is displaying active content or passive content. When the display component is not turned on (eg, not displaying media), a default or manual tint level of the tintable window(s) can be activated. If the display component is displaying active content,

(i) a region of the tintable window proximate to the display configuration(s) displaying active content may be identified, and/or (ii) an identified tint level of the window in the region (e.g., the presence of solar radiation, solar glare, and and/or have different tint levels based at least in part on the desired contrast), and/or (iii) adjust the tint level of the tintable windows in the identified regions.

19 illustrates an example of control operations relating to at least one display component and associated tintable window(s). The status of at least one display component is checked at block 1901 . At block 1902, the control system determines whether at least one display component is turned on (eg, at least one pixel is controllably emitting radiation). If at least one display component is not turned on, the default or manual tint level of the tintable window(s) is activated at block 1903, and the status of the display component is checked periodically. If at least one display component is turned on, at block 1904 it may be determined whether the display component is displaying active content. If not, the default or manual tint level of the tintable window(s) can be activated at block 1903, and the status of the display components checked periodically. If the display composition is displaying active content, then at block 1905 tintable window(s) proximate to the display composition(s) displaying the active content are identified. The tintable window(s) can be identified at block 1906 for their tint level (e.g., different tint levels based at least in part on the presence of sun/glare and desired contrast), and at block 1907 the tintable window(s) Any tint level adjustment is made for The tintable window may be part of a zone (eg, and the zone may be identified by a controller) or may not be part of a zone. A first tintable window coupled to a display composition is part of an area that includes at least one second tintable window not coupled to a display composition. The tint of the second tintable window may or may not be changed to the tint of the first tintable window. Changing the tint of other windows in the region in concert with changing the tint of a tintable window that is associated with a display composition may be predetermined and/or determined by the user.

In some embodiments, multiple display components are coupled together into a control scheme. A plurality of display components may be mounted adjacent to one or more tintable windows. The tintable window may be connected (eg, wired or wirelessly) through a local (eg, window) controller as part of a control system. A control system may include a distributed network of controllers coupled to a power and/or communication network. The control system may perform various functions (e.g., functions of a facility (e.g., office building, warehouse, etc.)) that may include adjusting the tint of the tintable window(s) and/or displaying media content on a display configuration. can control. The display components may be connected (eg, wired or wirelessly) via a display interface that may be housed within one or more housings. The display interface housing may be referred to herein as an electrical box ((E)-box), for example 2006. The E-box can be operatively coupled (eg, for power and/or communication) to a network. The network may provide data and/or power to the display components. The user content server may provide data to be displayed on the display configuration over a network and/or may provide data and power to the display interface through one or more connections to the display interface. The display interface may include an adapter (eg, Ethernet adapter (eg, RS-485-to-ethernet)) and/or the E-box may include native adapter (eg, Ethernet/IP) support. The E-box may send prompts and/or respond to queries from the network. The connection of the device for data transmission is, for example, Ethernet, USB (e.g., USB 2.0), HDMI, Display Port, Thunderbolt, port under the RS-485 standard, port under the RS-422 standard, port under the RS-232 standard , and/or other types of connections for data and/or media transmission. The connection is at a distance of at least about 10 feet ('), 15', 20', 50', 70', 100', 150', 300', 500', 1000', 2000', 3000', or 4000'. may facilitate wide operating distances (eg, between a transmitter and a receiver) over a wide range. The connection may facilitate a wide range of operating distances over distances of at least about 10 meters (m), 50 m, 100 m, 500 m, 800 m, 1000 m, 1200 m, or 1500 m. Power may be provided to the E-box via power-over-internet and/or via a separate power cable. The plurality of display arrangements may show different content on each display arrangement, may show the same (eg, duplicate) content, or multiple (eg, such that a section of an image is displayed on each of the plurality of display arrangements). It can be configured to show one image across the display composition of the. Connection of display elements may allow a small number (eg, up to 10, 9, 8, 5, 6, or 4) display elements to be controlled via the local controller. In some embodiments, a larger number (eg, more than 10) of display arrangements may be combined via a network (eg, floor) controller, or allow all display arrangements in a facility to be controlled by the main controller. there is. A display composition that can be controlled to display media either individually (eg, independently of other display elements) or data, for example as a single display element (eg, one piece of media each divided among displays within a display group). to display a group of (eg, at least 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 20, 25, 50 or 75 display elements may be arranged in a group (set) of displays) can The display construction may form a video wall. A video wall may include a plurality of display compositions that are tiled together (eg, continuously, or overlapping) to form one large screen. A controller controlling the video wall controller can divide a single image to be projected on the video wall into portions to be displayed on the individual display elements making up the video wall. The display construction may be coupled to a wall (eg, opaque or transparent) or tintable window. Video wall controllers can include hardware-based controllers, or software-based and media card controllers. A hardware-based controller may include a media processing chipset and may not have an operating system. The software based and media card controller can be located within a processor with an operating system. The processor may be a server or may be local. The processor may consist of a multi-output graphics card and/or a video capture input card.

A display composition may be composed of a layout. The layout may include a matrix grid layout (eg, 2x2, 3x3, or 4x4) of the same display geometry (eg, having the same aspect ratio). Layouts may include layouts of unequal display geometries (eg, with different aspect ratios), eg, in configurations other than symmetric matrices. The displayed media content may be the same, divided or entirely different. For example, at least two different parallel contents may be displayed on a video wall of a display arrangement.

20 shows an example of a control scheme for a plurality of display components. A plurality of display arrangements 2002 may be mounted adjacent to a plurality of tintable windows 2003 . The tintable window 2003 controls various functions of the facility (e.g., office building, warehouse, etc.), which may include adjusting the tint of the tintable window 2003, via the local (window) controller 2001. may be connected (eg, wired and/or wirelessly) (2009) to a control network (2004). The display configuration 2002 is controlled by a control network 2004 (including a control system), via a display interface 2005 and a controller housed within a housing (also referred to herein as an electrical (E)-box) 2006. (eg, wired and/or wirelessly) can be connected to (2010). The control network may be coupled to the tintable window and/or display composition through a wiring network, and such wiring (eg, coaxial cable) may provide data and/or power to the display composition 2002 . User content server 2007 may provide (e.g., via wiring and/or control networks) data to be displayed on display component 2002 and/or may provide one or more connections 2011 to display interface 2005. Data and power may be provided to the display interface 2005 through The display interface may include an Ethernet adapter (eg, RS-485-to-ethernet). E-box 2006 may include native Ethernet/IP support. E-box 2006 may send prompts and/or respond to queries from network 2004. The device's connection for data transmission may include, for example, Ethernet, HDMI, Display Port, RS-485, and/or other types of connection for data transmission, such as for media content management system (CMS) signal transmission. can Power may be provided to the E-box 2006 via power over the internet and/or via a separate power cable. Multiple display arrangements 2002 may show different content, the same content, or may be employed to show one image across multiple display arrangements 2002 (eg, as in a video wall).

In some embodiments, display configurations are used to display various media in a facility. The display configuration may include, for example, one or more media displays (eg, TOLED displays) that may be at least partially transparent when the display configuration is not in operation. The display construction may be coupled (eg, directly or indirectly) to a hard surface, such as a wall, board, or window (eg, a vision window). The hard surface may be of a fixture. The window may be a tintable window (eg, an electrochromic window). A window may be placed within a building, or within the envelope of a building. A vision window is an electrochromic window that can be tinted (eg, darkened, brightened, and/or changed its color (eg, tint)), which can provide a background for contrasting media displayed by the display component. It may include a tintable window including a.

In some embodiments, one or more display configurations may be operably coupled (eg, mounted) to a hard surface (eg, a window, wall, or board). Coupling may be via hinges, adhesives, fasteners and/or by other suitable mechanisms. The coupling may be at least partially disposed within one or more window frame portions. The window frame(s) may include a vertical portion (eg, a mullion) and may include a horizontal portion (eg, a transom). The display construction may be directly attached (eg, using an adhesive) to the hard surface. The adhesive may or may not be in contact with the window frame (or part thereof). The hard surface may be composed of a hardened material (eg glass, metal or polymer). A hard surface may include a solid (eg, gypsum, ceramic, concrete, and/or stone). A number of display components may be mounted (eg, via hinges, adhesives, fasteners and/or by other mechanisms).

In some embodiments, the display configuration is controlled by at least one controller. A controller may be part of a control system. The controller may include a controller coupled directly to (eg, connected to) the display configuration. Connections between the controller and display components may be made using wired and/or wireless communications. The controller may be coupled to the display configuration via a plurality of wires (eg, for communication and/or power). A controller may be disposed within the housing. The housing may include one or more materials. Materials may include elemental metals, metal alloys, polymers (eg, plastics), resins, wood, glass, composites, and/or other materials. Materials may include transparent or opaque materials. The material may include a conductive or insulating (eg, dielectric) material. The housing may include a dispersive or specular material. The housing may have multiple faces. At least two (eg, all) of the plurality of wires may extend from one of the plurality of faces of the controller housing. Sometimes a single controller housing (eg, containing one or more controllers) may be coupled to multiple display components. Sometimes a single controller may be operatively coupled (eg, directly) to a single display component. Sometimes a single controller may be operatively coupled (eg, directly) to two or more display components. The direct coupler may include a wire connecting the controller and the display component. The wire may be an uninterrupted wire. The controller and/or housing may include, for example, wiring entries compatible with USB standards (eg, USB 2.0 standards). The wire entry may or may not be in the same plane as the wire exit of the controller housing. Sometimes a plurality of control housings may be disposed adjacent to each other (eg, in contact with each other, or directly coupled to each other (eg, via wires)). At least two wires (eg, of the wires connecting the controller(s) in at least two different housings (eg, all housings) with at least two (eg, all) of the display elements (eg, within a set of display elements). For example, all wires) may extend (i) from the same side type of housing and/or (ii) in the same general direction (eg up, down, left, or right). A face type can be assigned according to the direction the face faces (eg, downward face, up face, eastward face, westward face, northward face, eastward face, or any combination thereof). The direction can be with respect to the user and the center of gravity towards the display composition.

In some embodiments, the controller housing is mounted within a frame portion. The controller housing may be mounted within at least a portion of a window, board, or wall frame. A portion of the frame may include upper horizontal mullion(s) (transom(s)), lower horizontal mullion(s) (transom(s)), and/or vertical (side) mullion, or window frame(s). It can be a combination of mullions forming . Upper and lower are for the center of gravity. The display connector may connect the controller to the display configuration through one or more cables and/or wires. The display connector connecting the controller to the respective display component, which may be via a cable, may extend from one of the plurality of faces of the controller housing, or may extend from more than one of the plurality of faces of the controller housing. can At least two (eg, all) of the cables connecting the controller to the corresponding display component may have (eg, substantially) the same length. The cable may extend at least partially within the window frame(s). Cables connecting the controller to the display components may be of different lengths. The cable may extend at least partially within and/or outside the window frame(s). The (eg, local) controller may include a power supply connector that may be connected to, for example, one or more electrical power supplies. The power supply connectors may be disposed in the same plane as or in a different plane from which the data cables to the display component(s) extend. The different faces may form an angle, and the angle may be (eg substantially) right angles. The different faces may be parallel to each other. Data (eg, communication and/or media) cable(s) may be connected to the controller from one or more data sources (eg, server(s)). The data cable may be connected to a media content provider server and/or a server that controls the level of tint of the window(s). In some embodiments, power and data are coupled to the display components through the same cable (eg, coaxial cable).

In some embodiments, multiple devices (eg, including sensors and/or emitters) are integrated within a common housing. The housing may contain one or more circuit boards. The housing may incorporate an ensemble of devices. An ensemble may have a single housing (eg, cover). One or more circuit boards (eg, printed circuit boards (PCBs)) may be disposed within a single housing. At least one controller may be disposed within the housing. A housing may be adapted to be mounted to a window, wall, ceiling, or any other structure and/or fixture within an enclosure (eg, facility, building, or room) to perform various functions. A common assembly of devices (eg, an ensemble of devices) may include a power conditioning component, circuitry (eg, a processing unit), memory, and/or a network interface. The housing may include a mounting adapter that may be provided for installing the assembly to at least a portion of a fixture, such as a window mullion. The housing may include (I) one or more openings for receiving external environmental feature(s) into the housing, (II) an electrical and/or electromagnetic (eg, radio frequency) shield, and/or (III) a heat exchanger (eg, a passive or active), may include one or more features desirable for optimal performance. For example, the housing may include one or more openings (eg, holes) that facilitate air flow past the circuit board. The housing may include a heat sink. The heat exchanger and/or shield may shield circuitry from external influences and/or may shield between circuit boards encapsulated within the housing. The housing may include an open body and a lid. A lid may include one or more openings (eg, holes). The lid can be snapped into the opening body to close the casing. The housing may include an opening for receiving the cabling.

21A shows an example of a hard surface 2101 (eg, a tintable window) mounted (eg, via hinges and/or adhesives) within a frame 2102 . Frame 2102 includes vertical mullions 2103a and 2103b, and transoms 2104a and 2104b (sometimes referred to as horizontal mullions). The two display constructions 2105a, 2105b are mounted (eg, via hinges and/or adhesives) within the frame 2102, and (eg, all) visible surfaces (eg, boards, or tintable) of the hard surface 2101 . covers the visible surface of a window, such as a window. Two controllers housed in a housing (also referred to herein as an electrical (E-) box) 2106a, 2106b are mounted on a frame 2102 in the upper transom 2104a (with respect to the center of gravity pointed by vector 2100). ) is attached to a part of Circuitry within E-box 2106a (eg, including timing controller, network communications (eg, router), and/or media-related circuitry) is coupled to display component 2105a via wiring 2109a. Circuitry within the E-box 2106b is connected to the display component 2105b via wiring 2109b. Display connector 2108a extends from housing 2106a in the same downward direction. Display connector 2108b extends in the same downward direction from housing 2106b. Connectors 2108a and 2108b are arranged to point in the same downward direction. Cable 2109a is (eg, substantially) the same length from each E-box 2106a, 2106b to a respective display component 2105a, 2105b and extends within a portion of frame 2102. E-box 2106a is configured to connect to power supply cable 2110a (eg, via a connector). E-box 2106b is configured to connect to power supply cable 2110b (eg, via a connector). At least one power supply cable that supplies power to the E-box circuitry may be connected to its own power supply. At least two power supply cables supplying power to the E-box circuitry may be connected to one power supply. 21A shows an example in which two power supply cables 2110a and 2110b are connected to the same power supply 2111 . The power supply cables 2110a, 2110b run perpendicularly (eg, substantially) to the direction in which the display connectors 2108a, 2108b extend from the E-box (eg, the connectors extend on the same side of the E-box). extends from each of them. Media wiring 2112a connects from a data source (eg, server) to circuitry housed within E-box (eg, media circuitry board) 2106b. Media wiring 2112b connects to E-box 2106a and (via E-box 2106b) to cable 2112a and to data source 2115. Media cables 2112a and 2112b may be connected to media content provider servers. The E-box may be operably coupled (eg, wirelessly and/or wired) to a network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls the facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, if the hard surface 2101 is a tintable window, any (e.g., all) of the E-boxes may be connected, e.g., via a media cable (e.g., 2112a and/or 2112b) or via a dedicated cable (e.g., 21a), it can be operatively coupled to at least one controller that controls the level of tint of such a window.

21B shows an example of a hard surface 2121 (eg, a tintable window) mounted (eg, via hinges and/or adhesives) within a frame 2122 . Frame 2122 includes vertical mullions 2123a and 2123b, and transoms 2124a and 2124b (sometimes referred to as horizontal mullions). Four display constructions 2125a, 2125b, 2125c, 2125d are mounted (eg, via hinges and/or adhesives) within frame 2122, and all visible surfaces of hard surface 2121 (eg, boards, or tintable covers the visible surface of a window, such as a window. Four controllers housed in a housing (also referred to herein as an electric (E)-box) 2126a, 2126b, 2126c, 2126d are connected (with respect to the center of gravity pointed by vector 2120) to an upper transom 2124a. It is mounted on a portion of the frame 2122 within. Circuitry within E-box 2126a (eg, including timing controller, network, and/or media related circuitry) is connected to display component 2125a via wiring 2129a. Circuitry within E-box 2126b is connected to display component 2125b via wiring 2129b. Circuitry within E-box 2126a (e.g., including timing controller and media related circuitry) is connected to display component 2125c via wiring 2129c. Circuitry within E-box 2126d is connected to display component 2125d via wiring 2129d. Display connector 2128a extends from housing 2126a in the same downward direction. Display connector 2128b extends in the same downward direction from housing 2126b. A display connector 2128c extends from the housing 2126c in the same downward direction. A display connector 2128d extends from the housing 2126d in the same downward direction. Connectors 2128a, 2128b, 2128c, and 2128d are arranged to point in the same downward direction. Cable 2129a is (e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box 2126a, 2126b, 2126c, 2126d to a respective display component 2125a, 2125b, 2125c, 2125d and is a portion of frame 2102. extended within E-box 2126a is configured to connect to power supply cable 2130a (eg, via a connector). E-box 2126b is configured to connect to power supply cable 2130b (eg, via a connector). E-box 2126c is configured to connect to power supply cable 2130c (eg, via a connector). E-box 2126d is configured to connect to power supply cable 2130d (eg, via a connector). At least one power supply cable that supplies power to the E-box circuitry may be connected to its own power supply. At least two or more power supply cables supplying power to the E-box circuitry may be connected to one power supply source. 21B shows an example in which four power supply cables 2130a, 2130b, 2130c, and 2130d are connected to the same power supply 2131. Power supply cables 2130a, 2130b, 2130c, 2130d extend from each of the E-boxes perpendicular (eg, substantially) to the direction in which the display connectors 2128a, 2128b, 2128c, 2128d extend from the E-box. Media wiring 2132a connects from a data source (eg, server) to circuitry housed within an E-box (eg, media circuitry board) 2126d. Media wiring 2132b connects to E-box 2126c and (via E-box 2126d) to cable 2132a and to data source 2135. Media wiring 2132c connects to E-box 2126b and to cable 2132a (via E-boxes 2126d and 2126c) and to data source 2135. Media wiring 2132d connects to E-box 2126a and (via E-boxes 2126d, 2126c, 2126b) to cable 2132a and to data source 2135. Media cables 2132a, 2132b, 2132c, and 2132d may be connected to media content provider servers. The E-box may be operably coupled (eg, wirelessly and/or wired) to a network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls the facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, if the hard surface 2121 is a tintable window, any (eg, all) of the E-boxes may be connected, such as via a media cable (eg, 2132a, 2132b, 2132c, and/or 2132d) or Via a dedicated cable (not shown in FIG. 21B ), it can be operatively coupled to at least one controller that controls the level of tint of such a window.

22A shows examples of hard surfaces 2221a, 2221b (eg, tintable windows) mounted (eg, via hinges and/or adhesives) within frames 2222a, 2222b. Frames 2222a and 2222b include a vertical mullion 2223, and a transom 2224 (sometimes referred to as a horizontal mullion). Two display components 2225a and 2225b are mounted within frame 2222a, two display components 2225c and 2225d are mounted within frame 2222b, and all visible surfaces of hard surfaces 2221a and 2221b (e.g., board, or the visible surface of a window, such as a tintable window). Four controllers housed within housings (also referred to herein as electric (E)-boxes) 2226a, 2226b, 2226c, 2226d are vertical side mullions 2223 (with respect to the center of gravity pointed by vector 2220). ) is mounted on a portion of the frames 2222a and 2222b. Circuitry within E-box 2226a (eg, including timing controller and media related circuitry) is connected to display component 2225a via wiring 2229a. Circuitry within E-box 2226b is connected to display component 2225b via wiring 2229b. Circuitry within E-box 2226c (eg, including timing controllers, network components, and/or media-related circuitry) is coupled to display component 2225c via wiring 2229c. Circuitry within E-box 2226d is connected to display component 2225d via wiring 2229d. Display connectors 2228a, 2228b, 2228c, and 2228d extend in the same horizontal direction from respective housings 2226a, 2226b, 2226c, and 2226d. Connectors 2228a, 2228b, 2228c, and 2228d are arranged to point in the same horizontal direction. cables 2229a, 2229b, 2229c, 2229d are (e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box 2226a, 2226b, 2226c, 2226d to a respective display component 2225a, 2225b, 2225c, 2225d; It extends within a portion of frames 2222a and 2222b. The E-box may be operably coupled (eg, wirelessly and/or wired) to a network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls the facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, if hard surfaces 2221a, 2221b are more than one tintable window, any (e.g., all) of the E-boxes may operate on at least one controller that controls the level of tint of these windows. can possibly be combined.

22B shows examples of hard surfaces 2231a and 2231b (eg, tintable windows) mounted (eg, via hinges and/or adhesives) within frames 2232a and 2232b. Frames 2232a and 2232b include vertical mullions 2233 and transoms 2234 (sometimes referred to as horizontal mullions). Display composition 2235a is mounted within frame 2232a, display composition 2235b is mounted within frame 2232b, and all visible surfaces of hard surfaces 2231a and 2231b (e.g., boards, or tintable windows) window's visible surface). Two controllers housed in a housing (also referred to herein as an electrical (E)-box) 2236a, 2236b are frame 2232a in upper transom 2234 (with respect to the center of gravity pointed by vector 2230). , 2232b). Circuitry within E-box 2236a (eg, including timing controllers, network components, and/or media-related circuitry) is connected to display component 2235a via wiring 2239a. Circuitry within E-box 2236b is connected to display component 2235b via wiring 2239b. Display connectors 2238a and 2238b extend from respective housings 2236a and 2236b in the same downward direction. Connectors 2238a and 2238b are arranged to point in the same downward direction. Cables 2239a, 2239b are (e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box 2236a, 2236b to a respective display component 2235a, 2235b, and extend within a portion of frame 2232a, 2232b. . The E-box may be operably coupled (eg, wirelessly and/or wired) to a network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls the facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, if hard surfaces 2231a, 2231b are more than one tintable window, any (e.g., all) of the E-boxes may operate on at least one controller that controls the level of tint of these windows. can possibly be combined.

23 shows examples of hard surfaces 2321a, 2321b, 2321c (e.g., tintable windows) mounted (e.g., via hinges and/or adhesives such as 2370) within frames 2322a, 2322b, 2322c. Frames 2322a, 2322b, and 2322c include vertical mullions 2323 and transoms 2324 (also referred to as horizontal mullions). Four display elements 2325a, 2325b, 2325c, and 2325d are mounted in the frame 2322a, two display elements 2325e and 2325f are mounted in the frame 2322b, and two display elements 2325g and 2325h are mounted in the frame 2322b. Mounted within frame 2322c, (eg, substantially) all visible surfaces (or only portions thereof) of respective hard surfaces 2321a, 2321b, 2321c (eg, board, or visible surface of a window, such as a tintable window) ) can be covered. For example, surface 2380 of the tintable window is not covered by the display composition. Four controllers housed in housings (E-boxes) 2326a, 2326b, 2326c, 2326d are mounted on a portion of frame 2322a in upper mullion 2323 (with respect to the center of gravity pointed by vector 2320). . Circuitry within E-box 2326a is connected to display component 2325a via wiring 2329a. The wiring may be configured to transmit data and/or power (eg, to a touch screen). Circuitry within E-box 2326b is connected to display component 2325b via wiring 2329b. Circuitry within E-box 2326c is connected to display component 2325c via wiring 2329c. Circuitry within E-box 2326d is connected to display component 2325d via wiring 2329d. Display connectors 2328a, 2328b, 2328c, and 2328d extend in the same downward direction from respective housings 2326a, 2326b, 2326c, and 2326d. Connectors 2328a, 2328b, 2328c, and 2328d are arranged to point in the same downward direction. cables 2329a, 2329b, 2329c, 2329d are (e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box 2326a, 2326b, 2326c, 2326d to a respective display component 2325a, 2325b, 2325c, 2325d; It extends within a portion of frame 2322a. The E-box may be operably coupled (eg, wirelessly and/or wired) to a network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls the facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, if hard surfaces 2321a, 2321b, 2321c are one or more tintable windows, any (e.g., all) of the E-boxes may include at least one controller that controls the level of tint of those windows. It can be operably coupled to. A controller housed within housing 2330 is mounted to a portion of frame 2322b within upper mullion 2323 (with respect to the center of gravity pointed by vector 2320). Circuitry within controller 2330 (eg, including timing controllers, network components, and/or media-related circuitry) is coupled to display component 2325e via wire 2329e. Circuitry within controller 2330 is coupled to display component 2325f via wiring 2329f. Circuitry within controller 2330 (eg, including timing controllers, network components, and/or media-related circuitry) is coupled to display component 2325g via wiring 2329g. Circuitry within controller 2330 is coupled to display component 2325h via wiring 2329h. Cables 2329e, 2329f, 2329g, 2329h are (e.g., substantially) the same length from controller 2330 to respective display components 2325e, 2325f, 2325g, 2325h, and within a portion of frame 2322b, 2322c. is extended Controller 2330 can be operably coupled (eg, wirelessly and/or wired) to a network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls the facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, if the hard surfaces 2321a, 2321b, 2321c are more than one tintable window, any (e.g., all) of the controllers may be operable to at least one controller that controls the level of tint of those windows. can be conjoined.

24 shows examples of hard surfaces 2421a, 2421b, 2421c (eg, tintable windows) mounted (eg, via hinges and/or adhesives) within frames 2422a, 2422b, 2422c. Frames 2422a, 2422b, and 2422c include vertical mullions 2423 and transoms 2424 (sometimes referred to as horizontal mullions). Four display elements 2425a, 2425b, 2425c, and 2425d are mounted within the frame 2422a, two display elements 2425e and 2425f are mounted within the frame 2422b, and two display elements 2425g and 2425h are mounted within the frame 2422b. Mounted within the frame 2422c, it may cover all visible surfaces (or only portions thereof) of the respective hard surfaces 2421a, 2421b, 2421c (e.g., the visible surface of a board or window, such as a tintable window). . Four controllers housed within a housing (also referred to herein as an electrical (E)-box) 2426a, 2426b, 2426c, 2426d are connected to an upper mullion 2423 (with respect to the center of gravity pointed by vector 2420). It is mounted on a portion of the frame 2422a within. Circuitry within E-box 2426a (eg, including timing controllers, network components, and/or media-related circuitry) is connected to display component 2425a via wiring 2429a. Circuitry within E-box 2426b is connected to display component 2425b via wiring 2429b. Circuitry within E-box 2426c (eg, including timing controllers, network components, and/or media-related circuitry) is connected to display component 2425c via wiring 2429c. Circuitry within E-box 2426d is connected to display component 2425d via wiring 2429d. cables 2429a, 2429b, 2429c, 2429d are (e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box 2426a, 2426b, 2426c, 2426d to a respective display component 2425a, 2425b, 2425c, 2425d; It extends within a portion of frame 2422a. The E-box may be operably coupled (eg, wirelessly and/or wired) to a network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls the facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, if hard surfaces 2421a, 2421b, 2421c are one or more tintable windows, any (e.g., all) of the E-boxes may include at least one controller that controls the level of tint of those windows. It can be operably coupled to. A controller housed within housing 2430 is mounted to a portion of frame 2422b within upper mullion 2423 (with respect to the center of gravity pointed by vector 2420). Circuitry within controller 2430 (eg, including timing controllers, network components, and/or media-related circuitry) is coupled to display component 2425e via wiring 2429e. Circuitry within controller 2430 is coupled to display component 2425f via wiring 2429f. Circuitry within controller 2430 (eg, including timing controllers, network components, and/or media-related circuitry) is coupled to display component 2425g via wiring 2429g. Circuitry within controller 2430 is coupled to display component 2425h via wiring 2429h. Cables 2429e, 2429f, 2429g, 2429h are (e.g., substantially) the same length from controller 2430 to respective display components 2425e, 2425f, 2425g, 2425h, and within portions of frames 2422b, 2422c. is extended Controller 2430 can be operably coupled (eg, wirelessly and/or wired) to a network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls the facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, if the hard surfaces 2421a, 2421b, 2421c are more than one tintable window, any (e.g., all) of the controllers may be operable to at least one controller that controls the level of tint of those windows. can be conjoined.

25 shows examples of hard surfaces 2521a, 2521b, 2521c (eg, tintable windows) mounted (eg, via hinges and/or adhesives) within frames 2522a, 2522b, 2522c. Frames 2522a, 2522b, and 2522c include vertical mullions 2523 and transoms 2524 (sometimes referred to as horizontal mullions). Four display elements 2525a, 2525b, 2525c, and 2525d are mounted within the frame 2522a, two display elements 2525e and 2525f are mounted within the frame 2522b, and two display elements 2525g and 2525h are mounted within the frame 2522b. Mounted within the frame 2522c, it may cover all visible surfaces (or only portions thereof) of the respective hard surfaces 2521a, 2521b, 2521c (e.g., the visible surface of a board or window, such as a tintable window). . Four controllers housed in a housing (also referred to herein as an electric (E)-box) 2526a, 2526b, 2526c, 2526d are connected to an upper mullion 2523 (with respect to the center of gravity pointed by vector 2520). It is mounted on a portion of the frame 2522a within. Circuitry within E-box 2526a (eg, including timing controllers, network components, and/or media-related circuitry) is connected to display component 2525a via wiring 2529a. Circuitry within E-box 2526b is connected to display component 2525b via wiring 2529b. Circuitry within E-box 2526c (eg, including timing controllers, network components, and/or media-related circuitry) is coupled to display component 2525c via wiring 2529c. Circuitry within E-box 2526d is connected to display component 2525d via wiring 2529d. cables 2529a, 2529b, 2529c, 2529d are (e.g., substantially) the same length from each E-box 2526a, 2526b, 2526c, 2526d to a respective display component 2525a, 2525b, 2525c, 2525d; It extends within a portion of frame 2522a. The E-box may be operably coupled (eg, wirelessly and/or wired) to a network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls the facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, if hard surfaces 2521a, 2521b, 2521c are more than one tintable window, any (e.g., all) of the E-boxes may include at least one controller that controls the level of tint of those windows. It can be operably coupled to. A controller housed within housing 2530 is mounted to a portion of frame 2522b within upper mullion 2523 (with respect to the center of gravity pointed by vector 2520). Circuitry within controller 2530 (eg, including timing controllers, network components, and/or media-related circuitry) is coupled to display component 2525e via wiring 2529e. Circuitry within controller 2530 is coupled to display component 2525f via wiring 2529f. Circuitry within controller 2530 (eg, including timing controllers, network components, and/or media-related circuitry) is coupled to display component 2525g via wiring 2529g. Circuitry within controller 2530 is coupled to display component 2525h via wiring 2529h. Cables 2529e, 2529f, 2529g, and 2529h are (e.g., substantially) the same length from controller 2530 to respective display components 2525e, 2525f, 2525g, and 2525h, within portions of frames 2522b, 2522c. is extended Controller 2530 can be operably coupled (eg, wirelessly and/or wired) to a network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls the facility or any controllable device within the facility. For example, if the hard surfaces 2521a, 2521b, 2521c are more than one tintable window, any (e.g., all) of the controllers may be operable to at least one controller that controls the level of tint of those windows. can be conjoined.

In some embodiments, one or more controllers within the housing ((E)-box) provide functionality to one or more display components. The E-box may have a cover bracket that can be secured to the mounting bracket. The cover bracket and mounting bracket may be mounted within a portion of the window frame and/or to other structures. The E box can have a certain length, a certain width and a certain height. E-boxes can be up to 15 inches ("), 14", 13", 12", 11", or 10" long. The length of the E-box can be any value in between the above values (eg, about 15" to 10", such as about 12.5". The width of the E-box can be up to 5 inches ("), 4", It may be 3.5", 3", 2.5", 2", or 1.5". The width of the E-box can be any value in between the above values (eg, about 5" to 1.5", such as about 3.75". The height of the E-box is up to 3", 2.5", 2", 1.5" ", or 1". The height of the E-box can be any value between the above values (e.g., about 3" to 1", e.g. 1.75"). The E-box may be mounted to one or both of the cover bracket and the mounting bracket. The circuit board may include terminals for connecting to a power supply (e.g., an AC or DC power source) via a cable that provides electrical power to the E-box; , the circuit board may include at least one data input connector(s) (e.g., DisplayPort, HDMI, Ethernet, or other type of connector for data transmission), which receives data for display on an associated display configuration. and at least one E-box connector(s) capable of transmitting data to another E-box (e.g., for content management system (CMS) data transmission (e.g., DisplayPort, HDMI), Ethernet or other types of connectors for data transmission. The E-box may include a controller board operably engageable with the circuit board. The circuit board may include Bluetooth, radio frequency (e.g., ultra-wideband wireless), or geolocation technologies such as Global Positioning System (GPS) The controller board may include timing controllers, network components, and/or media-related circuitry The timing controllers may be located at various locations in the display configuration (e.g. LEDs) can be employed for fine adjustment of the timing. The controller board can include a connector that connects to cabling that can be connected to the display component. The cabling is between the E-box and the display component. A connector from the e-box to the display component (e.g., transmitting power and/or data) can extend from the E-box in the same direction, or from the E-box in a different direction. For example, all of the power connectors from the E-box to the display component may extend in the same direction and come from the same side of the E-box and/or the PCB disposed therein. For example, all communication connectors from the E-box to the display construction may extend in the same direction and come from the same side of the E-box and/or the PCB disposed therein. The power connector that supplies power from the E-box's PCB to the display component may be on the same side of the PCB as the data connector from the E-box's PCB to the display component (e.g., and in the same direction, e.g., towards the display component). and may extend away from the E-box). The connector for data and/or power between the E-box and the display component is at a first side at an angle to (perpendicular to) the second side of the E-box where the connector for the incoming power supply cable is. It can exist in an E-box. The data and/or power connector between the E-box and the display component is at an angle to (perpendicular to) the third side of the E-box where the connector for the incoming data and/or media communication cable is. On the first side, it can be in the E-box. Connectors for (i) incoming power supply, (ii) incoming data (e.g., media) communication, and (iii) power and/or data to the display components may or may not be on one PCB. The E-box may be operatively coupled (eg, wirelessly and/or wired) to a network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls the facility or any controllable device within the facility. The E-box may have a unique network identifier (ID) for communication with, for example, at least one controller controlling the facility.

In some embodiments, a plurality of cabling extends from the E-box to the display configuration. The cabling connects to circuitry within the E-box through connectors. Circuitry may be in one or more printed circuit boards (PCBs). The cabling may be connected to the circuit board through connectors. The connector may be connected to a plurality of wires bundled into a cable. The number of connectors may be at least two, four, six, or eight. The number of connectors may be even. Cabling can have the same or different functions. The function may include transmission of data and/or transmission of electricity (eg, electrical power). For example, a connector can be connected to cabling that transmits data from a PCB to a display component. For example, a connector can be connected to cabling that transmits electricity from a PCB to a display component. A connector may form two groups of connectors. Members of a connector group can be the same or different. For example, a connector group may include data connectors and power connectors. The respective arrangement of a connector type in a group of connectors may follow mirror symmetry, inversion symmetry, and/or rotational (eg, C ₂ ) symmetry. A mirror, rotational axis, and/or inversion point for symmetrical operation, where applicable, may be disposed between the two connector groups.

26 shows an exploded view of an example of a controller within housing (E-box) 2602. E-box 2602 has a cover bracket 2603 that is secured to mounting bracket 2604. The cover bracket 2603 has a plurality of slits 2620 (eg, for ventilation and/or heat exchange). Cover bracket 2602 and mounting bracket 2604 can be mounted within a portion of a window frame (not shown in this figure) or to another structure (eg, fixture). E-box 2602 includes an analog-to-digital converter circuit board 2605 that can be mounted to one or both of cover bracket 2603 and mounting bracket 2604. Circuit board 2605 has terminals 2606 for connecting to a (e.g., AC) power supply cable that provides electrical power to E-box 2602, at least capable of receiving data for display on an associated display configuration. One data input connector(s) (e.g., Display Port, HDMI, Ethernet, or other type of connector for data transmission) 2607, and at least one E-box connector capable of transmitting data to another E-box. (s) (eg, Display Port, HDMI, Ethernet, or other type of connector for data transmission) 2608 . E-box 2602 includes a controller board 2610 operatively interdigitated with circuit board 2605. The controller board 2610 may include a timing controller and/or media related circuitry. A timing controller may be employed for (eg, fine) adjustment of the timing of changing the various positions (eg, LEDs) of the display components. A circuit board (eg, controller board) 2610 includes connectors (eg, 2611) that connect to cabling 2612a-2612f that are connected to display components. Cabling 2612a through 2612f may transmit data and/or power between E-box 2602 and display components. For example, some of the cabling 2612a-2612f may transmit data and some of the cabling may transmit power. For example, the two outermost cabling 2612c, 2612f can transmit power, and the four inner cablings 2612e, 2612d, 2612a, 2612b can transmit data. For example, the two innermost cabling 2612d, 2612a can transmit power, and the four outer cabling 2612e, 2612f, 2612c, 2612b can transmit data. For example, two intermediate cablings 26123 and 2612b can transmit power, and four other cablings 2612d, 2612f, 2612c and 2612a can transmit data. Two of cabling 2612a through 2612f can transmit power, and four of cabling 2612a through 2612f can transmit data. The connectors can extend in the same direction from the E-box, or they can extend in different directions from the E-box. In the example shown in FIG. 26 , connector 2611 extends from E-box 2602 in the same direction. The connector may extend from the E-box at a right angle from the direction in which the (eg AC) power supply cable extends, or may extend at any other angle from the direction in which the power supply cable extends. The E-box may be operably coupled (eg, wirelessly and/or wired) to a network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls the facility or any controllable device within the facility. The E-box may have a unique network ID for communication with at least one controller controlling the facility.

27A and 27B show various views of the assembled E-box 2702 shown in FIG. 26 as an exploded view. E-box 2702 has a cover bracket 2703 that is secured to mounting bracket 2704. Cover bracket 2702 and mounting bracket 2704 can be mounted within a portion of a window frame (not shown in this figure) or to other structures. E-box 2702 can have dimensions (eg, length 2730, width 2731, and thickness 2732) (eg, as disclosed herein) to fit within a structure. The structure can be any structure disclosed herein. E-box 2702 includes a (eg, analog-to-digital converter) circuit board 2705 that can be mounted to one or both of cover bracket 2703 and mounting bracket 2704. Circuit board 2705 has terminals 2706 for connecting to a (e.g., AC) power supply cable 2715 that provides electrical power to E-box 2702, and can receive data for display on associated display components. data input connector(s) (e.g., Display Port, HDMI, Ethernet, or other type of connector for data transmission) 2707 that can transmit data via cable 2716 to, for example, another E-box or network. at least one E-box connector(s) (e.g., Display Port, HDMI, Ethernet, or other type of connector for data transmission) 2708 that transmits E-box 2702 includes a controller board 2710 operatively interdigitated with circuit board 2705. The controller board 2710 may include a timing controller and media related circuitry. A timing controller may be employed for precise adjustment of the timing of changing various locations (eg, LEDs) in a display configuration. The controller board 2710 includes a connector 2711 that connects to cabling 2712 that connects to the display components. Cabling 2712 can transmit data and/or power between E-box 2702 and display components. Connector 2711 extends in the same direction from E-box 2702.

32 shows an example of an exploded view of E-box 3202. E-box 3202 has a cover bracket 3203 that is secured to mounting bracket 3204. Cover bracket 3202 and mounting bracket 3204 may be mounted within a part of a structure, such as a fixture, such as a window frame (not shown in this figure). E-box 3202 may have dimensions consistent with fitting E-box 3202 within a portion of a structure (eg, as disclosed herein) or may have other dimensions greater or lesser than these dimensions. . E-box 3202 includes a (eg, analog-to-digital converter) circuit board 3205 that can be mounted to one or both of cover bracket 3203 and mounting bracket 3204. Circuit board 3205 has one or more terminal(s) 3206 for connecting to (eg, AC) power supply cable(s) that provide electrical power to E-box 3202 (eg, via coaxial cable). , at least one data input connector(s) capable of receiving data for display on an associated display configuration (e.g., DisplayPort, HDMI, Ethernet, and/or other types of connectors for data transmission) 3207, and at least one E-box connector capable of transmitting data to other E-boxes and/or networks (e.g., Display Port, HDMI, Ethernet and/or other types of connectors for data transmission) 3208. there is. E-box 3202 includes circuit board 3210 operably engaged (eg, controller) with circuit board 3205 . Circuit board 3210 may include timing controllers, network components, and/or media related circuitry. A timing controller may be employed for precise adjustment of the timing of changing various locations (eg, LEDs) in a display configuration. Circuit board 3210 includes connectors 3211a through 3211f, which connectors connect to cabling (eg, 3212), which in turn connects to display components. Cabling 3212 can transmit data and/or power between E-box 3202 and display components. E-box 3202 can be operably coupled (eg, wirelessly and/or wired) to a network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls the facility or any controllable device in the facility. E-box 3202 may have a unique network ID for communication with at least one controller controlling the facility.

33A-33D show various views of an E-box. E-box 3302 has a cover bracket 3303 that is secured to mounting bracket 3304. Cover bracket 3303 and mounting bracket 3304 can be mounted within a structure or part of a structure (eg, a fixture such as a window frame (not shown in this figure)). E-box 3302 can have dimensions for mounting within a structure (eg, having a length 3330, a width 3331, and a thickness 3332), such as any of the dimensions disclosed herein. E-box 3302 includes a first circuit board (eg, analog to digital converter) that can be mounted to one or both of cover bracket 3303 and mounting bracket 3304 . The first circuit board has one or more terminal(s) (e.g. 3306) for connection to a (e.g. AC) power supply cable (e.g. including a coaxial cable or twisted pair) that provides electrical power to the E-box 3302. ), one or more data input connector(s) capable of receiving data for display on an associated display configuration (e.g., DisplayPort, HDMI, Ethernet and/or other types of connectors for data transmission) 3307, and One or more E-box connector(s) capable of transmitting data to another E-box (eg, Display Port, HDMI, Ethernet and/or other types of connectors for data transmission) 3308. E-box 3302 includes a second (eg, controller) circuit board 3305 operably engaged with the first circuit board. In some embodiments, the first circuit board and the second circuit board are one circuit board (eg, and on the same or different sides of the circuit board). In some embodiments, the first circuit board and the second circuit board are separate circuit boards separated by a distance that facilitates heat exchange and/or shielding (eg, electronic and/or electromagnetic (eg, radio frequency) shielding). . Heat exchangers and/or shields may include elemental metals or metal alloys. A heat exchanger can exchange heat passively and/or actively. A heat exchanger may include a heat pipe, slab, or mesh. The heat exchanger may include a heat sink. The second circuit board 3305 can include timing controllers, network components, and/or media related circuitry. A timing controller may be employed for precise adjustment of the timing of changing various locations (eg, LEDs) in a display configuration. In the example shown in FIGS. 33A-33D , the second circuit board includes one or more connector(s) 3311, which connectors connect to cabling 3312, which in turn connects to a display component. Cabling 3312 can transmit data and/or power between E-box 3302 and display components. There may be additional cabling connecting the E-box with display components (not shown). E-box 3302 can be operably coupled (eg, wirelessly and/or wired) to a network that is coupled to at least one controller that controls the facility or any controllable device within the facility. E-box 3302 may have a unique network ID for communication with at least one controller controlling the facility.

34A-34E show various schematic examples of a circuit board 3405 that can be mounted in an E-box. Circuit board 3405 has one or more terminal(s) 3406 for connecting to AC power supply cable(s) that provide electrical power to circuit board 3405, to receive data for display on associated display components. at least one data input connector(s) (e.g., Display Port, HDMI, Ethernet, and/or other types of connectors for data transmission) 3407 that can transmit data to other E-boxes. E-box connector(s) (e.g., Display Port, HDMI, Ethernet, and/or other types of connectors for data transmission) 3408. Circuit board 3405 can be operatively engaged with a controller board, which can include timing controller and media related circuitry, and connectors connected to cabling connected to display components.

In some embodiments, certain devices, non-transitory computer-readable media, and/or methods described herein include techniques for passing a gas (eg, air) over at least one light of a tintable window. The tintable window may include an insulated glass unit, such as a tinted electrochromic coated light of an IGU. The passage of gas (eg air) removes heat and/or, for example, lights and any optically switchable devices (eg electrochromic coatings) and/or other components (eg display components) on the light's substrate. It may be to reduce the heat load on. Passing a gas (eg air) may be for removal of heat, eg through convection. Heat may be removed through conduction and/or radiation. In some embodiments, gas heated by and/or through the IGU light may be passed, for example by pumping, pushing and/or suctioning. The gas may flow to the interior environment of the facility and/or to the exterior of the facility (eg, building) having the IGU lights. For example, heated gas may be used to warm the interior of a facility. In some embodiments, the heated gas may be used to drive a turbine to generate electricity. The electricity thus generated can be stored in a battery on the forced air window assembly.

In some embodiments, the forced gas tintable (eg, electrochromic) window may include two or more vent modules in communication with an interior space between the electrochromic light and the third light of the IGU subassembly. In some cases, one or more of these vent modules will include one or more air movement devices, such as one or more fans, to actively move gas (eg, air) through the interior space between the electrochromic light and the third light. can In one case, the one or more air movement devices (eg, fans) may include one of a bladed fan, a bladeless fan, or an air pump. In some cases, one or more air movement devices from the structure and out of the forced air tintable window may be configured to supply air into or output air from one or more of the vent modules. In certain embodiments, the ventilated air may be used to generate electricity by turning a turbine connected to a generator. The generated electricity can be stored in a battery, for example in one of the ventilation modules. Examples of forced air tintable windows, their use, and their controls are described in PCT/Air, entitled "Forced Air Smart Windows", filed on February 4, 2015, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. US15/14453 (WO 2015/120045A1).

28 shows an example of a display arrangement 2801 coupled to fastener 2802, which is framed by a sensor and emitter panel, such as 2803. The display components are coupled to the E-box 2811 and power source 2810 (eg, via wiring and/or cabling not shown in FIG. 28 ). The E-box and power source may be placed adjacent to the display construction or further apart (eg, in a fixture cavity such as in a window frame, or in a wall cavity) as disclosed herein. Fastener 2802 includes a hinge having a first leaf 2821 and a second leaf 2822 that include a bracket, joined by a knuckle and pintle arrangement. Fittings 2802 are gas guides 2823 (partial view shown) that facilitate directional flow of gas through a set of fans 2805 coupled to respective holes in leaf portion 2821 (partial view shown). is shown). The gas directing component is configured to attach to a circuit board 2830 having a connector 2831 connecting the circuit board to the display arrangement 2801 . The circuit board may include a controller and/or driver board.

In some embodiments, the display configuration includes touch screen functionality. In some embodiments, multiple display structures may be arranged adjacent to each other (eg, to form a display wall such as a video wall). The display elements may be arranged in a matrix (also referred to herein as a group or set of display elements). There may be a gap between two immediately adjacent display components. Immediately adjacent display elements exclude other display elements between them. Gaps can be masked or unmasked. Gap masking may include flexible fillers such as transparent polymers and/or resins. Flexible fillers may include carbon-based or silicone-based polymers or resins. Fillers may include optical grade materials. Fillers can be polymerized and/or cured by mixing at least two components. At least one of the at least two components and/or fillers can have a voltage of at least about 400 milliPascal seconds (mPa*s), 1000 mPa*s, 2000 mPa*s, 3000 mPa*s, 5000 mPa*s, 6000 mPa*s, 7000 mPa*s, 8000 mPa*s, 9000 mPa*s, 10000 mPa*s, 25000 mPa*s, or 50000 mPa*s. The density of the filler may be at least about 0.9 grams per cubic centimeter (g/cm 3 ), 0.95 g/cm 3 , 0.97 g/cm 3 , 0.98 g/cm 3 , or 0.99 g/cm 3 . The filler may have low shrinkage after curing (eg, shrinkage of up to about 0.2%, 0.1%, or 0.5% per volume volume after curing compared to before curing). The filler may have a dielectric constant of up to about 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, or 2.9. The filler may have a dielectric constant between any of the foregoing dielectric constants (eg, 2.5 to 2.9, or 2.7 to 2.8). The filler may be optically clear (eg, to the average human). The filler is at least 2 kilograms per square centimeter (Kgf/cm), 2.2 Kgf/cm, 2.5 Kgf/cm, 3 Kgf/cm, 3.5 Kgf/cm, 4.0 Kgf/cm, 4.5 Kgf/cm, 5.0 Kgf/cm, It may have a pull strength of 5.5 Kgf/cm 2 , or 6 Kgf/cm 2 . The filler may have a transmittance of (eg, visible) light of at least about 98%, 98.5, 99%, 99.2%, 99.4%, or 99.5%. The filler may have a refractive index of up to about 1.9, 1.7, 1.6, 1.5, 1.4, or 1.3, such as at 25°C, 23°C, or 20°C. For example, the filler may be Wacker Lumisil® (WL) filler (eg, of the WL 100, 200 or 300 series). The flexible filler may be configured to allow expansion and/or contraction of the display (eg, due to temperature changes). The flexible filler may be configured to bond immediately adjacent displays to each other and/or to the structure. The structure can be a tintable window, board, or wall. The mounting brackets and/or hinges may be secured to the display construction and may be mounted to the structure. The structure may include a frame or wall section. The structure may include fixtures. A frame can contain vertical mullions and horizontal mullions (transoms). The fixture (eg, frame) may be mounted (eg, by bonding, fastening, and/or other attachment means) to a variety of surfaces (eg, walls, boards, glass within a facility, and/or other mounting locations). In some embodiments, the display construction may be attached directly to the structure (eg, tintable window). Direct attachment can be achieved using polymers and/or resins. Direct attachment can be achieved using bonding. Bonding may utilize adhesive polymers and/or resins (eg, as disclosed herein). A bonding material may have a state in which it is more malleable than another (eg, rigid) state. A stiff state may be common in ambient conditions. The malleable state can be at certain controllable conditions different from ambient conditions. The change between the malleable state and the rigid state can be triggered by external stimuli (eg, heat, magnetic fields, electric fields, and/or chemical stimuli). For example, fillers (eg, adhesive polymers and/or resins) may be heat sensitive. For example, fillers may be more malleable, e.g., in non-ambient conditions (e.g., in a heated environment), and may prevent detachment of the display construction(s) from their support structure (e.g., for maintenance or replacement). facilitate A divide between display elements and/or touch screens in a set may be masked, for example due to proximity of a display element and lack of an emitter-sensor panel between two immediately adjacent display elements. A flexible filler may be placed between two immediately adjacent display components.

In some embodiments, the display construction may be fastened to the side brackets. The side brackets may be fastened to a structure (eg a frame part or a fixture such as a wall). The side brackets may be secured to the display construction (eg, via adhesive and/or screws). The side bracket is operably coupled to at least one pair (eg, two pairs) of the emitter panel and the sensor panel. The first sensor and emitter panel pair may be disposed orthogonal to the second sensor and emitter panel pair. Two orthogonal sensor and emitter panel pairs may facilitate operation of at least one touch screen.

In some embodiments, a plurality of display compositions are arranged to form a display composition wall. The display construction wall may or may not include touch screen capabilities. For example, at least one (eg, all) display structures within a display structure wall may have touch screen capabilities. A touch screen may be facilitated by at least one pair of sensor and emitter panels. A touch screen may include, for example, two orthogonal pairs of sensors and emitters arranged orthogonally (eg, as disclosed herein). The distance between the emitter panel and its sensor panel may span one or more display components. The display arrangements may be arranged in a matrix arrangement (eg forming a set of display arrangements in a 2x2 display arrangement). In some embodiments, at least one (eg, each) display component in a set includes its dedicated touch screen with at least one set (eg, two sets) of sensor and emitter panels. In some embodiments, at least two display components in a set include their dedicated touch screens with at least one set (eg, two sets) of sensor and emitter panels. A signal from an emitter in the emitter panel travels until it reaches a sensor in the sensor panel. If the signal does not reach the sensor, the touch screen controller may interpret the disturbance as a touch on the touch screen. Thus, the path between emitter and sensor must not be unintentionally obstructed.

In some embodiments, the display construction and/or set of display constructions is (eg, substantially) planar. Tolerance for plan view variations of the display composition may be limited (eg, to facilitate operation of a sensor-emitter panel disposed adjacent to the display composition). Tolerance for top view variations between display components in a set may be limited (eg, to facilitate operation of a sensor-emitter panel disposed adjacent to a display component). A change from planarity may be more severe towards the observer than away from the observer. The change from planarity may be tighter towards the side of the display composition adjacent to which the touch screen is disposed (eg, where the sensor and emitter panel is disposed). For example, the display composition may convex toward the viewer and/or the touch screen at a deviation of less than or equal to a predetermined distance. The display construction may be convex beyond its predetermined distance away from the viewer and/or the touch screen. A touch screen can be configured to show display data as a single display component (eg, one media that is each split between displays in a display set so that each display in the set displays a portion of the screen image). A user may use a selector (eg, cursor and/or touch screen) to control multiple display elements as if the set of display elements were a single display. The tolerance may allow for a flatness deviation of any display component disposed between the sensor-emitter panels by up to about 100 micrometers (pm), 300 pm, 500 pm, 700 pm, or 900 pm. The planarity deviation limit may be in the direction towards the sensor-emitter panel. The display configuration may be a display that is (eg, slightly) concave, convex, or wavy (eg, within the tolerances noted herein). The gap between two immediately adjacent displays can be up to about 0.1 inches ("), 0.2", 0.3", 0.4", or 0.5". The gap can be any value between the foregoing values (eg, about 0.1" to About 0.5"). The set of display constructions can have a glass panel common to a plurality of displays (eg, TOLEDs). The display constructions can each have a glass panel that supports a display (eg, TOLED). .

29A to 29D show examples of various display components including a touch screen functional unit. 29A shows four displays (e.g. OLED) sandwiched between a front glass 2904 (which can be tempered) common to the four displays and four rear glass panels (e.g. 2905) each individually supporting the display. Examples of (2903a, 2903b, 2903c, 2903d) are shown. The displays together form a set of display components. The four displays of FIGS. 29A and 29B are arranged as a 2x2 matrix (also referred to herein as a group or set) with a gap (eg, 2915) between two immediately adjacent displays. Gap 2915 is (e.g., a transparent polymer and/or resin disposed between the displays (e.g., to allow for expansion and contraction of the display due to temperature and/or to bond display components and/or glass panels together) can be masked by a flexible filler such as). A sensor emitter panel 2918 is secured to the display arrangement 2902 and mounted to a framing cap 2919. The display construction is hingedly secured (not shown) to the structure, which is a window frame 2906 with vertical mullions 2907 and horizontal mullions 2908 (transom). The frame 2906 can be mounted (eg, bonded) to a variety of surfaces (eg, walls, boards, glass inside a facility, or other mounting location). The bond may consist of an adhesive polymer and/or resin that may or may not have a state that is more malleable than another (eg, rigid) state, which may be common at ambient conditions. 29A shows an example of a side framing cap 2910 configured to secure a sensor emitter panel to a side 2920 of a display component 2902 of a set of display components, with the sensor and emitter panel configured to operate as a touch screen. do. The set of displays 2903a-2903d has two sets of sensor-emitter panels perpendicular to each other, which sensor-emitter panel borders a set of display elements (rather than borders each of the displays). Tolerance for height differences between displays 2903a - 2903d within display configuration 2902 may be limited (e.g., either of the displays may be directed from the sensor-emitter panel towards the viewer (e.g., as disclosed herein). (e.g.) cannot protrude by at most a tolerance threshold), it will allow the signal from the emitter to reach the sensor on the opposite side of the set of display components unhindered (e.g., the displays within the set may deviate beyond the tolerance threshold). cannot be convex towards the observer, but can be concave away from the observer beyond a tolerance threshold).

In some embodiments, the fastener is configured to couple the display composition to the support structure. The display configuration may or may not have touch screen capability. The support structure may be a fixture. For example, the support structure may be a frame portion of a window (eg, a tintable window). The structure can be any structure disclosed herein (eg, wall, arch, door frame, or any other structural frame). In some embodiments, the fastener includes a hinge configured to allow swiveling (eg, of a coupled display component) about its axis. The fastener may include a movable joint (eg, a hinge). The fastener may permit swing of at least one of its portions about an axis. A fastener may include a mechanical bearing connecting two solid objects. At least one of the solid objects may swing about an axis (eg, a pin, pintle, or rod, such as a cylindrical rod). The swinging motion may consist of a limited angle of rotation between two solid parts (eg hinge leaves). The angle may be up to about 270 degrees (°), 180°, 90°, 60°, 45°, or 30°. The angle may facilitate reaching any circuitry and/or (eg, electrical) connections coupled to the fastener. The angle can facilitate attaching and/or detaching the display configuration from the fastener. The angle can facilitate attaching and/or detaching the fastener from the support structure. Fasteners can be barrel hinges, butt hinges, mortise hinges, concealed hinges (e.g. cup hinges or euro hinges), continuous hinges (e.g. piano hinges), flag hinges, H-hinges, HL hinges, pivot hinges (e.g. , double-acting hinges), self-closing hinges, spring hinges, or living hinges (eg, no knuckles or pins). The swiveling can be of the hinge leaf (eg anything attached to the hinge leaf). The hinge shaft may be of the same material as the fastener body (eg, hinge leaf) or a different material. For example, the hinge shaft may be of a harder material compared to the hinge body (eg, hinge leaf). The hinge shaft and/or leaf may include a metal (eg, may include an elemental metal or metal alloy). A fastener may include a knuckle and/or a shaft (eg, a pin). At least one hinge leaf (e.g., each of the two hinge leaves) is a second class lever or a third class lever that pivots about a fulcrum disposed on one of its sides. can include The fulcrum is the point on which the lever rests and/or is supported and the lever pivots about it (eg, the hinge axis). For example, a hinge leaf may pivot about a fulcrum disposed on the hinge axis. In a second class lever, the load is placed between the fulcrum and the input force. In a third class lever, the input force is between the fulcrum and the load. The leaf may extend from a set of knuckles that hold the hinge axis. For example, a fastener may include two sets of knuckles and/or two pins. The knuckle may be part of the leaf of the fastener (eg, an integral part of the leaf, made of the same piece of material). Any portion of the hinge may include a composite material (eg, including carbon fiber). The housing may include a composite material. The hinge may be made of a thermally conductive material such as metal (eg copper and/or aluminum). Metals may include elemental metals or metal alloys. The hinge shaft (eg pintle) may be of a durable material. Durable materials may include stainless steel, titanium, flat steel, iron, Inconel, Hastelloy, Waspaloy, Rene alloy, Incoloy, MP98T, TMS alloy, or CMSX single crystal alloy. Durable materials may include superalloys (eg, high performance alloys). The hinge (eg, any of its components, such as its shaft (eg, pintle)) may include a durable material (eg, superalloy). The knuckle of the hinge may have a hollow cylindrical cavity (eg, having a circular cross section). The cavity may form a joint of the hinge through which the hinge axis is set. The knuckles of both leaves may alternate and may be interlocked with an axis (eg pintle) passing through the knuckles. The knuckle may form a closed cylindrical cavity. The knuckle may form an open cavity. 37 shows an example of a hinge leaf 3721 having a knuckle (eg, 3781 ) forming an open cavity configured to receive a hinge shaft 3720. The open cavity of the knuckle facilitates attachment and/or detachment of its leaf (eg, 3721) from the shaft. In the knuckle example with an open cavity, the knuckle may (i) move the knuckle away from the pintle in a direction perpendicular to the pintle (e.g., and opposite the chuckle cavity opening (e.g., 3782) extending along the pintle axis). and/or (ii) moving the pintle along its axis to extract it. 36 shows an example of a knuckle 3682 having a closed cylindrical cavity through which a shaft (eg, pintle) 3620 traverses. In the closed knuckle example, the pintle may (i) move in a circular motion along and about its axis (eg, 3683). In the closed knuckle scenario, the knuckle can be detached from the pintle by moving the pintle along its axis (eg, 3683) to extract it.

In some embodiments, the plane of the hinge leaf face is (eg, substantially) planar. In some embodiments, the plane of the hinge leaf face is free of curvature (eg, concave, convex, or wavy). 40 shows a perspective view example of a hinge leaf 4021 having a planar hinge leaf face surface 4021a. 41 shows an example of a hinge leaf 4122 having a planar hinge leaf face surface 4122a (shown in partial view).

In some embodiments, fasteners are configured to receive various components. The fasteners (eg, including hinges) may be configured to receive one or more circuitry boards. For example, a fastener may be configured to receive a circuit board including a booster and/or driver board for a display to which it is configured to be connected. For example, the fasteners may be configured to receive circuit boards (eg, sensor and emitter panels) of the touch screen functionality. The fasteners may be configured to allow for easy installation, removal and/or maintenance (eg, as disclosed herein). Facilitation may refer to low labor costs, low labor ratings (eg, low labor qualifications), and/or short labor hours. At least one of the hinge leaves may include an opening through which at least a portion of circuitry (eg, a PCB) is visible and/or accessible. At least one of the hinge leaves may be configured to facilitate viewing of, access to, and/or manipulation of the at least one connector. For example, at least some of the connectors in (or coupled to) the circuitry may be viewable, accessible, and/or operable through the opening. For example, at least some of the connectors between the circuitry and the display component may be viewable and/or accessible through the opening. The opening can facilitate removal of cable(s) coupled to the connector. The openings may facilitate attachment and detachment of cables, such as for maintenance, replacement, and/or removal (eg, of cabling, circuitry, and/or display components). The fasteners may be snapped and/or screwed into the structure. The circuit board may fit into the fastener (eg, via a snap fitting) or may be attached to or snapped into the fastener (eg, using an adhesive). Occasionally, a display construction may require replacement prior to replacement of any portion of the support structure (eg, and/or tintable glass) to which it is bonded. The fastener may or may not have a magnetic component. A fastener may be coupled to the support structure. The fastener may or may not be attached to the window. The fastener may or may not be bolted into the window (eg, using a through hole in the window). In some embodiments, the fastener is not directly coupled to the window (eg, using any through hole in the window and/or using adhesive). In some embodiments, the display construction is not directly bonded to the window (eg, using any through hole in the window and/or using an adhesive).

35 shows an exemplary view of a fastener 3502 coupled to a display composition 3501 bordered by a sensor-emitter panel housed within a protective framing such as 3503 to facilitate touch screen capabilities. Fastener 3502 has an opening 3504 through which a portion of circuit board 3530 is visible. The circuit board may incorporate a booster and/or driver board coupled with a display emitter (eg, LED). Circuit board 3530 includes six connectors 3509. The connector may facilitate transmission of data (including media and/or control related data) and/or power from the power source and/or E-box (including the circuit board (eg, timing controller)) to the display component. can The fastener may include a hinge shaft 3520 coupled to hinge leaves 3521 and 3522. The first hinge leaf 3521 includes a bracket configured to be attached to a structure (eg, a frame portion). The second hinge leaf 3522 includes openings 3504 for circuitry and/or connectors. Any of the hinge leaves may be fabricated from a single piece of material (eg, from a single slab), or may be fabricated from parts attached together to form a single piece. Attaching may include stitching, welding, interlocking, or screwing.

In some embodiments, the fasteners are configured to extend along the sides of the display construction. The fastener may comprise a single unit extending for at least a portion of the side length of the display construction. A single unit may be of a single material (eg, a single slab). A single unit may or may not have more than one opening. The extension of the unit (eg, the hinge leaf) may have at least about 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, or 95% of the length of the display composition side. . In some embodiments, at least a portion of the fastener (eg, at least one hinge leaf) extends the entire length of the side of the display construction. In some embodiments, the fastener extends (eg, slightly) beyond the entire length of the side of the display composition. In some embodiments, the fasteners receive the sides of the display configuration. 35 shows an example fastener 3502 having a portion (e.g., hinge leaf) 3522 that extends at least the full length of display component 3501, which hinge leaf 3522 is part of circuitry 3530. Having an opening 3504 that facilitates access to at least a portion (eg, its connector 3509), as well as a plurality of apertures that facilitate air flow and/or heat exchange, such a hinge leaf may be a single part (eg, its connector 3509). , a single slab).

In some embodiments, fasteners may be configured to facilitate heat exchange. The fastener may be configured to accept any of the heat exchange devices and/or techniques disclosed herein. For example, the fitment may be configured to receive one or more fans for active gas (eg, air) conduction. The fasteners may be configured to accommodate at least 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, or 20 fans. The fasteners may be configured to receive multiples (eg, 1 to 20, 1 to 10, or 10 to 20) fans between any of the foregoing numbers of fans. The number of fans may be an even number. The number of fans can be distributed (eg evenly) on both sides of the opening. The opening to the circuitry may be centered along the length of the fastener. Openings for gas flow (eg, and placement of fans) may be placed along the fittings and further away from the openings. Every two fans may be symmetrically aligned along the middle portion of the fastener length (eg, leaf length). 35 shows an example of a fastener 3502 having a leaf with an opening 3504 centered along its length, which leaf has a plurality of openings (eg, 3524) that facilitate gas exchange and accommodating a fan (e.g., 3524). 3505a, 3505b) (8 openings in total). The plurality of openings may be vent holes. The apertures may be symmetrically arranged along the center of the length of the fastener and extend along the fastener leaf away from the aperture. The apertures in each of the aperture groups 3505a, 3505b are evenly distributed (eg, evenly spaced) along the fastener (eg, hinge leaf) portion and symmetrical about the center of the fastener length, as two groups. are arranged as Fastener leaf 3522 is coupled to corner 3529 configured to hold circuit board 3597. A circuit board may be coupled to a sensor and emitter panel disposed within the protective framing cover 3503. The framing cover protects at least a portion of a transparent material (eg, 3598) configured to allow emitted radiation (eg, infrared radiation) of the touch screen functionality to travel therethrough.

In some embodiments, the display composition fastener includes a plurality of circuit boards. The circuit board may include a booster and/or driver board, and/or at least one circuitry that facilitates touch screen functionality. For example, there may be two circuit boards facilitating touch screen functionality. At least one of the plurality of circuit boards may be attached to the fastener. 35 shows an example of touch screen circuitry 3597 coupled to hinge leaf 3522 by a connecting piece (eg, L bracket 3529). Additional circuitry 3599 (eg, to facilitate touch screen functionality) (eg, 3599) may or may not be coupled to the fastener (eg, to hinge leaf 3522).

In some examples, the fasteners facilitate cooling and/or airflow on one side of the display construction and touch screen functionality on the opposite side of the display construction. 35 shows the back side of the display composition 3501 where the airflow 3536 will be farther away from the viewer and the opposite side of the display composition 3501 closer to the viewer (e.g., and accessible to the viewer for touch screen functionality). Shows an example of a touch screen 3501 coupled to a fastener 3502 to be directed to a touch screen function (eg, comprising a transparent material 3598) disposed thereon. The observer is displayed schematically as a figure 3596 to designate the observer side of the display element 3501 (eg, this scale may not be proportional to the display element, for example).

In some embodiments, fasteners may be configured to facilitate heat exchange. The fasteners may be configured to facilitate active heat conduction (eg, gas pushing) from the external atmosphere toward the display construction. The fasteners may be configured to facilitate active heat conduction (eg, gas intake) from the display construction towards the external atmosphere. For example, the fastener may be configured to receive one or more fans configured to direct gas (eg, air) from an ambient atmosphere around the fastener toward a designated path. Paths can be specified by directing structures. The directing structure can be at least one planar and/or curved section. 35 shows an example of a gas directing structure 3523 having planar portions 3531 and 3532 and a curved portion 3533. The gas directing structure may be formed from one piece of material (eg, one slab), or a plurality of attached (eg, stitched, soldered, interlocked and/or fastened) parts. The gas directing portion may be configured to direct gas along path 3526 . 35 shows various views of fasteners and associated components. Gas may be directed toward the display construction from an external environment (eg, the atmosphere of the enclosure), for example, through a gas directing path (eg, formed by a gas directing structure and/or fastener). The gas directing structure may be part of or coupled to the fastener. The gas directing structure may be coupled to (eg, be fastened to or part of) the first leaf of the fastener. The gas directing structure may not be part of (or not coupled to) another (eg, second) leaf. The gas directing structure may be coupled to (eg, be fastened to or part of) a first leaf of a fastener configured to be attached to a display composition. The gas directing structure may not be part of (or may not be coupled to) another (eg second) leaf configured to be attached to a supporting structure (eg a frame part or a fixture such as a wall). The support structure may be part of the enclosure (eg, a fixture of the enclosure). A fan may include an actuator. The fan may be controlled by a controller (eg, any controller disclosed herein). Fans can be controlled locally (eg, in controllers of fasteners and/or E-boxes). The fan may be remotely controlled (eg, by a BMS and/or by a higher hierarchical controller such as a floor controller or master controller). The fan may be controlled by a controller configured to control the sensor and/or emitter (eg, device ensemble).

36 shows a perspective view example of a display construction coupled to a portion of a fastener. 36 shows an example of a hinge leaf 3622 with two knuckle groups 3685a, 3685b. Each knuckle group has a hinge (eg 3620) inserted therethrough. Each knuckle group is part of a knuckle assembly forming a hinge. Knuckle groups 3685a, 3685b form an integral part of hinge leaf 3622 with a plurality of apertures arranged in two symmetrical groups 3605a, 3605b about the center of the length of hinge leaf 3622. Hinge leaf 3622 has an outflow portion 3604 centered the length of the hinge length. Hinge leaf 3622 is formed from a single piece (eg, a single slab, slice, strip, or plate). Hinge leaf 3622 extends along the entire length of the side of display formation 3601 . Display composition 3601 is frameless around all its sides. The opening (eg, 3605c) is configured to allow gas (eg, air) to pass therethrough from one side of the display configuration 3601, such as along path 3626. Hinge leaf 3622 also includes a protruding feature (eg, boss) 3699 . The ending "a" in 3601a and 3622a indicates that a portion of the respective item without the ending "a" is shown (eg, 3601a is a portion of display component 3601).

37 shows a perspective view example of a display composition 3701 framed by a sensor-emitter panel, such as 3703. The display construction is coupled to fastener 3702 having two hinge leaves 3721 and 3722. Hinge leaf 3721 is configured to couple to the support structure. Hinge leaf 3721 has two sets of open knuckles 3783a, 3783b configured to be attached or detached from hinge leaf 3722 by integrating with closed cavity knuckles 3785a, 3785b, respectively, that each hold a hinge pintle. The hinge leaf 3721 is formed in the shape of a bracket. Hinge leaf 3722 includes an aperture 3704 (eg, a cutout, or egress) centered along its length, which extends to a portion of the width of the hinge leaf. The opening may be attached to (eg, and communicate with) a portion of any attached circuitry (eg, booster and/or driver board) and/or hinge leaf 3722 and/or be coupled to (eg, and communicate with) display components and E-boxes and power supplies. ha) is configured to facilitate access to the connector. Hinge leaf 3722 has a plurality of apertures (eg, 3705) arranged as two groups about the length of leaf hinge 3722. The apertures in each group are evenly spaced. The openings allow exchange of gases (eg air). Hinge leaf 3722 is coupled to a gas directing structure (eg, gas guide) 3723 . The gas guide is configured to direct any incoming gas (eg, air) through the opening (eg, 3705) through the cavity 3750 to one side of the display configuration so that the gas flows, eg, as shown by dashed arrow 3751. will flow in the direction (or in the reverse direction). Portion 3732 covers (and forms) cavity 3750, and portions 3732, 3733, and 3731 are part of gas guide portion 3723. The ending “a” in 3701a, 3702a, 3703a, 3721a, 3722a, 3723a, and 3733a indicates that a portion of the respective item without the ending “a” is shown (e.g., 3701a indicates display component 3701 part).

In some embodiments, the fasteners are configured to facilitate heat exchange. Heat exchange can be active. Heat exchange may be facilitated by one or more fans, gas (eg, air) directing components, and/or gas channels. A pathway formed within the fitting for gas flow may be designed to accommodate the flow of air without creating excessive or reduced pressure within the fitting, for example compared to ambient pressure. The area in which gas is allowed to flow in the fitting may be larger than the area in which gas flows in the fan. For example, the total horizontal cross-sectional area of the fan openings (eg, 3805) is a gas guide (eg, 3823) that together forms a gas channel that directs gas (eg, 3851) toward an outer portion of the display configuration (eg, 3801). and the total horizontal cross-sectional area between the plate (eg, 3855).

38 shows a display construction coupled to a portion (e.g., a hinge leaf) of a fastener 3822 having an opening (e.g., regression, carveout, or egress) 3804 extending up to a portion of its width. A perspective view example of 3801 is shown, with this aperture centered along its length. Opening 3804 is configured to allow access to a portion of circuitry 3830 and/or its connector. Hinge leaf 3822 has two sets of knuckles 3884a, 3884b, and a plurality of openings (eg, 3805) that facilitate the flow of gas (eg, air) therethrough. Hinge leaf 3822 is coupled to a gas guide 3823 configured to guide gas flowing (eg, entering or exiting) through an opening (eg, 3805 ). The gas guide is coupled to a plate 3855 with 10 protrusions. The protrusions are evenly spaced along the length of the plate. The plate is coupled with the gas guide 3823 to form a gas passage (eg between every two protrusions). The protrusion is configured to prevent bending (eg collapsing) of the gas guide and/or plate. The protrusion is configured to ensure that the gas passageway remains functional and/or intact over time. The gas guide 3823 and plate 3855 guide the gas in the direction shown by dashed arrows (eg 3851). Gas guide 3832 (eg, attached to or as part of hinge leaf 3822) is configured to engage hinge leaf 3821 comprising a bracket. Display construction 3801 is framed by a sensor-emitter panel (eg 3803) that facilitates touch screen capabilities. The bracket portion of the fastener may have at least one pointed end portion (eg, 3821) or at least one non-pointed end portion (eg, 3525). At least one end of the bracket may be placed close to the gas guide, for example when the hinge of the fastener is in a closed position. At least one end of the bracket may or may not be in contact with the gas guide. The fastener may be configured to allow for gas passage (eg, and a gap) between a gas guide and a bracket portion of the fastener, for example, when the fastener is in a closed position. 35 shows an example of the gap between the non-pointed bracket end 3525 of the fastener's leaf 3921 and the gas guide 3523. 38 shows an example of a gap between the pointed bracket end 3825 of the leaf 3821 of the fastener and its complementary portion gas guide 3823, which is part of the bent portion 3533. At least one end of the bracket may form a right angle or a non-right angle with the side of the bracket. At least one end of the bracket may have a complementary angle and/or curvature to a portion of the gas guide immediately adjacent to it, for example when the fastener is in a closed position (eg, shown in the example of 3802). Hinge leaf 3822 is configured to mount circuitry 3871 (eg, facilitating touch screen functionality), and this mounting is done by using a mounting structure in the shape of an L bracket 3870. The mounting structure may be an integral part of hinge leaf 3822 or may be a separate part that is snapped, interlocked, soldered, glued, bolted, or otherwise attached to hinge leaf 3822. The ending "a" of 3801a, 3803a, 3821a, 3822a, 3832a, 3821a, 3823a, 3840a, and 3855a indicates that a portion of the respective item without the ending "a" is shown (e.g., 3801a is a display component (part of 3801). Item 3890 is a connecting piece (eg, 4090). The gas guide may be coupled (eg, attached) to the fastener by any of the attachment (eg, bonding) methods disclosed herein (eg, snapping, soldering, bonding, bolting, interlocking, or screwing). . In the fastener's closed position, the first leaf and the second leaf (and any object attached thereto) remain separated (eg, gap) from each other (eg, do not touch each other). The separation (eg, gap) may have a maximum of about 0.2 millimeters (mm), 0.3 mm, 0.4 mm, 0.5 mm, 0.8 mm, 1 mm, 3 mm or 5 mm. The separation (eg, gap) may be between any of the foregoing values (eg, between about 0.2 mm and about 5 mm, between about 0.2 mm and about 0.5 mm, between about 0.3 mm and about 1 mm, or between about 0.8 mm and about 5 mm). can be The gap is the tip of the bracket portion of the first hinge leaf (e.g. 3525) and the gap guide (e.g. 3523) complementary portion (e.g. 3533) to the bracket tip portion (e.g. 3525) of the second hinge leaf. It may be between its complementary part which is a part (eg attached to it or an integral part thereof). The ending "a" in 3501a, 3510a, and 3522a indicates that a portion of the respective item without the ending "a" is shown (eg, 3501a is a portion of display component 3501). Item 3505c represents a portion of fan 3505b. The fasteners and associated components are represented as side views at 3570.

In some embodiments, the fastener is masked from the viewer by a cap (eg, a beauty cap). The cap can serve as a protective lid or cover for the fastener. The cap may mask the fastener in the support structure (eg fixture) in which it is installed. For example, a cap may mimic a portion of a framing (eg, window framing), or a portion of a wall. The cap may be camouflaged around it (eg, in a supporting structure). The cap may be attached to the support structure, such as using any of the attachments disclosed herein, such as bolting, screwing, snapping, or bonding (eg, using an adhesive). The support structure can be configured to facilitate such attachment (eg, by incorporating a complementary structure to which the cap will be attached).

In some embodiments, the gas guide is configured to guide gas along the side of the display composition. The side of the display construction along which the gas is directed may be closest to the supporting structure (eg, wall, tintable glass, and/or framing). The side of the display composition along which the gas is guided may be further away from the viewer. The side of the display composition along which the gas is guided may be opposite the side of the display composition with touch screen capability. The side of the display composition along which the gas is directed may be opposite the side along which the emitter is emitting radiation as part of the touch screen functionality. 38 shows an example of a display arrangement 3801 with a directed gas flow illustrated by a dashed line arrow, eg 3841, on one side of the display arrangement 3801, the side of which is at figure line 3899. (e.g., such a scale may not be proportional to the display configuration, e.g.).

In some embodiments, the gas guide may be separated from the hinge leaf by a raised feature (eg, boss). The protruding features may protrude from the gas guide or from the hinge leaf. The protruding feature may be an integral part of a gas guide or hinge leaf. The protruding feature may be a separate piece that is attached to the gas guide or hinge leaf (eg, using any of the attachment methods disclosed herein). 38 shows an example of a protruding feature 3840 (eg, boss) protruding from hinge leaf 3822. The protruding features may provide structural support for the portion(s) of the fastener.

In some embodiments, initiation of active heat exchange may be controlled by a controller. The controller may use a feedback control scheme. A feedback control scheme may use temperature data. Temperature data may be derived from at least one temperature sensor. The temperature data may relate to the temperature at one or more locations of the display composition. The fastener may be configured to accept and/or connect to at least one temperature sensor (eg, a thermocouple or IR sensor). At least one temperature sensor may be configured to sense a temperature of the display composition. The at least one temperature sensor may be positioned so that it contacts a side (eg, rim) of the display construction that is closest to the support structure, away from the viewer, and/or closest to the window to which it is coupled. The at least one sensor may be disposed within a framing (eg, sensor and emitter protection framing) and/or any portion (eg, component) of a fastener. A control scheme may direct activation of an active heat exchange system (eg, a fan and/or cooler) when a temperature reaches a first threshold (eg, as disclosed herein). The control scheme may direct the display component to cease operation when the temperature reaches a second threshold (eg, as disclosed herein). The control scheme may direct deactivation of an active heat exchange system (eg, a fan and/or cooler) when the temperature reaches a third threshold (eg, as disclosed herein). In some embodiments, the second threshold is higher (eg, has a higher temperature value) than the first threshold. In some embodiments, the third threshold is lower (eg, has a lower temperature value) than the first threshold and/or the second threshold. Sometimes, active heat exchange is always in an “on” mode and is stopped when the temperature exceeds a threshold (eg, a second threshold as described herein). The threshold (e.g., any of the higher temperature thresholds, such as the second threshold) is at least about 30°C, 35°C, 40°C, 43°C, 45°C, 47°C, 49°C, 50°C, 53°C, It may have a temperature with a value of 55°C or 57°C. The threshold (eg, any of the lower temperature thresholds, such as the third threshold) may have a temperature having a value of at most about 20°C, 25°C, 30°C, 35°C, 40°C or 45°C. The high temperature threshold may be a temperature at which a light emitting entity is likely to be (eg, permanently) damaged (eg, burned out).

In some embodiments, the fan(s) are activated with a constant capacity. The fan capacity (eg rotational speed) may be constant, for example, and control may include turning the fan on and off. For example, when a fan is activated, it rotates at (eg, substantially) 100% capacity. Fan capacity can be varied, for example, and control can include turning the fan on and off and changing its rotational speed (eg, by changing the power supplied to the fan). For example, when a fan is activated, it may be operating at less than 100% capacity. For example, the fan may initially spin at a lower capacity, up to 1%, 5%, 7%, 10%, or 15% capacity. A fan can increase its rotational capacity linearly, non-linearly, intermittently and/or continuously. For example, the rotational speed of the fan(s) may increase. Increasing the rotational speed of the fan may be dependent on the temperature of the display composition (eg, as measured by at least one temperature sensor that is an integral part of the display composition assembly). The controller can adjust the rotational speed of the fan using a feedback control scheme. A controller may use the sensor readings for a feedback control scheme. Sensor readings may be derived from temperature and/or electromagnetic radiation sensors. The sensor(s) can be operatively coupled to a network. The sensor may be disposed within an enclosure (eg, building) in which the display composition is disposed. The sensor may sense the internal environment within the enclosure in which the display composition is placed and/or the temperature of the display composition. The sensor may sense radiation (eg, sunlight) emitted through the display construction and/or into an internal environment within an enclosure in which the display construction is placed. The sensor may detect radiation and/or temperature that directly and/or indirectly affect the temperature of the display composition.

39 shows a perspective view example of various portions of a display configuration 3901 having touch screen capabilities coupled to fasteners 3902. The fastener has a hinge having a first hinge leaf 3921 and a second hinge leaf 3922, which leaf is configured to swing about an axis. Item 3980 shows a portion of a display configuration bounded by a sensor-emitter panel and a portion of its housing. The fastener includes a gas guide 3923, a plurality of holes for facilitating outflow and/or inflow of gas therethrough, and a first circuit portion 3930. Hinge leaf 3922 has a depression 3904. The recesses may be configured to facilitate access to display components and E-boxes (eg, timing controllers therein) and/or connectors (not shown in FIG. 39 ) configured to couple to power sources and/or second circuitry. . First circuitry 3930 may be disposed on (or otherwise coupled to) a side of hinge leaf 3922 . The first circuitry may be configured to facilitate operation of a display component, such as a touch screen function comprising a sensor and emitter panel bordering 3903. The sensor and emitter panel includes circuitry 3923 to which the sensor and emitter (eg, 3922) are coupled, a protective framing that includes reflective surfaces (eg, mirrors) 3925, 3924 and 3927, and radiation from the emitter travels therethrough. and a transparent material 3920 configured to allow (and optionally, protect the circuitry from the surrounding environment, eg moisture). Framing portion 3924 is configured to support display construction 3901 over a portion of the sensor and emitter assembly (eg, over reflective surface 3925 ). A protective framing (and components therein) extends along the sides of the display composition 3901 . Every two vertical protective frames meet at a connecting corner 3990 at the edge of the display composition 3901 . The connecting corner includes a body 3991 and a cover 3995 of the body. The body may be a single piece faceplate. The cover (eg, corner cover) is a tripod-shaped cover 3995. The tripod-shaped cover has three extensions that together form a tripod. Two of the three extensions are disposed on a plane, and the third extension is disposed perpendicular to the plane. The third extension includes two corrugated structures. The tripod cover 3995 is configured to seal the connectors of the two vertical protection frames at their mating edges 3990. The body of the connecting corner is configured to receive circuit boards 3998a and 3998b of the sensor-emitter circuitry. 3901a is a portion of display component 3901. The circuit boards are connected to each other at corners (not shown). One of the two circuit boards is connected to the touch screen circuit board 3930. The body is configured to receive an inner connector 3094 having two curved edges and two pointed edges forming a cross section similar to an eye or almond. Internal connector 3994 includes a housing configured to receive a screw. The integral connector may be part of a single piece faceplate 3991.

In some embodiments, the framing of the display construction is configured to (i) support the display construction, (ii) isolate the display construction from the sensor and emitter assembly, and (iii) protect the sensor and emitter assembly from the surrounding environment. The display construction is configured to be positioned horizontally and/or vertically within a cavity within the sensor and emitter assembly. The display construction is at least partially separated from the cavity holding the sensor and emitter assembly by framing (eg, 3924) and/or adhesive. 39 shows an example of a display composition 3901 held by a framing portion 3924 and an adhesive (eg, double-sided tape) that contacts the display composition with a transparent material 3920 . A framing comprising 3924 and 3927 forms an inner cavity for sensor and emitter assemblies (eg, 3922, 3925), and an outer cavity to receive a display component (eg, 3901). The transparent material 3920 of the sensor-emitter assembly caps (at least partially, eg with an adhesive material) this internal cavity from external influences (eg, moisture and/or debris). 3920a is a portion of transparent material 3920. The location X at which the display structure 3901 is placed is within the height h of the framing and the width w of the framing both vertically and horizontally. The adhesive material may be a very high bond (VHB) adhesive material (eg, VHB double sided tape from 3M).

In some embodiments, two orthogonal sensor and emitter panels are held together by a corner assembly piece. The corner assembly piece may include guide features configured to guide the two orthogonal circuits of the sensor and emitter and align them (eg, vertically) with respect to each other, eg, within tolerances. The corner pieces may have stepped guides, or corrugated guides. 39 shows an example of a corner assembly 3940 comprising a body 3991 and a corner cover 3995, which has two guides 3996a, 3996b to guide the sensor and emitter circuitry, respectively. . Guides (eg, self-guiding features) may be configured to hold the circuit board in place (eg, within tolerances). The tolerance may allow vertical and/or horizontal displacement of the circuit board of up to about 0.5 millimeters (eg, mm), 0.4 mm, 0.3 mm, 0.2 mm, or 0.1 mm.

In some embodiments, the framing of the display construction is coupled to the fastener using at least one connecting piece. The connecting piece may include a tripod. The connecting piece may have three planes facing three orthogonal directions. The connection piece may be configured to connect the fastener with the protective framing of the sensor-emitter panel. The connection piece may be configured to surround three orthogonal sides of a portion of the fastener (eg, an edge thereof). 40 shows a perspective view example of various parts of a display construction and associated components. 40 shows an example of an entire connecting piece 4090 having three orthogonal sides 4090a, 4090b, 4090c (4090d is a partial view of 4090a). Connecting piece 4090 directs gas through first opening 4005, second opening 4050 and to the rear of display composition 4001 (shown as part of the display composition), e.g., along dashed arrow 4051. It is configured to be connected to a gas directing portion 4032 (shown in partial view thereof) directing onto the side. Connection piece 4090 is coupled to seal the circuitry held by support portion 4070, and to the support portion, and to the side of the protective framing of sensor-emitter assembly 4003 (shown in partial view) at its 4090a side. (eg, connected). The fastener comprises a knuckle and pintle (e.g., 4082), a first hinge leaf 4021 (shown in partial view) and a second hinge leaf 4022 including a bracket configured to be mounted on a support structure (e.g., a fixture). (shown in partial view) at least one hinge. A second hinge leaf having at least one gas opening, such as 4005, includes a raised structure 4040 that reduces leakage of gas between the leaves of the hinge when the hinge is in its closed position. Fitment 4002 is configured to receive at least one circuit board, such as 4030 (shown as an entire circuit board). Circuit board 4030 (eg, including a driver and/or booster board) is configured to connect to display configuration 4001 and to provide data and/or power via cabling 4031 . Circuit board 4030 is also configured to connect to an E-box (eg, containing a timing controller) and/or a power supply via (eg, six) other cables not shown in FIG. 40 . Another cable may extend from the side of board 4030 opposite to that shown in FIG. 40 .

In some embodiments, the fitment is configured to direct the flow of gas. The flow of gas can be directed along designated openings in the fastener and/or formed by the fastener. The fastener, eg, in its operating and/or closed position, may reduce the probability of gas flow in a direction other than the designated opening. The operational position of the fastener may be a position that facilitates operation of the display configuration for its intended purpose (eg, projecting media). The fastener may include a hinge having two leaves (eg joined by a knuckle and pintle arrangement). At least one of the leaves may include a raised rim, for example to reduce gas from that direction when the fastener is closed and/or operated. At least one of the leaves may include a gasket, for example, to reduce gas from that direction when the fastener is closed and/or operated. 41 shows perspective and top view examples of a display configuration 4101 coupled to a portion of a fastener 4122 having a plurality of apertures 4105b, 4105a configured to facilitate gas flow therethrough. Hinge leaf 4122 includes a knuckle 4182 . The hinge leaf includes a raised portion 4160 that reduces the flow of gas through the raised portion between the interior of the fastener and the surrounding environment (eg, when closed and/or operated). The raised portion may include a gasket; Gaskets may be missing. Hinge leaf 4122 includes a depression 4104 that extends up to a portion of its width and is centered on its length. 4104a is part of 4104. Items 4122a and 4122b are part of 4122 . A gasket may be disposed along the rim 4122 of the opening 4104, as shown by dashed line 4162. Hinge leaf 4122 includes a protruding feature (eg, boss) 4162 . The protruding features may provide structural support for the component(s) of the hinge. The protruding feature may be an integral part of a fastener (eg, a hinge leaf). The protruding feature may be a separate piece that is attached to a fastener (eg, hinge leaf) using, for example, any of the attachment methods disclosed herein. The protruding feature may be configured to prevent bending (eg, collapsing) of the fastener portion(s) (eg, hinge leaf). Gaskets may be formed of polymers and/or resins. Polymers and/or resins may include carbon or silicon based materials. For example, the polymer may be a polyurethane polymer. The gasket may include a foam material. The gasket may include gas pockets or may be free of (eg detectable) gas pockets. The gasket may include a flexible material (eg rubber or latex). The gasket may include a material that is either opaque or transparent to visible light.

In some embodiments, the circuitry contacts and/or is attached to the gas guide. For example, circuitry may be placed and/or attached to the gas guide, such as over the gas guide. Up may be in a direction opposite to the center of gravity (eg, opposite to the direction of the gravity vector 4200 pointing to the center of gravity). The circuitry may be configured to facilitate gas flow through the gas channels. 42 shows various parts of a display construction and associated fastener assembly in a perspective view. 42 shows a circuit board 4230 (e.g., including a driver and/or booster board) configured to be connected to a display component (shown as portion 4201) and to provide data and/or power via cabling 4231. ) is shown as an example. Circuit board 4230 (shown in partial view) also connects (e.g., six) other cables not shown in FIG. 42 to an E-box (e.g., containing a timing controller) and/or a power supply. configured to connect. Another cable may extend from the side of board 4230 opposite to that shown in FIG. 42 . 42 shows a circuit board 4230 into a fastener including a first portion 4222 (shown in part) and a second portion 4221 (shown in partial view) held by hinges 4285. Shows an example of integration. Hinge leaf 4222 is coupled to a gas guide 4223 configured to guide gas flowing (eg, entering or exiting) through an opening (not shown in FIG. 42 ). The gas guide is coupled to a plate 4255 (shown in partial view) with ten protrusions. The protrusions may be evenly spaced along the length of the plate. The plate is coupled with the gas guide 4223 to form a gas passage (eg between every two protrusions). The protrusion is configured to prevent bending (eg collapsing) of the gas guide and/or plate. The protrusion is configured to ensure that the gas passageway remains functional and/or intact over time. The gas guide 4223 and plate 4255 guide the gas in the direction shown by dashed arrows (eg 4251). Hinge leaf 4222 is configured to mate with hinge leaf 4221 comprising a bracket. Display construction 4201 (shown in partial view) is framed by a sensor emitter panel (eg 4203, shown in partial view) that facilitates touch screen capabilities. 4299 shows a partial view of fasteners, display constructions, and associated components. At least one gas passage may be aligned with the fan. The gas passage may be configured to facilitate the flow of gas, at least as a flow of gas generated, for example, by a fan arranged in the gas passage. The gas passage may be configured to prevent a pressure within the fitting that is different from the ambient pressure, such as during operation of the fan(s). Ambient pressure may be about 1 atmosphere. A pressure different from ambient pressure includes overpressure or underpressure.

In some embodiments, the two portions of the fastener (eg, the first hinge leaf and the second hinge leaf) are configured to reversibly engage and disengage with each other. For example, one hinge leaf may include a knuckle with a closed cavity holding a pintle, and another leaf may include a complementary knuckle with an open cavity and no pintle. The two complementary sets of knuckles are interdigitable. Engagement can include a snap (eg, slip in and snap through a snap fitting). The engagement can press the spring. Engagement may be detected by compression of the spring and/or by a sensor (eg, a pressure sensor). Once the complementary sets of knuckles are engaged, they can be attached to prevent disengagement. Attachment may be by using screws and/or pins. Attachment may be initiated automatically upon engagement of the two sets of complementary knuckles (eg, using sensors and/or springs). Attachment can be done manually. Attaching the two hinge leaves (eg, by attaching knuckles) may be reversible (eg, automatic and/or manual). A knuckle may include an indentation (eg, notch or cutout) on its surface. A screw and/or pin may engage the indentation, such as when attaching (eg, securing) a knuckle and pintle mechanism. Attaching a knuckle and pintle can prevent the hinge from opening. At least one of the hinges may include a securing (eg, attachment) mechanism. The fixation may be reversible (eg, unfixed) (eg, automatically and/or manually). Unfixed hinges can be opened and closed. The fixed hinge may remain in one position (eg, a closed position). Automatic locking of the hinge may be controlled by a controller (eg, a controller of a control system, or a separate controller operatively coupled to the hinge).

43 shows an example of a hinge leaf 4321 with two sets of open cavity knuckles 4385a, 4385b. A pintle 4320a is shown engaged with a set of knuckles 4385a, which pintles are a complementary set of closed-cavity knuckle and pintle assemblies (e.g., 4022 shows a portion of a hinge leaf). , 4082) is simulated. Screw 4389 engages knuckle 4385a. 43 shows protrusion 4388 representing a snap spring. Screw 4389 can engage or disengage with the knuckle in direction 4387 . Pintle 4320b (shown in partial view) may engage or disengage from knuckle 4385c (shown in partial view) by moving in direction 4386 . 4300 shows a partial view of hinge leaf 4321, knuckle set 4851a and screw 4389. The fastener portion 4321 is shown as a perspective view at 4370.

In some embodiments, a user controls a set of displays through a touch screen as if the set of displays were a single display (eg, screen division of an image). Screen division of a displayed image between display sets may be accomplished through software (eg, a non-transitory computer readable medium). The software can read the input from each touch display (eg, over network and/or USB) and, knowing where each display is located within the set (also called a group), it can locate the user's touch within the set. can be calculated For example, suppose the set has a Cartesian coordinate system where 0, 0 is located in the lower left corner (as viewed from the viewer of the display) and 100%, 100% is located in the upper right corner (as viewed from the viewer of the display). Then, for a 2x2 display group, the lower left corner of the display set is 0, 0, and the upper right corner of the display set is 100%, 100%. For this example of a 2x2 display set, the translation of a touch on any display is X = (0.5 * (X of one of the left displays) or (0.5 + (0.5 * (X of one of the right displays) ))); and Y = (0.5 * (Y of one of the lower displays) or (0.5 + (0.5 * (Y of one of the upper displays))), where X is In the horizontal direction with respect to the display observer, Y is in the vertical direction with respect to the display observer Adjustments can be made to the transformation of the coordinate system to account for the screen gap between the touch displays Each of the four displays is a touch screen Each of the displays may include two sets of its own sensor and emitter panels (e.g., around the edge of each display) for detecting user touches to the functional units. Only one can be attached, and such panels can be attached around the outer edge of the display set.

30A shows an example of four displays 3002a, 3002b, 3002c, 3002d forming a display set 3003. Each of the displays 3002a to 3002d displays the same image. 30A shows an example of four displays 3022a, 3022b, 3022c, 3022d forming a display set 3023. Each of the displays 3022a to 3022d together display the image displayed on, for example, 3002c. If the user wishes to click on the surfer displayed within the display set 3003, the user may do so by clicking on any location 3008a to 3008d of the display set 3003. If the user wants to click on the surfer displayed in the display set 3023, the user does not, for example, click on the position 3028 (which is similar to position 3008c) but on the position 3029 of the display set 3023. You can do so by clicking on . Screen division of images between display sets 3023 can be accomplished through software. The software can read input (eg, from a touch screen or cursor) and, knowing how the image is split between displays, can calculate where the user is pointing. For example, suppose the set has a Cartesian coordinate system where 0, 0 is located in the lower left corner (as viewed from the viewer of the display) and 100%, 100% is located in the upper right corner (as viewed from the viewer of the display). Then, for a 2x2 display group, the lower left corner of display 3002c is 0, 0 and the upper right corner of display 3002b is 100%, 100%. For this example of a 2x2 display set, the translation of a touch on any display is X = (0.5 * (X on display 3002a or 3002c) or (0.5 + (0.5 * (X on display 3002b or 3002d))) ); and Y = (0.5 * (Y of display 3002c or 3002d) or (0.5 + (0.5 * (Y of display 3002a or 3002b))), where X is relative to the observer of the display. is in the horizontal direction and Y is in the vertical direction relative to the display observer Adjustments can be made to the transformation of the coordinate system to account for the screen gap 3005 between the touch displays Figure 30A shows two immediately adjacent displays Examples of gaps 3005 and 3025 are shown, which may be filled with polymers and/or resins.

FIG. 30B shows an example of four displays 3010a, 3010b, 3010c, 3010d (shown by the left four displays shown in FIG. 30B) in a display set 3011, where the image shows four displays. 3010a to 3010d are displayed across them as if they were a single display (shown by the right 4 displays in FIG. 30B). Each of the displays may have its own identification (eg, shown as numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4).

31A shows an example of four display elements 3101a, 3101b, 3101c, 3101d in a 2x2 display element set 3103. Each of the four displays 3101a-3101d includes its own two sets of sensors and emitter panels 3104 (shown around the edge of each display) for detecting user contact on the touch screen functionality. .

31B shows an example of four display elements 3105a, 3105b, 3105c, 3105d in a 2x2 display element set 3106 that surrounds the display element set. The set of display constructions 3106 collectively has two vertical sensor and emitter panels attached within a frame 3108, which are attached around the outer edge of the display set 3106. Thus, each of the display components 3105a-3105d has two sides on which the sensor emitter panel portion is disposed (e.g., outer matrix side) and two sides without the sensor and emitter panel (e.g., inner matrix side).

In some embodiments, the display construction is displaceable (eg, movable). Displacements can be made vertically and/or horizontally. The displacement may be a lateral displacement. In some embodiments, the displacement is a horizontal displacement. For example, the display construction may be displaced laterally (eg, horizontally) along at least one railing (eg, displaced on (or as part of) a floor and/or ceiling). For example, the display matrix may be attached to a support structure that is displaceable vertically and/or horizontally (eg, along at least one railing). The support structure may be any support structure disclosed herein. For example, the support structure may be transparent (eg, including plastic or glass) (eg, substantially) (eg, substantially) at least in the visible spectrum. The support structure may be a window. In some embodiments, a plurality of display matrices may be coupled (eg, attached, laminated, and/or glued) to a support structure (eg, in any configuration disclosed herein). Attachment may be by use of an adhesive (eg, including a polymer or resin, eg, as disclosed herein). An adhesive may be disposed between the display construction and at least one adjacent support structure (eg, a window such as a glass pane). The support structure may be a tinted and/or tintable window.

In some embodiments, a plurality of display matrices are attached to the window. The number of display matrices attached to the window may be one, two, three or four display matrices. The plurality of display matrices within a display arrangement may be an even number of display arrangements. At least two of the plurality of display matrices may be disposed facing each other and/or (eg, substantially) parallel to each other, with a support structure interposed between the two display matrices (eg, between large planes of display structures). in) is placed. A support structure disposed between two opposite display matrices may be an intermediate support structure. In some embodiments, the plurality of display matrices are arranged as a pair of display matrices, wherein two display matrices within a pair of display matrices are (i) disposed on opposite sides of a support structure and/or (ii) back-to-back. (with the front side of the display component being the media ejection side and the back side being opposite the front side). Back-to-back may refer to the large planes of the display matrix facing each other (eg, opposite the viewing plane). Such positioning of a pair of display matrices can facilitate viewing of media displayed on the two display matrices from opposite sides of the support structure (eg, by two different users positioned as in 4551 and 4552). The display matrix may include an array of emissive entities forming a grid. Placing the two display matrices (each with a grid of emitting entities (eg LEDs)) in a configuration that facilitates at least partial overlap of their grids results in a moiré pattern when the intermediate support structure is transparent (eg windows). can cause formation. Intermediate support structures (eg windows) may not be transparent. The intermediate support structure may be configured to counteract the moiré pattern. For example, the intermediate support structure may be opaque. For example, the intermediate support structure may be dispersive (eg, frosted, etched, or sanded windows such as glass). The intermediate support structure may have at least one rough surface having a first roughness. The first roughness may have a first Ra value (where the Ra value is an arithmetic average of absolute values of profile height deviations from the average line, recorded within the evaluation length). The Ra value (eg, the first Ra value and/or the second Ra value) can be at most about 10 μm, 5 μm, 4 μm, 3 μm, 2.6 μm, 2.5 μm, 2 μm, or 1 μm. A dispersive transparent surface can be achieved by chemical etching, mechanical etching, or sanding. Dispersible support structures may include dispersible materials. A dispersive support structure can facilitate light traveling therethrough. Dispersive support structures (eg, glass windows) can reduce visibility therethrough by up to about 5%, 10%, 15%, 20% or 25%. In some embodiments, the intermediate support structure is (eg, substantially) transparent to at least the visible spectrum, does not disturb the moiré pattern, and is not (eg, visibly) rough.

In some embodiments, the display matrix is coupled to a window (eg, cover glass) disposed between the viewer and the display matrix (eg, 4406). One surface of the window may be exposed to the atmosphere of the enclosure in which the display composition is disposed. A support structure (eg, a glass window) may be configured to facilitate viewing of images presented (eg, emitted) by the display matrix. In some embodiments, the display matrix is disposed between a window and an intermediate support structure (which may also be a window) located on opposite sides of the display matrix. For example, the display matrix may be disposed between a window and an intermediate support disposed on opposite sides of a large plane (eg, viewing plane, media projection plane) of the display matrix. The window and/or intermediate support structure may be transparent (eg comprising glass or plastic). Transparent may include fully transparent or partially transparent. Transparent support structures (eg windows) may be non-dispersive or dispersive. A dispersive transparent surface can be achieved by chemical etching, mechanical etching, or sanding. The window may include a dispersive material. A dispersive window can facilitate light traveling therethrough. A dispersive window (eg, etched glass, frosted glass, and/or sanded glass) can facilitate an image projected by the display matrix to be viewed by a viewer therethrough. A dispersive window can facilitate blurring of any junction line between two display matrices as part of a display construction. For example, the two display matrices are disposed on the same side and/or (eg, substantially) on the same plane of the display configuration, such as a junction line between display matrices 4452 and 4453 . The dispersive window can facilitate blurring any pixilation resulting from the arrangement of an array of light emitting entities (eg, LEDs) in the display matrix. Dispersive windows can facilitate viewing media displayed by the display configuration. The intermediate support structure may not be transparent. A window (eg, cover window) may be configured to obstruct a moiré pattern formed by two display matrices that at least partially overlap (eg, substantially), such as in the configurations of 4401 and 4403. The intermediate support structure and/or cover window(s) may be opaque. The dispersive intermediate support structure and/or cover window(s) may have a certain surface roughness (eg, have a value of Ra), eg on its large surface. The surface roughness of the intermediate support structure may be a first roughness, and the roughness of the cover window(s) may be a second roughness (eg, having a second Ra value). The dispersive support structure (eg glass) and/or cover window(s) may reduce visibility therethrough by up to about 3%, 5%, 10%, 15% or 20%. The surface roughness (first roughness) of the intermediate support structure may be the same as or different from the roughness of the outer cover window(s) of the display composition. The intermediate (eg, inner) support structure may have (eg, substantially) the same dispersive properties as those of the outer window(s) (cover window) of the display composition. The inner support structure may have dispersive properties different from those of the outer window(s) of the display composition. The inner support structure may have dispersive properties that are (eg, substantially) the same as the dispersive properties of the outer (eg, cover) window(s).

In some embodiments, the display construction includes a layer of adhesive material, such as described at 202 of FIG. 2 . The adhesive material may be dispersible (eg, having any of the dispersing properties disclosed herein). For example, a dispersive support structure (eg, a glass window) can reduce visibility therethrough by up to about 5%, 10%, 15%, 20% or 25%. The display construction may include a transparent cover window, a transparent intermediate support structure, and at least one layer of dispersible adhesive material. The display construction can include a transparent cover window, a dispersible intermediate support structure, and at least one layer of dispersible adhesive material. The display construction can include at least one dispersible cover window, a transparent intermediate support structure, and at least one dispersible adhesive material layer. The display construction can include at least one dispersible cover window, a dispersible intermediate support structure, and at least one dispersible adhesive material layer. The dispersible adhesive layer(s) are (i) so as to disrupt the moiré pattern and/or (ii) further away from the viewer, and/or where the viewer facing the first display is disposed on the opposite side of the first display matrix, and/or It may be configured to prevent viewing the content of the second display matrix facing away from the . The display configuration may be configured to (i) interfere with the moiré pattern and/or (ii) an observer facing the first display disposed on the opposite side of the first display matrix, further away from the viewer, and/or facing away from the viewer. 2 can be configured to prevent viewing the content of the display matrix.

In some embodiments, two display matrices are disposed on opposite sides of the intermediate support structure, wherein at least one of the two display matrices (eg, each of them) is a window disposed between the display matrix and the viewer. (also referred to herein as the "cover window" or "outer window" of the display construction). For example, the array of display matrices can include a front-facing window, a first display matrix, an intermediate support structure, a second display matrix, and a rear-facing window. The first display matrix can be configured to project media towards a front facing window. The second display matrix can be configured to project media towards a rear-facing window. Backward and forward are opposite directions selected arbitrarily. The front-facing cover window, rear-facing cover window, and/or intermediate support structure can (1) be dispersive, (2) facilitate visible light (e.g., an image) to be projected therethrough, and/or (3) can be dispersive, (4) can be opaque, (5) can be (eg, substantially) transparent, and/or (6) can have a consistency. Transparent (or substantially transparent) can be a window that appears completely transparent to the average human eye. Roughness is visible to the naked eye (eg, as frosted glass). The illuminance may be less than human eye visibility, and the support structure may appear clear (eg, transparent). The front-facing cover window, the rear-facing cover window, and/or the intermediate support structure may have at least one characteristic that is the same. Properties may include material composition, visibility, roughness, tint, color tone or thickness. For example, the front-facing cover window, rear-facing cover window, and intermediate support structure may be made of glass (eg, having the same thickness). For example, the front-facing cover window and the rear-facing cover window may have (eg, substantially) the same illuminance (eg, invisible illuminance) and/or the same tint. For example, the front-facing cover window and the rear-facing cover window can have (eg, substantially) the same transparency and/or the same thickness. The front-facing cover window, the rear-facing cover window, and/or the intermediate support structure may have at least one different property. For example, the front-facing cover window and the middle-facing cover window may have different roughness, tint, tint, and/or thickness. For example, the rear facing cover window and intermediate support structure may have different roughness, tint, color and/or thickness. For example, the intermediate support structure may have a first roughness, and the rear-facing cover window and the front-facing cover window may each have a second roughness different from the first roughness. In some embodiments, the second roughness is lower than the first roughness. In some embodiments, the second roughness is higher than the first roughness. In some embodiments, the first illuminance is (i) such that it interferes with the moiré pattern and/or (ii) the viewer facing the first display is further away from the viewer, disposed on the opposite side of the first display matrix, and/or It is configured to prevent viewing the content of the second display matrix facing away from the viewer. In some embodiments, the second illuminance is such that the second illuminance interferes with the moiré pattern and/or the viewer facing the first display is disposed on the opposite side of the first display matrix, further away from the viewer, and/or facing away from the viewer. 2 is configured to prevent viewing of the contents of the display matrix. In some embodiments, the illuminance of the front-facing cover window and the illuminance of the rear-facing cover window are formed from two display matrices that at least partially overlap (e.g., (e.g., substantially) disposed in a configuration similar to 4401 and 4403). are constructed together to counteract the moiré pattern. The second illuminance is (i) to attenuate and/or blur pixilation arising from the array of projection entities (eg LEDs) of the display matrix and/or (ii) positioned between the support structure and the projection face of the display matrix. It may be configured to facilitate viewing of media displayed by the display matrix through a support structure for an observer, such an observer facing the projection face of the display matrix. For example, the intermediate support structure can have a first thickness, and the rear-facing cover window and the front-facing cover window can each have a second thickness different from the first thickness. In some embodiments, the second thickness is less than the first thickness. For example, the intermediate support structure can have a first tint and/or tint, and the rear-facing cover window and front-facing cover window can each have a second tint and/or tint different from the first tint and/or tint. can In some embodiments, the second tint and/or hue is lighter than the first tint and/or hue. The display configuration may include two media viewing screens disposed back-to-back, with an intermediate support structure in between. In some embodiments, the front-facing cover window and/or rear-facing cover window act as a support structure for the display matrix. The display matrix may be stationary and the intermediate support structure may be movable (eg, laterally). The display matrix may be stationary and the intermediate support structure may be replaceable. The intermediate support structure may or may not be attached (eg, irreversibly) to the display matrix(s). Irreversible attachment can be attachment that excludes replacing and/or moving the intermediate structure relative to the display matrix(s). The display matrix may or may not have touch screen functionality. In some embodiments, the support structure is a (eg glass) window. The window may be any window disclosed herein. The intermediate support structure window and/or cover window(s) may have a thickness, for example as disclosed herein. The thickness may be at least about 4 mm, 5 mm, 6 mm, 8 mm, 10 mm, 12 mm, 15 mm, 17 mm, 19 mm, or 21 mm. The intermediate support structure may include glass (eg, any glass disclosed herein, such as tempered glass). In some embodiments, the thickness of the intermediate support structure is at least 1.25, 1.5, 1.75, 2, 2.25, 2.5, 2.75, or 3 times thicker than each of the cover windows (front-facing cover window and/or rear-facing cover window). . In some embodiments, the intermediate support structure (eg, glass pane), front-facing cover window and/or rear-facing cover window are adhesively attached to the display matrix (eg, as shown in FIG. 8 ) to form a display construction. .

44 shows display matrix 4403 disposed between front facing cover window 4406 (eg, front glass pane) and intermediate support structure 4408 (eg, middle glass pane); An example display matrix and support structure assembly is shown in which the display matrix 4402 is disposed between the rear facing cover window 4401 (e.g., rear windshield) and the intermediate support structure 4408, such display matrix 4402, 4403 ) are disposed on opposite sides of the intermediate support structure 4408, such display matrices 4402 and 4403 are (eg, substantially) parallel and aligned with each other, and any media displayed by them can be displayed on the intermediate structure ( 4408) in opposite directions. display matrix 4405 is disposed between front facing cover window 4406 and intermediate support structure 4408; A display matrix 4404 is disposed between the rear-facing cover window 4401 and the middle support structure 4408, and these display matrices 4405 and 4404 are disposed on opposite sides of the middle support structure 4408; Display matrices 4404 and 4405 are (eg, substantially) parallel and aligned with each other, and project any media displayed by them in opposite directions away from intermediate structure 4408 . The display matrices 4403 and 4405 are disposed on (eg, substantially) the same (vertical) plane. The display matrices 4402 and 4404 are (eg, substantially) disposed on the same (vertical) plane. Display matrices 4402, 4403, 4404, 4405 are each coupled to circuitry (eg, circuit boards) 4421a-4421d at one of their edges, respectively. Display matrices 4405 and 4403 are interposed between 4406 and 4408, and display matrices 4402 and 4404 are interposed between 4401 and 4408 so that two observers positioned on opposite sides of the display composition can It forms a single display configuration 4400 configured to project media viewed from opposite sides. Display configuration 4400 includes a heat distributor (eg, heat sink or heat channel) 4431 configured to reduce heat dissipated by circuit boards such as 4421a and 4421b. At least one of the structures 4406, 4401, 4408 may include glass, such as a dispersive glass or (eg, substantially) transparent glass. The intermediate support structure may be tinted (eg, a permanently tinted or tintable window (eg, comprising an electrochromic composition)).

In some embodiments, the display matrix (eg, as part of a display configuration) is translatable (eg, laterally). Translation can be made along the railings. The railings may be disposed on top and/or bottom of the display composition. The top and bottom may be for the center of gravity. The display construction may be attached to and/or bounded by the frame portion. A frame may be a partial frame. The frame may be attached to and/or bounded by at least one side of the display composition. For example, the frame may be attached to and/or bounded by one, two, three, or four sides of the display composition. A frame may be a window frame. Frames can contain mullions or transoms. The display construction may be configured for heat transfer and/or dissipation (eg, by radiation, conduction, and/or convection as disclosed herein). For example, the display construction may include a heat exchanger (eg, as disclosed herein, such as a heat sink or heat channel). The heat exchanger may include an elemental metal or metal alloy (eg, copper and/or aluminum). A heat exchanger may be disposed proximate to circuitry coupled to the display configuration.

44 shows an example of two display matrices 4452 and 4453 included in a display configuration. The display composition is bounded by mullion 4456 and transoms 4455 and 4457. The display composition is unframed on its side opposite the side bordering mullion 4456. The display composition may be similar to display composition 4400 . The display construction is coupled to (eg attached to or engaged with) railings 4451 that can be translated back and forth along direction 4457, for example.

In some embodiments, a movable frame (such as that comprising mullions 4456 and transoms 4455) may or may not include display structures adjacent to support structures. For example, the support structure may be a window, such as a tintable window. The support structure may or may not support the display composition. For example, the support structure can be placed within a movable framing that does not have a display structure. The movable framing may include a first support structure that does not support one or more display components (eg, on both opposite sides thereof) and supports one or more display components (eg, on both opposite sides thereof). It may include a second support structure to. The movable framing may support a first window that does not support one or more display elements (eg, on both opposite sides thereof) and one or more display elements (eg, on both opposite sides thereof). It may include a second window to. The window may be a tintable window (eg, an electrochromic window).

In some embodiments, the display configuration is operably coupled to the connector. A connector may facilitate communication of power and data (eg, control and/or media) between a network and a display component (eg, a display matrix). Connectors can be connected and disconnected from portions of the framing and/or railings.

45 shows an example of a display composition 4500, shown in perspective, in which a display matrix is arranged in a manner similar to display composition 4400, such display composition 4510 comprising an intermediate support structure (e.g., a glass window) ( 4510) and attached to the framing 4520. Display configuration 4500 includes four display matrices, and four respective circuit boards (eg, including driver and/or booster boards) to which communication and/or power are supplied via wires 4521-4524, respectively. do. Display composition portion 4501 is a vertical cross-sectional view of display composition 4500 shown in a perspective view.

In some embodiments, a display configuration enables viewing of media from both of its viewing sides. The display configuration may include at least two (eg, a pair) display matrices disposed on opposite sides of the display configuration. Two display matrices disposed on opposite sides of a display arrangement may form a pair of display arrangements. A display configuration may include one or more such display matrix pairs (eg, at least one, two, three, four or more pairs). 44 shows a display composition 4400 with two display matrix pairs: one pair includes display matrices 4401 and 4403, and the other display matrix pair includes display matrices 4405 and 4404. The display composition may be configured to display media on both of its opposite (and largest) surfaces, with such media projected onto the opposite sides of the display composition. The media projected on the opposite sides of the display configuration may be coordinated or uncoordinated, the same or different. The media projected by at least one pair of display matrices of a display configuration may be coordinated or unregulated, the same or different. The display composition may be configured to transmit at least some of the visible radiation therethrough, for example, when the display composition stops projecting media (eg, when the display composition is not operating). A viewer may look through the display composition from one side to the other, for example, when the display composition stops projecting media (eg, when the display composition is not operating).

45 shows an example of a display composition 4501 and two observers 4551 , 4552 disposed on opposite sides of the display composition 4501 . The display configuration is such that (i) observer 4551 sees projected media 4571 unobstructed by media 4572 and/or images of viewer 4552, and/or (ii) viewer 4552 sees media view and/or view projected media 4572 unobstructed by 4571 and/or observer 4551, and/or (iii) display components will not be operational (e.g., media 4571, 4572 will not be projected) observer 4551 can see observer 4552 when observer 4551 can see observer 4552; ) can be configured to see. In FIG. 45 , observers 4551 and 4552 are not necessarily drawn to scale with display component 4501 . The display construction may have a height extending from about the floor of the enclosure to about the ceiling at most.

46 shows an example of a display configuration 4652 shown as a front view 4610, a perspective view 4620, and a vertical cross-section 4630. The display composition is bounded by mullion 4656 and transoms 4655 and 4657. Display composition 4652 is frameless on its side 4658 opposite the side bordering mullion 4456. The display construction is operatively coupled to railing 4651 which can be translated back and forth along direction 4657, for example. A socket 4653 is shown to mate with a connector that can facilitate connection of the enclosure's power and/or communications (eg, data, and/or media communications) network to the display component. In some embodiments, the framing of the display composition surrounds all sides of the display composition.

In some embodiments, at least one framing portion bordering the display structure is configured to retain circuitry, cabling, and/or connectors that transmit data (eg, including media or control command communications) and/or power. do. At least one framing portion may include a mullion, an upper transom, or a lower transom. The top and bottom are for the center of gravity.

47 shows an example of a display configuration 4752 shown as a front view 4750 . The display composition is bounded by mullions 4758 and transoms 4755 and 4757. Display composition 4752 is frameless on its side 4656, opposite the side bordering mullion 4458. The display construction is operatively coupled to railings 4651 which can be reversibly translated, eg, back and forth along direction 4757. A socket 4659 is shown to mate with a connector that can facilitate connection of the display construction with a power and/or communications (eg, data, and/or media communications) network of an enclosure in which the display construction is placed. The transom 4757 includes a circuitry board shown as an enlarged scheme 4740 (e.g., as part of an E-box that contains the timing controller for the display matrix). 47 shows a cover 4721 of a first circuit board configured to communicate with a first display matrix (e.g., including a driver and/or booster board for the first display matrix), an adapter 4722 of the first circuit board , a first cover window (eg, thinner window) 4723, a first (eg, edge) cover 4724, a second (eg, metal) cover 4731, a second cover window (eg, a thinner window) ) 4725, adapter 4726 for a second circuit board configured to communicate with the second display matrix (eg, including a driver and/or booster board for the second display matrix), Cover 4727, first display matrix 4728, middle support structure 4729 (eg, thicker glass pane), second display matrix 4730, and mullion portions 4732, 4733 of mullion 4758 ) shows an example of an enlarged cross-section 4720 (also labeled BB) showing .

In some embodiments, the display configuration includes (i) first circuitry (eg, disposed within a first circuitry board) including timing controllers, network components, and/or media-related circuitry (eg, as part of an E-box); and (ii) a second circuitry comprising a driver and/or booster board for one display matrix (eg, disposed within the second circuitry board). The first circuitry can be operably coupled (eg, connected) to one or more display matrices. For example, the first circuitry (eg, and E-box) can be operatively coupled to one display matrix. The first circuitry can be operably coupled (eg, connected) to one or more second circuitry (eg, disposed within a circuit board). For example, a first circuit (eg, and E-box) can be operatively coupled to a second circuit (eg, a driver and/or booster board), which in turn is operatively coupled to a display matrix. coupled (eg connected). The first circuitry may be located within a mullion or transom. The first circuit may be disposed on either the upper transom or the lower transom (relative to the center of gravity). The first circuitry may service at least one display component. The first circuit part is disposed on opposite sides of the intermediate support structure, parallel to each other (eg substantially), aligned with each other (eg horizontally and/or vertically), and at the opposite sides At least one pair of display components configured to project media may be serviced. The E-box can be placed at an angle to the driver and/or booster board. The angles may be at least about 30 degrees (°), 60°, 90°, 120°, or 180° relative to each other. The angles may be at least about zero angles relative to each other. Driver and/or booster boards may be disposed (eg, substantially) parallel to the side of the display configuration. Driver and/or booster boards may be placed within a (eg vertical) mullion or (eg horizontal) transom. Driver and/or booster boards may be placed within non-mullion (eg, vertical) framing or non-transom (eg, horizontal) framing portions.

In some embodiments, the display arrangement includes a plurality of display matrices arranged, for example, in an opposite pair configuration. For example, the first and second display matrices, and the second and third display matrices for the first pair all form a fourth pair as part of one display configuration (eg, see FIG. 44 ). A display configuration may include more than one pair (eg, at least about 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 pairs). Each display matrix of a display configuration may be operatively coupled to its own E-box and its own driver and/or booster board. For example, first circuitry (as part of a first E-box) can service a first display matrix, and second circuitry (as part of a second E-box) can service a second display matrix. , the third circuitry (as part of the third E-box) may service the third display matrix, and the fourth circuitry (as part of the fourth E-box) may service the fourth display matrix. In some embodiments, the timing control circuitry, driver and/or booster circuitry, and the display matrix they serve are disposed on the same side (eg, same side) of the display configuration. In some embodiments, when a display composition includes a plurality of display matrices disposed on (eg, substantially) the same plane, the timing control, driver and/or booster circuitry, and the display matrices they serve are identical in the display composition. It is disposed on a section (eg, upper or lower section). The same section may include an upper or lower section (eg, in the case of two display arrangements disposed on the same plane and/or on the same side (eg, substantially) of the display arrangement. The same section may include top right, top left, bottom right, or bottom left (eg, where the four display matrices are disposed on (eg, substantially) the same plane and/or on the same side of the display composition. there is. In some embodiments, a first display matrix and a second display matrix are configured as a pair of display matrices (e.g., 4402 and 4403 in FIG. 44 ) where the first display matrix is closer to the viewer and the second display matrix is further away from the viewer. ); In such a configuration, the first circuitry may be disposed in the upper transom (eg 4455) on the side of the display component assembly closer to the viewer (eg 4823) and/or the second circuitry may be disposed in the display component further away from the viewer. may be placed on the side of the assembly (eg, 4824). The display construction assembly includes framing portion(s). In some embodiments, the third display matrix and the fourth display matrix are on the side of the display component assembly with the third display matrix closer to the viewer and the fourth display matrix on the side of the display component assembly further from the viewer. a pair of display matrices (e.g., configured as 4405 and 4404 in FIG. 44); In such a configuration, the third circuitry may be disposed in the lower transom (eg 4457) on the side of the display component assembly closer to the viewer (eg 4853) and/or the fourth circuitry may be disposed in the display component further away from the viewer. It can be placed in the lower transom on the side of the assembly.

47 shows six connectors 4741 configured to facilitate operational (eg, electrical) coupling (eg, to facilitate data communication) with the display matrix and/or an additional circuit board (eg, directly connected to the display matrix) ( Operational (e.g., electrical) coupling (e.g., power transmission) between circuit board 4740 and the display matrix to the display matrix, e.g., via driver and/or booster boards disposed within mullion 4758. Example of a third circuit board 4742 (e.g., including timing controllers (e.g., as part of an E-box), network components, and/or media related circuitry) that includes connectors 4742 that facilitate show Circuit board 4740 may operate (e.g., with the display matrix) between the circuit board 4740 and the display matrix, e.g., via additional circuit boards (e.g., including driver and/or booster boards) directly coupled to the display matrix. , a connector 4742 configured to facilitate electrical) coupling (eg, power transmission).

48 shows an example of a display composition 4850 having an upper section 4852 and a lower section 4853 about the center of gravity G (vector 4899 points to the center of gravity G). The display configuration is operable to (e.g., in a manner similar to circuit boards 4421a and 4421b) a display matrix, two display matrix pairs in upper section 4852, and two display matrix pairs in lower section 4853 and It is framed by mullions 4858 configured to receive one or more circuit boards (eg, each including a driver and/or booster board for a display component) to which they are directly coupled (eg connected). Display configuration 4850 includes upper transom 4855, and circuitry configured to house upper circuitry (eg, including timing controllers, network components, and/or media related circuitry (eg, as part of an E-box)). Framed by lower transom 4854 configured to receive lower circuitry such as board 4753 (eg, including timing controllers, network components, and/or media related circuitry (eg, as part of an E-box)) do. The display component 4850 has a railing 4851 (e.g., a transom 4855) that facilitates back-and-forth (e.g., reversible) movement 4858 of the display component (e.g., using bearings or other sliding mechanisms). via) is configured to be operably coupled. An enlarged view of portion 4860 is shown at 4800, which includes upper railing portion 4821 and lower railing portion 4822 of railings 4851, first circuitry 4823 servicing display matrix 4827. ), second circuitry 4824 servicing display matrix 4826, display component part 4850a including front display matrix 4826 and rear display matrix 4826, and part 4825 of transom 4855. ) is shown.

Sometimes, the installation of a display construction is into an existing window framing portion (e.g., mullions and/or transoms) to route cable(s) for transmitting data and/or power to the display matrix and/or tintable windows. require cutting. Some framing parts have internal structures that make it difficult to route and/or add cable(s). For example, there are internal obstructions within the framing (eg, including extruded sections and/or fasteners) that may prevent the cable(s) from being routed as requested (eg, into the existing framing). Cable ends can be damaged during routing. Modifications of the framing portion (eg, by forming openings therein and/or otherwise manipulating the existing framing portion) may weaken the existing framing system. Inaccurate manipulations (eg drilling and/or cutting) are likely to require replacement of the existing framing portion being manipulated and/or adjacent existing framing portions being affected. Manipulating an existing structure (eg, cutting and/or manipulating it) can be extensive. Subsequent replacement and/or maintenance may be cumbersome, cumbersome, time consuming and/or expensive. Such difficulties include installing the cable over the existing framing and making it (i) conceal the cabling from observers, (ii) secure and/or organize the cabling within the framing cap, (iii) be installable and removable ( eg, by covering with a framing cap configured to be reversibly installable and/or removable), and/or (iv) to be aesthetically pleasing (eg to mimic the original framing structure, such as its outer surface). there is. Such a cap can be used to alter the aesthetics of an existing framing structure (eg, without hiding any cabling therein). The cap portion may be a corner portion. 49 shows a corner cap 4961 covering mullion 4901 (shown in cross section 4960).

In some embodiments, installation of the display matrix may include installing at least one framing portion cap onto existing frame portion(s) to form a wireway for routing the cable(s). there is. Such a cap may be modified as needed (eg by forming hole(s) or openings such as cut(s) in the cap). A cable may include a bundle of cables. The cables within the bundle may be tied together (eg, using bands (eg, zip ties, rubber bands, or strings)). A cable may be guided by at least one cable guide. A cable guide may include a groove as part of a railing cap, a railing installed within a mullion cap, or a railing structured as part of a railing cap. The cable guide may include one or more holders (eg hooks). The holders may be partial such that one holder does not extend from one side of the framing cap to the opposite side of the framing cap (eg an L-shaped holder). The holders may be complete such that one holder extends from one side of the framing cap to the opposite side of the framing cap. The holder(s) may be configured to support the cabling, to help organize the cabling (eg, during installation and/or within a mullion cap). The holder may be hidden from the viewer within the framing cap. The holder may be visible to the viewer and may extend (eg, hang) outwardly of the mullion cap (eg, may require the second cap to be covered thereby). Mullion caps can be modular. Mullion caps can be integrated with each other. The first mullion cap may be configured to engage (eg, integral with and/or attached to) the second mullion cap (eg, via railings and/or snap fittings). For example, a first mullion cap can have a holder(s) configured to be incorporated into a second mullion cap configured to be coupled (eg, snapped) to the first mullion cap. In some embodiments, the framing portion caps are not configured to be attached to each other (eg, and installed as two adjacent stand-alone framing portion caps). In some embodiments, the framing cap may be freestanding. For example, a first cap may cover a framing portion, and a second cap may be attached to the first cap and not cover any framing portion (eg, rather cover a portion of the window), thus In the specification it may be referred to as a "fake cap" or "fake cap".

In some embodiments, framing caps (including any faux caps) may be distributed as a kit. A kit may be provided to the installer(s) for deployment of the display configuration. For example, to field service engineers (eg low voltage engineers) and/or glaziers. The kit may include a first framing cap portion that engages the existing framing (eg, via adhesive, screws, nails, and/or bolts), and a second framing portion configured to engage the first framing cap portion. The kit includes bonding and/or tying aids (e.g., zip ties, tape, (e.g., rubber) bands, clips, self-adhesive strips, and/or screws) for bonding the wire bundles together, and a first framing portion to the existing framing. It may further include any engagement aids to engage the system. Self-adhesive strips may include interlocking stem snaps, and/or other materials with high friction surfaces. The kit may include, for example, a cover (also referred to as a "trim kit") configured to be disposed in an area between the framing portion and the display composition to reduce (eg, block) light transmission through the area. can For example, the display construction may be intended to be installed over a portion of a support structure that is at least partially transparent to visible light (eg, over a support structure, such as a window), and such support structure is larger than the display construction so that the display construction and the window are not separated. Leave gap(s) between framing. The trim kit may be configured to be installed over the gap(s), such as to reduce eye strain and/or distraction of a viewer of media displayed by the display configuration, from any light incident through the gap(s). there is.

49 shows an example of a window framing system and its components. For example, 4900 illustrates window framing in which existing windows (e.g., tintable or non-tintable windows) 4902a-4902d are framed within an existing framing system that includes a mullion 4901. Display constructs 4903a and 4903b are added onto the existing window system. The display composition is installed over an existing window disposed behind the display composition (and thus not shown at 4900). Cablings 4954, 4955, and 4956 are operably coupled to the network and display components, which cabling is externally installed over an existing framing system (including mullion 4901) and cabling 4904, 4910. is covered by Cap 4905 is a dummy cap coupled to transom cap 4910. Cabling 4954 may be coupled to (eg, connected to) a display component. Cabling 4956 may be coupled (eg, connected) to an E-box and/or display controller (eg, timing controller). Cabling may be operatively coupled to a power and/or data source (coupled to a network). The interior of the framing caps (eg, 4905, 4904) can be seen in the window system of 4950. An exemplary framing portion cap has a framing portion (eg, transom) 4970 having a body 4970, a cut portion (eg, an opening) 4971 having a front side 4980a and a back side 4980b to the observer. It is shown at 4970, which shows The framing portion has two holders (e.g., hooks) 4975 that are complete holders extending from the front portion 4980a of the body 4972 to its rear portion 4980b, these holders holding the cable 4976 and the cable ( 4978). The cabling of the cabling system is tied together using ties 4977. Framing portion cap 4970 may be installed, for example, as framing (eg, transom) cap 4910 and may retain cabling 4955 for framing (eg, transom) cap 4905 . Framing portion cap 4910 may or may not be configured to attach to framing portion cap 4905 (which is a dummy cap). Framing portion cap 4910 may or may not be configured to attach to framing portion cap 4905 .

In some embodiments, routing cables to be operatively coupled to display configuration(s) disposed within an existing window framing system has a variety of requirements. Installation requirements may include (i) drilling and/or cutting portion(s) of the existing framing system, (ii) routing cables onto the existing framing system.

In some embodiments, the cap may include two parts. A first portion of the cap may be attached (e.g., using bolting, nailing, or screwing) to an existing framing portion, and a second portion of the cap may be coupled to (e.g., engage with) the first portion. / can be engaged or snapped to). Snap couplings may include snap fittings. The first portion may include a dent, and the second portion may include a snap fitting portion. The side of the first portion may have a groove along the side or a plurality of grooves along the side. The side of the second portion may include a cantilever snap fitting portion extending along the side, or may have a plurality of separate snap fitting portions along the side (eg, to fit into a plurality of grooves of the first portion). The first portion and/or the second portion may be configured to support one or more holders (eg, cabling and/or device(s)) and/or railings (eg, configured to support cabling and/or device(s)). configured) may be included. The holder may be coupled to the framing cap portion by one or more splines. The splines may be arranged in pairs inside the framing cap. The pair of splines can point toward each other (eg, as in cap portion 5000) or away from each other (eg, as in cap portion 5080).

50 shows examples of various cap parts shown as vertical cross-sections. The first cap portion 5000 includes two splines including spline 5001, the two splines pointing toward each other, and a dent 5004 configured to engage the snap fit portion. First cap portion 5000 is configured to attach (as in 5031) to an existing framing portion such as 5034. The second cap portion 5020 includes a side portion having a snap fit portion such as 5002 configured to engage a dent (eg, 5004) in the first cap portion 5000. The side comprising 5002 can act as a snap fit cantilever. The second cap portion 5020 includes a railing 5003 . The railings may extend along the entire second cab portion or may extend only to a portion of the second cab portion. Second cap portion 5020 is configured to engage (eg, as shown at 5031 ) first portion 5031 . The interior 5032 of the framing cap is configured to hold cables and/or devices (eg, sensors, emitters, controllers, circuitry (eg, circuit boards), and/or other electrical components). The railing side (eg 5063) can have any length L1 less than the width W1 of the framing cap. The width W1 of the framing cap may be equal to or greater than the width of an existing framing such as 5034. The railing width (W3) must be sufficient to accommodate the wires. The length of the railing (L1) should be configured to hold the wiring in place. The length of the opening to the railing cavity must be sufficient for the wire to pass through. The cap portion 5060 includes a snap fitting portion 5062 that can replace the outer railing to be configured to engage with the outer railing (or dent), so that the cap portion 5060 is coupled to the cap portion 5080. In another configured cap portion, it includes a dent 5082 separated from the front cap portion 5086 by a straight side portion 5083 having a certain height h3. The height can be configured to facilitate engagement of wires and/or holders. Framing cap portion 5080 includes splines such as 5081 that face the side of the cap (eg, face 5083). The spline is configured to engage a holder (not shown). The holder may extend into the cap portion where the spline is disposed, or beyond the height of the cap portion where the spline is disposed (eg, as shown with respect to 4975 in FIG. 49 ).

In some embodiments, the framing cap includes a polymer (eg, organic polymer), resin, or allotrope of elemental carbon. In some embodiments, the framing cap includes a metal comprising elemental metal and/or metal alloy. In some embodiments, the framing cap includes a composite material. In some embodiments, the framing cap includes a non-composite material. In some embodiments, the surface of the framing cap is treated. The framing cap may be configured to resist electricity (eg, may be non-conductive). At least one surface of the framing cap may be treated. For example, the framing cap may include aluminum that has been surface treated to create anodized aluminum. The surface may be configured for self-lubrication. The surface may include impregnated polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) Teflon (eg, for increased lubricity and/or low friction). Compared to an untreated surface, at least one surface of the framing cap may be configured for increased lubricity, higher corrosion resistance and/or higher electrical resistance. Such surface treatment may facilitate, for example, a tool-less installation and removal process of the framing cap portions to each other (eg, via snapping). Tool-free installation can save time during commissioning.

In some embodiments, the framing cap and/or framing (or portion thereof) is configured for temperature regulation. The framing cap and/or framing (or portions thereof) may include one or more ventilation holes. The one or more vent holes may be configured to facilitate gas flow within the framing cap and/or framing (or portion thereof), such as from one end of the framing cap and/or framing (or portion thereof) to an opposite end thereof. there is. One or more ventilation holes may be configured to facilitate temperature control of the interior of the framing cap and/or framing (or portion thereof). A framing cap and/or framing (or portion thereof) is part of a framing system, such as a door, wall, support structure, window such as a tintable window, or any combination thereof. One or more ventilation holes may be configured to facilitate temperature regulation of the interior of the framing cap and/or framing (or portions thereof), such as during temperature changes in the framing system. The one or more vent holes are configured to facilitate gas flow in the vicinity of the framing cap and/or at least one device integrated with (eg, disposed within and/or on) the framing (or portion thereof). The device may be disposed partly inside and partly outside the framing cap and/or framing (or part thereof). The device may be disposed partly inside the framing cap and/or framing (or part thereof) and partly on its outer surface. A device may include a sensor ensemble or a media display. The one or more ventilation holes may be configured to facilitate temperature regulation in the vicinity of at least one device disposed in the framing cap portion, for example to facilitate temperature regulation of the device (eg, thermal equilibration, heating or cooling of the device). can The device may be disposed partly inside and partly outside the framing cap and/or framing (or part thereof). The framing cap and/or framing (or portion thereof) may include, for example, an insulating coating configured to reduce temperature variations within the interior of the framing cap and/or framing (or portion thereof), respectively. The framing cap and/or framing (or portion thereof) may include an insulating coating configured to reduce the temperature equilibrium between the external environment and the interior of the framing cap and/or framing (or portion thereof). The framing cap and/or framing (or portion thereof) may include an insulating coating configured to reduce the temperature equilibrium between the framing (as part of the framing system) and the framing cap (eg, the interior of the framing cap). The insulating coating can be disposed inside and/or outside the framing cap and/or the framing (or part thereof). A framing system (eg, kit and/or frame) may include a framing cap and an intermediate body (eg, insulation or thermal conductor) disposed between the framing (which is part of the framing system). The intermediate body may be an insert, an intermediate body, or an intervening body. The intermediate body may be configured to reduce heat transfer (eg, temperature equalization) between the framing system and the framing cap portion (eg, it is part of the kit). The intermediate body may comprise a solid, semi-solid (eg gel), liquid or gaseous material (eg low thermal conductivity material). Intermediate body (eg, insulator) materials may include polymers, fabrics, and/or foams. The intermediate body may be a low pressure gas, such as less than about 1 atmosphere (eg, less than the ambient pressure in the environment in which the framing cap and/or framing (or portion thereof) is disposed). The intermediate body may be passive. The passive intermediate body may include a thermally conductive plate or a thermally conductive pipe. The intermediate body may be active. Active intermediate materials include thermostats, circulating coolants, thermally conductive plates, thermally conductive pipes, heaters or coolers. The intermediate body may be positioned in a manner that facilitates thermal containment, heat exchange restriction, or any combination thereof. The device, device housing, intermediate body, framing cap and/or framing (or portions thereof) may include insulators, heat exchangers and/or cooling elements. The heat exchanger and/or cooling element may include a heat pipe, or metal slab. Metals may include elemental metals or metal alloys. The metal may be configured for (eg, efficient and/or rapid) conduction of heat. The metal may include copper, aluminum, brass, steel or bronze. The heat exchanger (eg cooling element) may comprise a fluid, gas or semi-solid (eg gel) material. Heat exchangers can be active and/or passive. The heat exchanger may include a circulating material. The heat exchanger may be operatively coupled to an active cooling device (eg, a thermostat, chiller, and/or refrigerator). The active cooling device may be disposed outside the device, device housing, midbody, framing cap and/or framing (or portion thereof), or any combination thereof. The heat exchanger may be a fixture (eg, floor, ceiling, or structure) of an enclosure (eg, building or room) in which the device, device housing, intermediate body, framing cap and/or framing (or portion thereof), or any combination thereof is located. wall) can be placed. Heat exchange may include radiation, conduction or convection. The intermediate body may include a polymer. For example polyurethane, styrene, vinyl, Teflon, Kapton, nylon or polyimide. The intermediate body may include a foam, tape, or extruded shape (eg, sheet). The coating may be anodized (eg, anodized aluminum). The coating can be a polymer, such as any of the polymers disclosed herein. The intermediate body may include at least one heat shield.

51A shows examples of various framing system parts shown as vertical cross-sections, and head conditioning. The first cap portion 5134 includes two splines, the two splines facing each other, and a dent configured to engage the snap fitting portion. First cap portion 5134 is configured to attach to an existing framing portion such as 5136. The second cap portion 5133 includes a side portion having a snap fit portion configured to engage a dent in the first cap portion 5134 . The second cap portion 5133 includes railings. The railings may extend along the entire second cab portion or may extend only to a portion of the second cab portion. The second cap portion 5133 is configured to mate with the first portion 5134 as shown in FIG. 51A . The interior 5132 of the framing cap may contain cables and/or devices (e.g., sensors, emitters, controllers, circuitry (e.g., circuit boards), and/or other electrical components). The railing sides may have any length less than the width of the framing cap. The width of the framing cap can be equal to or greater than the width of an existing framing such as the 5136. The width of the railings can be configured to accommodate wires. The length of the railings can be configured to hold the wire in place. The length of the opening to the railing cavity can be configured to allow wires to pass through. The housing 5135 is disposed partly inside the framing cap 5132 and partly flush with the outer surface of the framing cap portion 5133. The framing cap is part of the framing system and is placed adjacent to the framing portion 5136 (eg, mullion or transom). Intermediate body 5131 is disposed between framing portion 5136 and framing cap (including 5133 and 5134). The intermediate body includes framing portion 5136 and (i) framing caps (including 5133 and 5134), (iii) inside framing cap 5132, (iii) housing 5135, (iv) within housing 5135. any device, or (v) any combination thereof (eg, any combination of (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv)). For example, solar radiation 5135 can illuminate framing 5136 that is exposed to the surrounding exterior environment of the facility, and such solar radiation can illuminate framing 5136 (eg, and optionally also interior 5130 of framing). can be heated. The intermediate body 5131 is formed from the framing portion 5136 by (i) the framing cap (including 5133 and 5134), (iii) the interior of the framing cap 5132, (iii) the housing 5135, (iv) the housing ( 5135), or (v) any combination thereof. The intermediate body can passively or actively reduce heat transfer. The intermediate body may reduce heat transfer by cooling and/or by insulating.

51B shows an example of a frame or framing cap portion shown in a perspective view and head conditioning. Portion 5150 is a framing cap or framing portion (eg, mullion or transom) as part of a framing system. The frame or framing cap portion 5150 is configured to receive a housing 5160 containing one or more devices (eg, an ensemble of devices). The frame or framing cap portion 5150 includes one end portion 5151 along the length of the frame or framing cap portion 5150, and a second end portion 5152 opposite the end portion 5151. Frame or framing cap portion 5150 includes a first region 5153 proximate a first end 5151 and a second region 5152 proximate a second end 5152 . First area 5153 shows perforations (holes) 5155 located on frame or framing cap portion 5150 . Second area 5154 shows perforations (holes) 5156 located on frame or framing cap portion 5150 . The frame or framing cap portion 5150 includes a third area 5158 surrounding the housing 5160 and perforations 5157a, 5157b, 5157c, 5157d in the third area. The perforations (eg holes) may be an array. Perforations may be grouped into groups such as 5155, 5157a/b/c/d, or 5156. The perforations within a group may be organized or disorganized (eg randomly located). The perforations may be arranged as a repeating grid (eg matrix). Perforations may be placed on any side of the frame or framing cap portion 5150. In the example shown in FIG. 51B , groups of perforations are disposed on the sides of the frame or framing cap portion 5150 . One or more groups of perforations may be located anywhere along the frame or framing cap portion. 51B shows an example of a group of perforations positioned close to the end of a frame or framing cap portion 5150 and a housing 5160, which housing is disposed within the frame or framing cap portion 5150, and the frame or framing cap portion 5150. It is coplanar with the outer surface of 5150. The housing may be partially or entirely within the frame or framing cap portion. The housing may be partially or entirely outside the frame or framing cap portion. When the housing is disposed entirely outside the frame or framing cap portion, it may be attached to the frame or framing cap portion. The frame or framing cap portion may be positioned horizontally or vertically about a center of gravity such as 5170. 51B shows an example in which the frame or framing cap portion 5150 is disposed along a gravity vector 5157 pointing to a center of gravity 5170. When the frame or framing cap portion 5150 experiences heat above ambient temperature within its interior, heat exchange may be initiated. For example, gas (eg, air) can move upward in a direction opposite the gravity vector 5171, from the second end 5152 toward the first end 5152 . Gas (eg, air) can escape any of the perforations it encounters along its travel path within the frame or framing cap portion 5150 . A gas (eg, air) may be drawn into the interior of the frame or framing cap portion 5150, such as during cooling and/or heat exchange. For example, gas may enter through a perforation (eg, 5156). Gas may preferentially enter one group of perforations (eg, 5156) and exit another group of perforations (eg, 5155), creating, for example, convective heat exchange. Heat may be generated from one or more devices within the housing, such as during operation of the device. Heat can escape, for example, through perforations adjacent to the housing.

In some embodiments, the network infrastructure is configured to be operably coupled to one or more chargers (eg, an array of them). The charger may be placed inside the frame or framing cap portion. The charger does not require him to wire into the device he is charging (eg, a mobile phone, pad, laptop, tag (eg, and ID tag), or any other charge-demanding device, such as one containing a temporary processor). It can be a wireless charger in that it does not. The charging device can electrically charge the temporary circuit part. A charging device may be placed within a transom (also known as a "horizontal mullion"). A charging device may be operatively (eg, electronically) coupled to a network (eg, a local network of a facility) and disposed within any physical property configured to facilitate wireless charging, such as on at least one of its surfaces. can A charging device may include electromagnetic induction charging for temporary circuitry (eg, a mobile device). In some embodiments, the transient circuitry (eg, mobile device) to be wirelessly charged is configured for (eg, enables) wireless charging. Wireless charging may or may not require contact between the charging device and the device being charged. The wireless charging device does not require the connection of electrical wires between the charging device and the device to be charged (eg, mobile circuitry). Wireless charging may facilitate interaction of facility occupants with fixtures and/or real assets (eg, furniture) of the facility. Charging stations may be installed as part of a network, for example during construction of a facility. If the facility's local network is the initial network installed within the facility, the facility may be opened to occupants with such wireless charging devices on the first day of its opening. The use of charging stations reduces the number of required outlets within a facility and/or free outlets for use other than charging mobile devices, thereby potentially increasing the aesthetics of facility fixtures and allowing for more design flexibility within the facility; Increased use of fixtures and/or physical assets in the facility. Infrastructure installed within a building (eg, including framing systems and networks) may include wireless charging stations (eg, as part of a framing system or not). In using wireless charging stations in facilities, (a) developers can provide state-of-the-art buildings with mobile device wireless charging integrated into the building from day one in convenient, unobtrusive locations, and/or (b) occupants can ( For example, he will have more and/or easier access locations to charge his mobile device (without wires getting in the way and/or taking up much-needed outlets). Developers may want to create connected spaces that are built in response to occupant requests to increasingly use mobile devices and/or to allow for seamless and easy charging. Wireless charging may require the user to place the mobile device on a wireless charging station without further ado.

In some embodiments, real assets and/or fixtures (eg, framing portions such as transoms) may include materials that facilitate wireless charging therethrough. For example, materials that facilitate (eg, do not block or reduce blocking of) electromagnetic fields. When the real asset and/or fixture is made of a material with reduced ability to facilitate wireless charging, the real asset and/or fixture may have a portion having a material that facilitates wireless charging. For example, a transom made of metal (eg, aluminum) may have a portion (eg, a blocking portion) made of a material that facilitates wireless charging (eg, a non-metallic material). The material may constitute an electrical blocking region configured to facilitate wireless charging (eg, electromagnetic induction) technology. For example, the tangible asset and/or fixture may have at least one portion of material that is configured to reduce blocking (eg, does not block) electromagnetic fields from penetrating from the charging device to the device being charged.

In some embodiments, the wireless charging station is within a framing portion that supports one or more display components. For example, when a user views media projected by a display configuration, the user can place his or her mobile device on the transom (eg, near a wireless charging device) while viewing the media, and the user's mobile device can then It can be charged for an hour (eg, without interruption). Wireless charging may require placing the mobile device adjacent to (eg, above, below, or next to) the charging device.

52 shows an example of a charging station embedded within a fixture of a facility. A display construction 5231 (also labeled #1) is placed within a framing system having a mullion 5230 and a transom 5232. The framing station maintains display elements 5231 and windows such as 5222 and 5232. Transom 5232 includes a charging device within it in area 5250, which charging device is coupled to a network (eg, the same network to which display component 5231 is coupled). Transom 5232 includes a wireless charging station external to transom 5232, in area 5250. The area of the charging station may extend beyond 5250, depending on, for example, the charging capability (eg, range) of the wireless charging device. A user viewing media displayed by the display component 5231, while viewing the displayed media, places a device to be charged (e.g., a mobile device) on the transom, whereby (e.g., the device to be charged is wirelessly charged). (if configured for) can allow uninterrupted charging of the device to be charged. A device to be charged can be wirelessly charged regardless of the user using the display composition. At least one of the windows (eg, 5222, 5223) may or may not be a tintable window. At least one of the windows (eg, 5222, 5223) may or may not be a smart window, such as an electrochromic window.

In some embodiments, the local network is operatively coupled to the wireless charging device. Wireless charging can include inductive charging. Wireless charging may be cordless charging. Wireless charging may facilitate contactless (eg, cordless) charging between a charging device and the device being charged. For example, wireless charging may not require electrical contact with the charging device or any intermediate thereto (eg, docking station or plug). Wireless charging can facilitate the wireless transfer of electrical power. Wireless charging may use electromagnetic induction to provide electricity to a device to be charged, such as a portable (eg, temporary) device. A temporary device may include a vehicle, power tool, electric dental equipment (eg toothbrush), or any other medical device. A portable device may or may not require precise alignment with a charging device (eg, a charging pad). Wireless charging can transfer energy through inductive coupling. Wireless charging can include passing an alternating current through an induction coil within a charging device (eg, a charging pad). Wireless charging can include generating a magnetic field. The magnetic field can fluctuate in strength (eg, when the amplitude of the alternating current is fluctuating). This changing magnetic field can create an alternating current in an induction coil of a portable device (eg, mobile device). Alternating current in the induction coil may be passed through a rectifier, for example to convert it to direct current. Direct current can charge batteries and/or provide operating power for portable devices (eg, temporary circuitry).

In some embodiments, a wireless charging device (eg, also used herein as a wireless charging or inductive charger) uses resonant inductive coupling. The charging device may include, for example, a capacitor for (eg, for each of) one or more induction coils. The addition of capacitors can create two low current circuits with (eg, specific) resonant frequencies. The frequency of the alternating current may be matched to the resonant frequency. The frequency may be selected according to the distance required for peak efficiency, for example. For example, according to the distance between the charging device and the devices to be charged in a given batch. Depending on, for example, the material(s) disposed between the charging device and the specified arrangement of devices to be charged. The charging device may include a movable transmitting coil. The charging device and/or the device to be charged may include a receiver coil such as silver plated copper or aluminum (eg, to minimize weight and/or reduce resistance such as due to skin effect).

In some embodiments, the wireless charging device is a high power charging device. In some embodiments, the wireless charging device is a low power charging device. A low power charging device may be configured to charge small electronic devices such as cell phones, handheld devices, computers (eg laptops). The low power charging device may be configured to charge at a power level of up to about 50 Watts (W), 100 W, 150 W, 200 W, 250 W, 300 W, 350 W, 400 W, 450 W, or 500 W. The low power charging device may be configured to charge at a power level between any of the foregoing power levels (e.g., between about 50 W and about 100 W, between about 100 W and about 500 W, or between about 50 W and about 500 W). can The high power charging device may be configured to charge at a power level of at least about 700 W, 1 kilowatt (KW), 10 KW, 11 KW, 100 KW, 200 KW, 300 KW, or 500 KW. The high power charging device may be configured to charge at a power level between any of the foregoing power levels (e.g., between about 700 W and about 500 KW, between about 700 W and about 10 KW, or between about 1 KW and about 500 KW). can

In some embodiments, wireless charging stations may offer advantages over wired charging stations. For example, in wireless charging, the risk of electrical faults such as those due to corrosion, electrocution, and tangled wires is lower. In wireless charging, for example, there is no wear and tear damage to electrical connectors, sockets and/or wiring, since no wiring and connections are required, for example, between the charging device and the device to be charged. For example, wireless charging provides increased ease of use and/or facility aesthetics. For example, wireless charging provides convenient frequent charging. Wireless charging may allow for dynamic charging (eg, depending on the capacity of the charging device), such as charging a mobile device while it is in motion. When a medical device is intended to be charged, wireless charging can reduce the risk of infection by, for example, eliminating the requirement to connect to electrical outlets and/or wiring used by multiple users. The charging rate may be of a 1, 2 or 3 wireless power transfer (WPT) class, for example, as defined by the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) International. Wireless charging is possible at up to approximately 1 centimeter (cm), 2 cm, 4 cm, 5 cm, 8 cm, 10 cm, 25 cm, 50 cm, 75 cm, 100 cm, 250 cm, 500 cm, 750 cm, It can be done at a distance of 900 cm, or 1000 cm. Wireless charging can be performed at a distance from the charging device between any of the foregoing values (e.g., between about 1 cm and about 10 cm, between about 1 cm and about 50 cm, between about 1 cm and about 100 cm, or between about 1 cm and about 1 cm). 1000 cm). Wireless charging can occur at a distance of up to about 1 inch ("), 1.5", 1.6, 6" or 12" from the charging device. Wireless charging can occur at a distance from the charging device between any of the above values (eg, about 1" to about 12"). Wireless charging can occur up to about 5 feet ('), 10', 20', 30', 40' or 50' from the charging device. Wireless charging may occur at a distance from the charging device between any of the above values (eg, about 5' to about 50').

In some embodiments, the charging device may conform to at least one standard (eg, protocol) accepted by the jurisdiction. Standards may include Qi or Power Matter Alliance (PMA) standards. Standards may include J1773 (Mange charge), SAE J2954, AirFuel Alliance, Alliance for Wireless Power (A4WP, or Rezence), or ISO 15118 standards. Standards may define frequencies and/or connection protocols. The charging device may be configured to comply with multiple (eg, all) standards accepted by the jurisdiction. The standard may be an open interface standard. The standard may be a wireless power transmission standard. The standard may be a Wireless Power Consortium standard. The standard may be an Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers standard. The standard may be an AirFuel alliance standard (eg, combining A4WP and PMA). The standard may be a road vehicle standard.

In some embodiments, the charging device is operatively coupled to the facility's network and/or control system. The charging device may be controlled by a control system. For example, the control system can schedule turning the charging device off or on. The control system may control the operating mode of the charging device. The control system may be integrated with or separate from the facility's control system. The charging device may additionally or alternatively be controlled manually (eg by the user), eg via an application module. The application module of the charging device may include a graphical user interface (GUI). An application module may be configured to receive user input. The application module may be configured for installation of a device to be charged. The application module may be configured for installation on devices coupled to the facility's network. The charging device may be discoverable by the network. The network may be operatively (eg, communicatively) coupled to the facility's Building Information Modeling (BIM) (eg, Revit files). The location and/or status of the charging device(s) coupled to the network may be updated (eg, intermittently or in real time) with the network, such as a BIM file. The application module may indicate the location, operating mode and/or state of the charging device. The GUI may indicate the location, operating mode and/or status of the charging device in the facility's BIM file. The GUI may indicate the location of the user and/or device to be charged, which location is relative to the facility (eg, in an enclosure such as a room in the facility), such as a description in a BIM file. The GUI may show a simpler version (eg, with a lower level of detail, such as the selected level of detail) than the details available in the BIM file. For example, an application module may show a facility's fixtures and selected devices (eg, charging devices and media displays).

In some embodiments, one or more circuit boards are disposed within one or more housings (eg, (E)-boxes), eg, to provide control and/or functionality to one or more display components. For example, one or more controllers disposed within one or more housings (eg, (E)-boxes) provide control and/or functionality to one or more display components. The housing may include any other function (eg, associated with a display component) that dissipates heat during its operation. In some embodiments, a housing (eg, compartment), circuitry, electronics, and/or display controller may be arranged to provide heat removal from the housing (thermal coupling). The housing may include a cover portion secured to the mounting portion. The housing may be disposed within a portion of the window frame and/or adjacent to other structures and/or fixtures outside the window frame. The housing (eg, of the E-box) may include an analog-to-digital converter circuit board (eg, 3205 in FIG. 32 ) that may be mounted to one or both of a cover portion and a mounting portion. The circuit board may include terminals for connection to a power supply (eg, an AC or DC electricity source) via a cable that provides electrical power to the housing (eg, of the E-box). The circuit board may include at least one data input connector(s) (eg, DisplayPort, HDMI, Ethernet or other type of connector for data transmission), which may receive data for display on an associated display configuration. at least one connector(s) (e.g., for content management system (CMS) data transmission (e.g., a DisplayPort , HDMI), Ethernet or other type of connector for data transmission). The housing (eg, of the E-box) can include a controller board (eg, 3210 in FIG. 32 ) that can be operably engaged with the circuit board. The controller board may include connectors connected to cabling that may be connected to display components. Cabling can transmit data between circuitry within the housing and any associated device, such as a display component. Circuitry within the housing may be operatively coupled (eg, wirelessly and/or wired) to a network that is coupled to at least one controller (eg, of a control system) that controls the facility or any controllable device in the facility. The circuitry and/or housing (eg E-box) may have a unique network identifier (ID) for communication with, for example, at least one controller controlling the facility.

In some embodiments, the housing encloses at least one circuit board. A circuit board may be configured to accept (eg, and to receive) one or more devices. The board may have two sides on which circuitry and/or devices are placed. The board can have first device(s) disposed on the first side, and circuitry disposed on the second side. The board can have a first device(s) disposed on a first side, and a second device(s) disposed on a second side. The board may include or be operatively coupled to (eg, via a housing) one or more temperature regulating elements, such as heat sinks. Temperature regulating elements, such as heat sink(s), may be placed in locations vulnerable to heat generation and/or accumulation. The board may include and/or be operably coupled to the bulkhead(s). The partition(s) can be used to reduce undesirable consequences of device coexistence within the housing and/or on the board (eg, interference). The housing may contain one or more circuit boards. The circuit boards may be communicatively coupled to each other (eg, directly or indirectly). The circuit boards may be operatively (eg, communicatively) coupled to each other by wiring and/or wirelessly. The circuit board may be operatively (eg, communicatively) coupled to a network by wire and/or wirelessly. In some embodiments, at least two of the plurality of circuit boards may be positioned in a manner that facilitates shielding, heat exchanging and/or cooling elements.

In some embodiments, a temperature control element (such as a heat sink) can act as a heat exchanger. The housing may be operably coupled (eg, mechanically coupled) to a temperature regulating element, which may include a heat exchanger and/or heat spreader (eg, cooler) separate from the housing. The heat exchanger and/or heat dissipation (eg, cooling) element may include a heat pipe, or metal slab. Metals may include elemental metals or metal alloys. The metal may be configured for (eg, efficient and/or rapid) conduction of heat. The metal may include copper, aluminum, brass, steel or bronze. The heat dissipation (eg cooling) element may include a fluid, gas or semi-solid (eg gel) material. Heat dissipation (eg, cooling) elements may be active and/or passive. The heat dissipation (eg, cooling) element may include a circulating material. A heat dissipation (eg, cooling) element may be operatively coupled to an active cooling device (eg, a thermostat, chiller, and/or refrigerator). The active cooling device may be disposed outside the device ensemble housing. The heat dissipation (eg, cooling) element may be disposed within or attached to a fixture (eg, floor, ceiling, or wall) of an enclosure (eg, building or room) in which the housing is disposed. Fixtures may include mullions or transoms. The circuitry may have an operating temperature range from about -80°C, -40°C or -20°C to about 50°C, 100°C, 150°C or 200°C.

In some embodiments, one or more housings of one or more circuitry (such as those of an E-box) may be positioned adjacent to and/or mounted to one or more heat sinks. One or more circuitry disposed within a housing (eg, compartment) can be operatively coupled to one or more heat sinks. The operably coupled includes coupling to facilitate dissipation of heat from the circuitry and/or its housing to the heat sink. An operative linkage includes a mechanical linkage such as a linkage. Coupling of the heat sink(s) to the housing(s) may be via coupling means including thermally conductive tape, wire clips (eg Z-clips), push pins and/or threaded fasteners. The heat sink(s) can transfer heat from one or more housings and/or one or more circuitry. The heat sink(s) can transfer heat by conduction, convection and/or radiation. The heat sink(s) can passively and/or actively transfer heat. The heat sink(s) may include heat pipes, slabs and/or meshes. One or more of the heat sinks may include thermally conductive plates and/or fins. The thermally conductive plate and/or fin feature may have a surface roughness (eg, having a roughness average (Ra) value) that helps maximize heat transfer from one or more housings and/or one or more circuitry. The lower the Ra value, the more contact there is between the thermal skin surface and the contact housing surface, which can facilitate greater heat dissipation between the two. The thermally conductive plate may be made of elemental metals and/or metal alloys. The fins may be made of elemental metals and/or metal alloys. The elemental metal and/or metal alloy has (i) a thermal conductivity of aluminum or aluminum alloy (e.g., from about 166 Watts/(meter*Kelvin) (W/(m*K)) to about 229 W/(m*K). with) and/or (ii) copper (eg, with a thermal conductivity of about 400 W/(m*K)). The thermal throttling element (eg, heat sink) is at least about 0.5 W/(m*K), 0.5 W/(m*K), 1.0 W/(m*K), 10 W/(m*K), 50 W /(m*K), 100 W/(m*K), 150 W/(m*K), 200 W/(m*K), 250 W/(m*K), 300 W/(m*K) ), 350 W/(m*K), 400 W/(m*K), 450 W/(m*K), or 500 W/(m*K). The thermal regulating element (eg, heat sink) has a thermal conductivity between any of the foregoing values (eg, about 0.5 W/(m*K) to about 500 W/(m*K), about 0.5 W/(m *K) to about 10 W/(m*K), about 1.0 W/(m*K) to about 200 W/(m*K), or about 150 W/(m*K) to about 500 W/( m*K)). The fin features may be substantially straight elongated and/or flared. The fin feature may include curvature. One or more of the fin features may include a continuum (eg, continuous solid) and/or a cross cut. One or more of the fin features may be discontinuous (eg, may include needles). The thermally conductive plate may be disposed adjacent to and/or in contact with a portion of the housing(s) of the circuitry(s) (eg, of one or more E-boxes). The fins may extend from the thermally conductive plate in a direction opposite to a surface of the thermally conductive plate adjacent to and/or in contact with a portion of the housing of one or more E-boxes. A thermally conductive plate may be spaced from the housing of one or more E-boxes. A first end of the finned feature may extend from the thermally conductive plate in a direction towards a portion of the housing of one or more E-boxes, with an opposite second end of the finned feature adjacent to a portion of the housing of one or more E-boxes. and/or disposed in contact therewith (eg, inverted fin features).

One or more of the heat sinks may be mounted to a facility structure and/or fixture. Structures and/or fixtures may include walls, framing parts, doors, windows, floors, ceilings, rails, shelves, lights, or piers. The one or more heat sinks are subject to removal (e.g., using a fastening agent that may include tape, wire clips, push pins, nails, screws, snaps, and/or threaded fasteners) of the one or more heat sinks from the facility. It may be mounted to a facility's structure and/or fixture in a manner that permits ease of use. One or more housings and/or heat sink(s) may be mounted to one or more mounting features (eg, mounting brackets) that may be mounted to structures and/or fixtures in a facility. The one or more housings may be operably coupled to the one or more heat sinks in a manner that allows each separation of the one or more housings from the one or more heat sinks. Separation can include separation from the fastening agent (eg, disengagement). One or more housings and/or heat sink(s) may be mounted within the window framing (eg, and adjacent to one or more display components). One or more housings and/or heat sink(s) may be mounted to fixtures and/or structures of the facility that are separate from the window framing. Structures and/or fixtures of a facility in which one or more housings and/or heat sink(s) may be disposed may include walls, cabinets, and/or other cavities. The heat sink(s) are operably coupled to an active cooling mechanism (eg, an active cooler) that actively absorbs heat from the heat sink(s) and/or actively causes heat exchange (eg, by convection). It can be. An active cooler may include air flowing through one or more heat sinks, a liquid, or a semi-solid (eg, gel) made of a thermally conductive material (eg, including water). One or more blowers (eg, fans) may be disposed adjacent to one or more circuitry, housings and/or heat sinks and generate flow (eg, air) through and/or past the heat sink(s). may be operable to do so. The blower(s) (eg, fan) may be controlled by a controller. The controller may be part of, or operably coupled to, the facility's control system. The controller may be disposed within one or more of the housings (eg E-boxes). The blower(s) may be operatively coupled to the facility's network. The blower may include any of the fans disclosed herein.

53 may include electronics (e.g., 3205 and/or 3210 in FIG. 32) for controlling other devices in the facility (e.g., display controllers for display components (e.g., 2325a-2325d in FIG. 23)). Shows an example of a housing (e.g., E-box) 5302. The housing 5302 includes a cover portion 5304 that is secured to a mounting portion 5306 mounted to an electronic device therein. Housing (eg, compartment) 5302 includes connectors (terminals) 5308 configured to provide power to circuitry compartmentalized within housing 5302, to and/or from a network, to and/or from one or more display components. , and one or more data connectors 5310 that can transmit data to and/or from other circuitry (eg, another E-box).

53 shows an example of a heat sink assembly 5320 that can be provided as a kit separate from the housing 5302, which removes heat from the housing 5302 containing the circuitry(s). to provide. The heat sink assembly 5320 includes a heat sink portion 5322 that includes a thermally conductive plate 5324 and thermally conductive fins 5326 . Heat sink portion 5322 may include (eg, be formed from) a thermally conductive material such as elemental metal and/or metal alloy. Heat sink portion 5322 is secured (eg, via plate 5324 ) to at least one of cover portion 5304 and mounting portion 5306 . Fins 5326 extend from plate 5324 in a spaced arrangement to provide heat dissipation from fins 5326. Heat sink assembly 5320 includes heat sink mounting brackets 5328a and 5328b. Mounting brackets 5328a and 5328b are secured to heat sink portion 5322 (eg, via fasteners 5330). Mounting brackets 5328a and 5328b may be secured (eg, via fasteners 5332) to structures and/or fixtures in the facility. The heat sink assembly 5320 can include a blower (eg, a fan) mounted adjacent to the heat sink portion 5322 configured to create an airflow through the heat sink portion 5322 . The blower can be operably coupled to the housing 5302 (eg, via power cable 5336) such that electronics in the housing 5302 can controllably (eg, selectively) operate the blower. Although such a blower is not integrated in the example shown in FIG. 53, it may be incorporated in other embodiments of such a housing. The blower can be arranged in such a way that it will facilitate blowing gas (eg, air) through the fins (eg, 5326) and/or across the heat sink plate (eg, 5324).

54 shows an example of a circuitry housing (eg, E-box) 5402 mounted on a heat sink assembly 5420. Various types of cabling (e.g., power cabling 5436, cabling 5438 to circuitry (e.g., other E-boxes), and cabling 5440 to devices such as display components) may be incorporated into the housing. Can be connected to circuitry in 5402. The heat sink assembly 5420 includes a heat sink portion 5422 that includes a thermally conductive plate 5424 and a thermally conductive finned portion 5426 . Heat sink portion 5422 may be secured to housing 5402 . The heat sink assembly 5420 includes one or more heat sink mounting brackets 5428, wherein the brackets 5428 are secured to the heat sink portion 5422 and to the structure 5429 (and/or fixtures) of the facility.

In some embodiments, the media display configuration may include or be operatively coupled to a security screen (eg, security film). A security screen may allow directional viewing of projected media. A security screen can prevent viewing of the projected media from angles outside the viewing angle. For example, a directional screen may allow viewing by an observer positioned directly in front of the projection side of the display composition (eg, at an angle of zero from the display composition) and prevent viewing by an observer positioned at an angle greater than zero. can do. For example, an angle of at least about 10 degrees (“°”), 15°, 20°, 25°, 30°, 35°, 40°, 45°, 50°, 55°, 60° from the projection side of the display composition. When positioned at 90°, 65°, 70°, 75°, 80°, 85°, or 90°, the viewer cannot see the media projected by the display composition. When the viewer is positioned at any angle between the foregoing angles from the projection side of the display composition (e.g., between about 10° and about 90°, or between about 45° and about 90°), the viewer sees the projected view by the display composition. Can't see media. The security screen may include at least one polarizer.

In some embodiments, a first transparent or translucent polarizer (eg, a polarizing film) is connected to an emitting entity (eg, an organic light emitting diode (OLED) and/or a transparent OLED (TOLED)) of a media display and an applied (intended) viewer ( s) may be positioned (eg, positioned) between the locations where the projected media may be present to view the projected media from the media display. The media display may be located on or within an exterior wall (eg, window or transparent door) of the facility or coupled to or within it. Being bonded to may include being attached to. The media display may be located within a facility (eg conference room, office, cubical with part height walls). The media display may be attached to a facility (eg, a fixture of the facility). The media display may be easily movable, such as in a facility. The first polarizer can be supported in front of the screen, mounted to the screen of the media display, and/or mounted to the bezel of the media display, such that light emitted from the screen will pass through the first polarizer (eg, in filtered form). can The first polarizer, as part of the display construction, may be disposed, for example, between an emitting entity (eg, a matrix of TOLEDs) and an outer panel of the display construction (eg, one of the laminates, such as a glass window). The media display may be one of the different types of media displays that generally do not project polarized light from its screen (eg, OLED, TOLED), allowing polarized light through the first polarizer. Such polarized light, and thus the media (eg, multimedia) emitted from the media display, can be seen by the observer(s) viewing the screen of the media display. These observer(s) may be within the enclosure in which the media display is placed, or outside the enclosure, and via a medium allowing such viewing. For example, an observer(s) outside an enclosure (eg, room) may view the media through a glass wall, transparent window, or open door. The observer(s) outside the enclosure may include intended or unintended observers. The media may include a transparent barrier rib.

In some embodiments, a second transparent or translucent polarizer (e.g., a polarizing film) is provided (i) at a location where an applied (intended) viewer may be present to view the projected media from the media display and a location where an unapproved viewer may be present to view the media projected from the media display. (ii) such that (ii) the polarization of the second polarizer cancels out the light passing through the first polarizer (e.g., an unaided observer(s) viewing the light emitted from the media display). may be oriented to block A second polarizer, when positioned and/or oriented to block light passing through the first polarizer from passing through the second polarizer, may be referred to herein as a canceling polarizer. Without wishing to be bound by theory, the first polarizer can allow polarized light having a first polarization to pass through; The first polarizer can allow polarized light having a first polarization having a polarization angle perpendicular to the first polarization to pass through. For example, a first polarizer may allow only horizontally polarized light to travel therethrough, while a second polarizer may allow only vertically polarized light to travel therethrough. A second polarizer (cancellation polarizer) is disposed adjacent to a transparent partition (e.g., a window, transparent wall, and/or transparent door) through which an unauthorized observer may view media emitted from the media display in an attempt to view it; may be, or may be operatively coupled to, and/or may be within and/or on it. The transparent bulkhead may be part of the outer wall of the facility. The transparent bulkhead may be part of an internal fixture of the facility, such as an inner wall of the facility. The transparent barrier rib may be at least partially transparent to visible light. The transparent septum may comprise at least one material that is at least partially transparent to visible light, such as comprising glass or a transparent polymer. Transparent polymers include plastics (e.g. polycarbonate plastics), poly methyl methacrylate (PMMA or acrylic), polyethylene terephthalate (PET), amorphous copolyester (PETG), polyvinyl chloride (PVC), liquid silicone rubber (LSR) ) liquid silicone rubber (LSR), cyclic olefin copolymer, polyethylene (PE), ionomer resin, transparent polypropylene (PP), fluorinated ethylene propylene (FEP), styrene methyl methacrylate (SMMA), styrene acrylonitrile resin ( SAN), polystyrene (general purpose - GPPS), or methyl methacrylate acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (MABS).

55 shows an example facility 5500 having an exterior wall 5505 and an interior partition 5510 (eg, windows, transparent walls, and/or transparent doors). Exterior wall 5505 has transparent portions (eg, windows, transparent doors) 5515 . A media display 5525 is placed within the facility 5500, with a screen (a light-emitting entity such as an OLED/TOLED) emitting light in the direction indicated by arrow 5527. A first polarizer (eg, polarizing film) 5530 is positioned in front of the media display 5525 to allow visible light emitted from the media display 5525 to pass through the first polarizer 5530 . The first polarizer 5530 is mounted to the screen and/or bezel of the media display 5525. An observer (e.g., an authorized and/or intended observer) 5535 positioned within enclosure 5531 of facility 5500 and in the direction in which visible light (as part of radiation 5527) is being emitted from the media display is You can view the media emitted from the display 5525 (polarized visible light as part of 5527). In FIG. 55 , visible light emitted from media display 5525 is directed toward (e.g., he potentially sees) a second observer (unauthorized observer) 5545, e.g., as viewed through transparent portion 5515. can) be noted. A second polarizer (e.g., a polarizing film, such as a canceling polarizer for the first polarizer) 5540 is placed adjacent to the transparent portion 5515, and the polarized light coming out of the first polarizer 5530 is passed through the second polarizer 5540. ) is oriented to cancel (e.g., block) passing through. Thus, a second (unauthorized) viewer 5545 is prevented (eg, prevented) from viewing the media coming from the media display 5525 .

55 shows an example of a facility 5550 having an exterior wall 5555 and an interior partition 5560 (eg, windows, transparent wall portions, and/or transparent doors). The inner bulkhead 5560 has a transparent portion (eg, window, transparent door, transparent wall portion) 5570 . A media display 5575 is placed within the facility 5550, with a screen (a light emitting entity such as an OLED/TOLED) emitting radiation (eg, light) in the direction indicated by arrow 5575. A media display 5575 is placed close to the outer wall 5555. Media display 5575 is part of or mounted to outer wall 5555 . In some embodiments, the display construction may be part of or mounted to an exterior window of, for example, an exterior wall. A first polarizer (eg, polarizing film) 5580 is positioned in front of the media display 5575 to allow visible light emitted from the media display 5575 to pass through the first polarizer 5580 . The first polarizer 5580 is mounted to the screen and/or bezel of the media display 5575 or is a layer within the display configuration. In the display composition, include as part of the display composition. An observer (e.g., an authorized and/or intended observer) 5585 positioned in the direction in which visible light (as part of radiation 5577) is being emitted from the media display may have a negative impact on the media (polarized light) emitted from the media display 5575. visible light). In FIG. 55 , visible light emitted from media display 5575 is directed toward a second observer (eg, and unintended and/or unapproved observer) 5595 as viewed through transparent portion 5570 . It will be noted that there is (i.e. he can potentially see). A second polarizer 5590 (e.g., a polarizing film such as a canceling polarizer for the first polarizer 5580) is disposed adjacent to the transparent portion 5570, and the polarized light exiting the first polarizer 5580 is directed toward the second polarizer. It is oriented to attenuate (eg, reduce or block) passing through polarizer 5590. Thus, the second viewer 5595 is prevented (eg, prevented) from viewing the media coming from the media display 5575.

56 shows an example of a facility 5600 having enclosing walls and/or partitions 5602 and an enclosure 5601 . The wall 5602 includes a first transparent portion (eg, window, or transparent door) 5604, a second transparent portion (eg, window, transparent door, or transparent wall portion) 5606, and a third transparent portion 5607. ) has A media display 5608 is placed within enclosure 5601 of facility 5600, with a screen (light emitting entity such as an OLED/TOLED) emitting light in the direction indicated by arrow 5610. A first polarizer (eg, polarizing film) 5612 is positioned in front of the media display 5608 to allow visible light emitted from the media display 5608 to pass through the first polarizer 5612 . The first polarizer 5612 can be mounted to the screen and/or bezel of the media display 5608. An observer (ie, an authorized/intended observer) 5614 positioned in the direction in which visible light is being emitted from the media display 5608 can see the media (polarized visible light) emitted from the media display 5608 . In FIG. 56 , emitted (eg, visible) light from the media display 5608 catches a second observer (eg, an unlicensed observer) 5616 when an observer 5615 looks through the transparent portion 5604. It will be noted that he is in the direction he is facing (i.e. he can potentially see). A second polarizer (polarizing film (offsetting polarizer)) 5618 is placed adjacent to the transparent portion 5604 to reduce polarized light exiting the first polarizer 5612 from passing through the second polarizer 5618 ( eg attenuated, eg blocked) and/or otherwise configured. A second polarizer 5618 can be placed on the movable frame to allow for easy repositioning based on the current position and orientation of the media display 5608. Thus, a second (unauthorized) viewer 5616 is prevented from (eg, clearly) viewing the media coming from the media display 5608 . In the example shown in FIG. 56 , a second (eg, canceling) polarizer is disposed within enclosure 5601 adjacent to the side of transparent portion 5604 that is exposed to the internal environment of enclosure 5601 . However, the second polarizer can be placed outside the enclosure 5601 adjacent to the outer side of the transparent portion 5604 facing away from the interior of the enclosure 5601. A second polarizer may be disposed within the transparent portion. For example, when the transparent portion is an insulated glass unit (IGU) (eg, 1400 in FIG. 14A), the polarizer may be disposed within the IGU. Referring to FIG. 14A , the second polarizer can be placed inside the IGU on either the S3 or S2 surfaces. The second polarizer may be placed outside the IGU, for example on either the S4 or S1 surfaces. A polarizer film may be disposed between the glass and the optically switchable (eg, electrochromic) member. A polarizer film may be disposed on the exposed surface of the optically switchable (eg, electrochromic) construct. When the transparent portion is a laminate, the polarizer may be disposed as part of the laminate (eg, within any of the layers of the laminate).

56 shows an example of a facility 5630 having walls and/or partitions 5632 forming an enclosure 5631 with an internal environment. Wall 5632 has a first transparent portion 5634 , a second transparent portion 5636 and a third transparent portion 5637 . At least one of the transparent portions may be of a different type than at least one other transparent portion of the transparent portions. At least one of the transparent portions may be of the same type as at least one other transparent portion of the transparent portions. The type of transparent part may include a door, window, or wall part. A media display 5638 is placed within an enclosure 5631 of a facility 5630, with a screen (light emitting entity such as an OLED/TOLED) emitting light in the direction indicated by arrow 5640. A first polarizer (eg, polarizing film) 5642 is positioned in front of the media display 5638 to allow (eg, visible) light emitted from the media display 5638 to pass through the first polarizer 5642 . The first polarizer 5642 can be mounted to the screen and/or bezel of the media display 5638. The first polarizer may be part of a media display composition (eg, laminate). An observer (i.e., an authorized and/or intended observer) 5644 positioned in the direction in which visible light is being emitted from a media display 5638 disposed within the enclosure 5631 is directed toward the media (polarized light) emitted from the media display 5638. visible light) can be seen. 56, the visible light emitted from the media display 5638, as viewed through the transparent portion 5636, is directed toward a second observer (e.g., an unlicensed observer) 5646 disposed outside the enclosure 5631. (eg, and that he can potentially see). A second polarizer (polarizing film (offsetting polarizer)) 5648 is disposed adjacent to the transparent portion 5636 and blocks polarized light exiting the first polarizer 5642 from passing through the second polarizer 5648. Oriented. A second polarizer 5648 can be disposed on the movable frame to allow repositioning based at least in part on the current position and orientation of the media display 5638. Thus, a second (unauthorized) viewer 5646 is prevented (eg, prevented) from (eg, clearly) viewing the media coming from the media display 5638. The first and/or second polarizer film may be stationary or movable. The movable polarizer film may be movable horizontally and/or vertically. A polarizer film may be placed on a roller. The movable polarizer film may be moved manually and/or automatically (eg, using an actuator). The automatically movable polarizer film can be operatively coupled to the facility's control system. For example, when a confidential presentation is scheduled in enclosure 5631, the second polarizer can be automatically placed in a position as illustrated at 5648.

56 shows an example of a facility 5660 having walls and/or partitions 5662 surrounding the environment of an enclosure 5661 . Wall 5662 can have a first transparent portion 5664 , a second transparent portion 5666 and a third transparent portion 5667 . A media display 5668 may be placed within an enclosure 5661 of a facility 5660, with a screen (a light emitting entity such as an OLED/TOLED) emitting light in the direction indicated by arrow 5670. A first polarizer (eg, polarizing film) 5672 is positioned in front of the media display 5668 to allow (eg, visible) light emitted from the media display 5668 to pass through the first polarizer 5672 . The first polarizer 5672 can be mounted to the screen and/or bezel of the media display 5668. The first polarizer 5672 can be disposed as part of the media display component of the media display 5668. An observer (e.g., an authorized and/or intended observer) 5674 positioned in the direction in which visible light is being emitted from the media display 5668 will view the media (e.g., polarized visible light) emitted from the media display 5668. can In FIG. 56 , visible light emitted from media display 5668 is directed towards a second observer (eg, an unlicensed observer) 5676 (eg, when viewed through transparent portion 5667 ). that he could potentially see). A second polarizer (polarizing film (offsetting polarizer)) 5678 is disposed adjacent to the transparent portion 5667 and prevents polarized light exiting the first polarizer 5672 from passing through the second polarizer 5678 ( eg blocking). The second polarizer 5678 can be disposed on a fixed or movable frame. The movable frame can be configured to allow (eg, easy) repositioning of the second polarizer based, for example, at least in part on the current position and/or orientation of the media display 5668. Thus, a second (unauthorized) observer 5676 is prevented (eg, prevented) from clearly viewing the media coming from the media display 5668.

In some embodiments, the display construction includes a transparent support structure, such as glass or any other material that is transparent to visible light, which may be configured to support the light emitting matrix of the emissive entity. The transparent support structure may be in the form of one or more windows, such as glass panes. For example, a display construction may include a display matrix (eg, an array of lights) disposed between two transparent support structures (eg, between two glass panes). The array of lights may include an array of colored lights. For example, there is an array of red, green and blue lights. For example, there is an array of cyan, magenta and yellow lights. The array of lights may include lighting colors used in electronic screen displays. The array of lights may include an array of LEDs (eg OLEDs, eg TOLEDs). A matrix display (eg, an array of lights) may be at least partially transparent (eg, to the average human eye) when not operating, such as when not projecting media, for example. Transparent OLEDs facilitate transitions of a significant fraction (e.g., greater than about 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 80%, 90% or 95%) of the intensity and/or wavelength perceived by the average human eye. can do. A matrix display may create minimal obstruction to a user viewing through the array, for example when the emitting entities are not projecting light. An array of lights may form minimal obstruction to a user viewing through a window in which the array is disposed, for example when the emitting entity is not projecting light. The display matrix (eg array of lights) may be maximally transparent, eg when the emitting entity is not projecting light. At least one (eg, glass) pane of the display construction may have a regular glass thickness. A regular (eg glass) window may have a thickness of at least about 1 millimeter (mm), 2 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm or 6 mm. A regular (eg, glass) window has a thickness between any of the foregoing values (eg, 1 mm to 6 mm, 1 mm to 3 mm, 3 mm to about 4 mm, or 4 mm to 6 mm). can have At least one (eg, glass) pane of the display construction may have a thin glass thickness. The thin (eg, glass) window may be up to about 0.4 millimeters (mm), 0.5 mm, 0.6 mm, 0.7 mm, 0.8 mm, or 0.9 mm thick. The thin (eg, glass) window may have a thickness between any of the above values (eg, 0.4 mm to 0.9 mm, 0.4 mm to 0.7 mm, or 0.5 mm to 0.9 mm). The transparent support structure (eg glass) of the display construction may be at least transmissive (eg in the visible spectrum). For example, a transparent support structure (eg, glass) may be at least about 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99% transmissive. The glass may have a transmittance percentage value between any of the foregoing percentages (eg, from about 80% to about 99%). The display construction may include one or more windows (eg, glass windows). For example, a display composition may include multiple (eg, two) windows. The windows may have (eg, substantially) the same thickness, or different thicknesses. The front facing window may be thicker than the rear facing window. The rear-facing window may be thicker than the front-facing window. Forward may be the direction of a prospective observer (eg, in front of the display composition 101, looking at the display composition 101). Backward may be the direction of the (eg, tintable) window (eg, 102). One transparent support structure (eg glass) may be thicker than the other transparent support structure (eg glass). The thicker transparent support structure (eg glass) may be at least about 1.25*, 1.5*, 2*, 2.5*, 3*, 3.5*, or 4* thicker than the thinner transparent support structure (eg glass). The symbol "*" represents the mathematical operation of "times". The transmittance of the display composition (including one or more windows and display matrix (eg, light array or LCD)) is at least about 20%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, or 90%. The display composition may have a transmittance percentage value between any of the foregoing percentages (e.g., from about 20% to about 90%, from about 20% to about 50%, from about 20% to about 40%, from about 30% to about 40% , about 40% to about 80%, or about 50% to about 90%). A higher transmittance percentage refers to a higher intensity and/or broader spectrum of light passing through a material (eg, glass). Transmittance may be that of visible light. Transmittance can be measured as visible light transmittance (abbreviated herein as "Tvis"), which refers to the amount of light in the visible portion of the spectrum that passes through a material. Transmittance may be related to the intensity of incident light. The display construction may transmit at least about 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99% of the visible spectrum (eg, wavelength spectrum) of light therethrough. The display composition may transmit a percentage value between any of the percentages described above (eg, about 80% to about 99%). The display construction may include a polarizer. A polarizer may be positioned in front of the display matrix in the direction in which light is projected from the emitting entity of the display matrix. The polarizer may be positioned between the transparent support structures (eg, glass windows) of the display construction.

57 shows an example of a display construction assembly 5700 prior to its lamination, which includes a thicker support structure (eg, glass window) 5705, a first adhesive layer 5704, a first polarizer (eg, polarizing film) 5720, a display matrix 5703, a second adhesive layer 5702, and a thinner support structure (e.g., a glass window) 5701, which matrix, via wiring 5711, Circuitry 5712 controls at least one aspect of the display configuration, which is coupled to fasteners 5713.

In some embodiments, a first polarizer may be mounted between the emitting entity of the media display and the intended (intended) viewer(s). An authorized and/or intended viewer(s) can view the projected media from the media display through the first polarizer. The first polarizer may be a polarized film. The polarizer can be (i) disposed on an exposed surface of the media display and/or (ii) mounted in front of and adjacent to the media display. The polarizer can be mounted on the screen of the media display. The polarizer may be mounted on the bezel of the media display. A polarizer may comprise part of a display composition. The polarizer of the display construction may be mounted within the display construction, such as during assembly of the display construction. Transparent partition(s) through which unauthorized and/or unintended observer(s) can view media projected by the media display may be determined. Determination of the transparent septum through which an unauthorized observer can view media depends on (i) the future intended orientation of the media display, (ii) the current orientation of the media display, and/or (iii) the emitting entity (e.g., visible) may be based, at least in part, on the direction in which to project the light. A second polarizer(s) may be mounted adjacent to or within the determined (e.g., identified) transparent septum(s), such second polarizer(s) reducing (e.g., canceling or blurring) light passing through the first polarizer. ring) (i.e., a canceling polarizer). Light from the emitting entity of the media display that passes through the first polarizer is then reduced (e.g., prevented or blocked) from passing through the second (cancellation) polarizer(s), thereby reducing the amount of light from the media display to the second (cancellation) polarizer(s). Attenuates (eg, prevents) viewing of the media by unauthorized and/or unintended observers on the opposite side. The second polarizer may be a polarized film. The second polarizer may be mounted on the exposed surface of the transparent barrier rib. The second polarizer may be mounted within a transparent septum (eg, within a display construction and/or other multi-layer transparent septum, for example when they are assembled). The second polarizer may be mounted adjacent to (eg, and spaced from) the transparent septum. The second polarizer can be mounted adjacent to (eg, in contact with) the transparent septum. The second polarizer may be mounted to the framing around the transparent septum (eg, mounted to at least one mullion and/or transom as part of the framing). The second polarizer can be mounted on a movable framing that can be easily moved, for example in front of one or more transparent septums. Such movement may be based at least in part on the current position and/or orientation of the media display. The transparent septum may include a tintable window. The transparent septum may include an optically switchable device. The transparent septum may include a controllable (eg, electrically) tintable device. The media display and the tintable device (eg, tintable window) may be operatively coupled to a control system (eg, the same control system). A control system may be any control system disclosed herein, such as a control system that controls a facility (eg, controls the security and/or environment of a facility).

58 illustrates an example of the operations involved in placing a polarizer on a media display to limit the viewer(s) that can view the media emitted from the media display. In operation 5801, a first polarizer is mounted between the emitting entity of the media display and the intended and/or intended viewer(s). Transparent partition(s) through which unauthorized viewer(s) can view media projected by the media display are determined in operation 5802 . In operation 5803, second polarizer(s) are mounted adjacent to or within the determined (e.g., identified) transparent septum(s), the second polarizer(s) oriented to cancel light passing through the first polarizer(s). (e.g., a canceling polarizer).

59 is an example of operations related to a method for allowing an authorized and/or intended viewer to view media emitted from a media display while preventing unauthorized and/or unintended viewers from viewing the media emitted from the media display. shows In operation 5901, a media display is activated wherein a first polarizer is disposed between the emitting entity of the media display and the intended and/or authorized observer(s), wherein the displayed media passes through the first polarizer; Observable by prospective user(s) (authorized and/or intended observer(s)). In operation 5902, the transparent septum(s) through which the media projected by the media display must not be visible to an unapproved and/or unintended viewer are determined, where the media display is an unapproved observer. is disposed on the opposite side of the transparent septum(s) from that. In operation 5903, a second polarizer is mounted adjacent to or within the transparent septum(s) and oriented such that it cancels the first polarizer (cancellation polarizer). In operation 5904, the media projected by the media display that passes through the first polarizer and is blocked (eg, canceled out) by the second (cancellation) polarizer prevents an unauthorized viewer from viewing the projected media.

Although preferred embodiments of the present invention have been shown and described herein, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that these embodiments are provided by way of example only. It is not intended that the present invention be limited by the specific examples provided within the specification. Although the present invention has been illustrated with reference to the foregoing specification, the description and illustration of the embodiments of this application should not be construed in a limiting sense. Numerous variations, modifications and substitutions will occur to those skilled in the art without departing from the invention. Moreover, it should be understood that all aspects of the invention are not limited to the specific depictions, configurations, or relative proportions described herein which depend on various conditions and variables. It should be understood that various alternatives to the embodiments of the invention described herein may be employed in practicing the invention. Accordingly, the present invention is contemplated to cover any such alternatives, modifications, variations or equivalents. The following claims define the scope of the invention and it is intended that methods and structures within the scope of these claims and their equivalents be included therein.

Claims (50)

As a device for media observation,
a first display matrix configured for viewing first media;
a second display matrix configured for viewing second media; and
An intermediate support structure - the intermediate support structure to (I) support the first display matrix and the second display matrix, and (II) take the first media from the first side of the intermediate support structure and to the first side. configured to facilitate viewing the second media from a second side of the intermediate support structure opposite to;
The device (i) is movable, (ii) a moiré pattern formed by any overlapping of the first display matrix and the second display matrix (

pattern), and/or (iii) allow viewing through the device when the first display matrix and the second display matrix stop projecting media. An apparatus for media viewing on a display configuration, said apparatus comprising at least one controller comprising circuitry, said at least one controller comprising:
(A) operably coupled to (a) a first display matrix configured for viewing a first media, and (b) a second display matrix configured for viewing a second media, the first display matrix and the second display matrix; 2 A display matrix is supported by an intermediate support structure, which (I) carries the first media from a first side of the intermediate support structure and (II) of the intermediate support structure opposite the first side. configured to facilitate viewing of the second media from a second side, the display arrangement comprising the first display matrix, the second display matrix, and the intermediate support structure, the display arrangement comprising: (i) a movable (ii) prevent the formation of a moiré pattern formed by any overlapping of the first display matrix and the second display matrix, and/or (iii) the first display matrix and the second display matrix configured to allow viewing through the display component when it ceases projecting media; and
(B) instruct the first display matrix to project the first media and/or instruct the second display matrix to project the second media. A non-transitory computer-readable medium for viewing media on a display configuration, the non-transitory computer-readable medium comprising at least one processor, the at least one processor configured to (a) view a first media. configured to be operably coupled to a first display matrix and (b) a second display matrix configured for viewing a second media, the first display matrix and the second display matrix being supported by an intermediate support structure; The intermediate support structure facilitates viewing (I) the first media from a first side of the intermediate support structure and (II) the second media from a second side of the intermediate support structure opposite the first side. wherein the display configuration includes the first display matrix, the second display matrix, and the intermediate support structure, the display configuration being (i) movable; (ii) the first display matrix and the intermediate support structure; and/or (iii) the display composition when the first display matrix and the second display matrix stop projecting media; wherein the non-transitory computer readable medium includes instructions written thereon which, when executed by the at least one processor, cause the at least one processor to: (A) the a non-transitory computer-readable program that causes execution of operations comprising instructing to project the first media onto the first display matrix and/or (B) directing to project the second media onto the second display matrix. media. A method of viewing media on a display arrangement, the method comprising projecting a first media by a first display matrix and/or projecting a second media by a second display matrix, the method comprising: projecting a first media by a first display matrix; A matrix and the second display matrix are supported by an intermediate support structure, the intermediate support structure (I) carrying the first media from a first side of the intermediate support structure and (II) the opposite side of the first side. configured to facilitate viewing the second media from a second side of an intermediate support structure, a display configuration comprising the first display matrix, the second display matrix, and the intermediate support structure, the display configuration comprising ( i) to be movable, (ii) to prevent formation of a moiré pattern formed by any overlapping of the first display matrix and the second display matrix, and/or (iii) to prevent the formation of the first display matrix and the second display matrix. configured to allow viewing through the display composition when a display matrix ceases projecting media. As a device for media observation,
a first window, the first window being configured for viewing therethrough, the first window having a first side exposed to a first external environment and a second side opposite the first side;
a first display matrix, the first display matrix configured for viewing a first media on a third side thereof in contact with a second side of the first window, the first display media being configured for viewing a first media opposite the third side; with 4 sides -;
a middle window, the middle window being configured for viewing therethrough, the middle window having a fifth side in contact with a fourth side of the first display matrix, and a sixth side opposite the fifth side;
a second display matrix, the second display matrix being configured for viewing a second media on a seventh side thereof in contact with the fifth side of the middle window, the second display media having an eighth side opposite the seventh side; including side parts; and
a second window, the second window being configured for viewing therethrough, the second window being opposite a ninth side contacting the eighth side of the second display arrangement and opposite the ninth side and being exposed to a second external environment; having a tenth side exposed to; A kit for operably coupling at least one device to a facility's existing framing system, comprising:
(i) defining an interior configured to receive the at least one device and at least one cable configured to be operably coupled to a local network of the facility; a framing cap portion having dimensions and a third dimension extending beyond a framing system of the facility, and (iii) configured to visibly conceal, camouflage with, and/or mimic the framing system; and
and an engagement aid configured to secure the framing cap portion to the facility's framing system. A method of operably coupling at least one device to an existing framing system of a facility, comprising:
coupling the at least one device to the facility's framing system;
defines an interior configured to receive at least one cable (i) configured to operably couple the at least one device and the local network of the facility; (ii) at least one of the framing system; having two dimensions that visibly mimic a portion and a third dimension that extends beyond the framing system, and (iii) concealed within a framing cap portion that visibly conceals, camouflages, and/or mimics the framing system. doing; and
releasably securing the framing cap portion to the framing system at least in part by using an engagement aid. A system for charging a mobile device in a facility, comprising:
a structure comprising a framing, framing portion, or real asset of the facility;
a charging device attached to the structure and/or incorporated within a cavity of the structure, constituting a wireless charging station configured to provide wireless charging to the mobile device; and
and the network of facilities configured to provide power to the charging device. A method of charging a mobile device at a facility comprising operation of any of the systems of claim 8 . A method of charging a mobile device in a facility, comprising: attaching and/or integrating a charging device constituting a wireless charging station to a structure and/or integrating into a cavity of the structure, the structure comprising a framing, framing portion, or real asset of the facility. Ham -;
wirelessly charging the mobile device through the wireless charging station; and
providing power to the charging device through the facility's network. An apparatus for charging a mobile device at a facility, comprising at least one controller configured to execute an operation of any of the systems of claim 8 . An apparatus for charging a mobile device at a facility, the apparatus comprising at least one controller, the at least one controller comprising:
(a) to be operatively coupled to a wireless charging station and network;
(b) enabling or directing the enabling of wireless charging of the mobile device via a wireless charging station comprising a charging device attached to and/or incorporated within a cavity of the structure, the structure framing the facility; , framing parts, or including real property -; and
(c) an apparatus configured, individually or collectively, to provide or direct the provision of power to the charging device over the facility's network. 9. Non-transitory computer-readable program instructions for charging a mobile device at a facility, the non-transitory computer-readable program instructions, when read by one or more processors, cause the one or more processors to: Non-transitory computer readable program instructions that cause execution of, or direct the execution of, operations of. Non-transitory computer readable program instructions for charging a mobile device at a facility, the non-transitory computer program instructions, when read by one or more processors operably coupled to a wireless charging station and a network, to the one or more processors cause, individually or collectively,
(a) enabling or directing the enabling of wireless charging of mobile devices via a wireless charging station comprising a charging device attached to and/or incorporated within a cavity of said structure, said structure being framing of said facility; , framing parts, or including real property -; and
(b) non-transitory computer readable program instructions that cause execution of operations comprising providing or instructing the provision of power to the charging device over a network of the facility. A kit for operably coupling at least one device to a network, comprising:
(i) defines thermal coupling to the device, wherein the device is configured to enclose electronics and to be operatively coupled to a network of facilities in which the device is located, (ii) has a heat dissipation portion, (iii) ) a heat sink configured to be removably coupled to the device to facilitate dissipation of heat from the device, and (iv) configured to be removably mountable to structures and/or fixtures of the facility; wherein the heat sink is separate from the device. A method for installing a kit in a facility comprising using the kit of claim 15 . 16. A method for installing a kit in a facility, comprising using the kit of claim 15, wherein using the kit comprises removably coupling the heat sink to the device or removing the heat sink from the device. disengaging a heat sink to facilitate reversibly (i) coupling the heat sink to the device and (ii) disengaging the heat sink from the device. As a method for installing a kit in a facility,
operatively coupling a device to a network of the facility in which the device is deployed, the device being configured to enclose electronics;
coupling a heat sink to the device, the heat sink having a heat dissipation portion and being separate from the device;
removably coupling the heat sink to the device to facilitate dissipation of heat from the device to the heat sink; and
removably mounting the heat sink to structures and/or fixtures of the facility. A method for removing a kit from a facility surrounding at least one device operably coupled to a network, comprising:
disengaging the heat sink from the device to which the heat sink is coupled such that coupling of the heat sink and device facilitates dissipation of heat from the device to the heat sink, wherein the heat sink has a heat dissipation portion and is coupled to the device; separate, and the device is configured to enclose electronics;
disengaging the heat sink from the device; and
dismounting the heat sink from structures and/or fixtures of the facility. A device for viewing media on a media display, comprising:
a first polarizer mounted between an emitting entity of the media display and a first expected position of an authorized observer;
The emitting entity is configured to project the media towards the authorized user, the first polarizer such that light flowing from the emitting entity through the first polarizer and to the authorized viewer is directed to the first polarizer of the authorized viewer. configured to be blocked from flowing through a second polarizer disposed between the expected position and a second expected position of an unauthorized observer separated from the authorized observer by a transparent and/or translucent barrier;
the partition is positioned between the first expected position and the second expected position such that an emitting entity of the media display projects the media towards the partition;
wherein the first polarizer is configured to cancel transmission of visible light emitted by the emitting entity by the second polarizer. 21. The device of claim 20, wherein the media display is an organic light emitting diode display and/or a transparent light emitting diode display. 21. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the bulkhead comprises a transparent and/or translucent window, a transparent and/or translucent wall, and/or a transparent and/or translucent door. 21. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the bulkhead comprises at least a portion of an exterior wall of the facility. 21. The method of claim 20, wherein the barrier rib is glass, polycarbonate plastic, poly methyl methacrylate (PMMA or acrylic), polyethylene terephthalate (PET), amorphous copolyester (PETG), polyvinyl chloride (PVC), liquid silicone Rubber (LSR) Liquid Silicone Rubber (LSR), Cyclic Olefin Copolymer, Polyethylene (PE), Ionomer Resin, Transparent Polypropylene (PP), Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene (FEP), Styrene Methyl Methacrylate (SMMA), Styrene Acrylo A device comprising nitrile resin (SAN), polystyrene (general purpose - GPPS), or methyl methacrylate acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (MABS). 21. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the first polarizer is mounted on or is part of a screen of the media display. 21. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the first polarizer is mounted on or within a display configuration that is the media display. 27. The apparatus of claim 26, wherein the first polarizer is mounted within the display configuration between an outer panel of the display configuration and the emissive entity. 21. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the first polarizer is configured to be mounted on a frame movable between the first expected position and the septum. 21. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the bulkhead comprises a display structure, and wherein the second polarizer is configured to be mounted to, is part of, and/or is disposed within the display structure. 21. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the second polarizer is configured to be mounted on a frame movable between the first expected position and the second expected position. 21. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the media display is configured to be operably coupled to an ensemble of devices disposed within a facility of the media display. 32. The apparatus of claim 31, wherein the device ensemble comprises (i) a sensor, (ii) a sensor and an emitter, or (iii) a sensor and a transceiver. 32. The device of claim 31, wherein the device ensemble is configured to (i) facilitate environmental control of the facility, (ii) facilitate location of personnel and/or assets within the facility, (iii) one or more other devices of the facility. and/or (iv) facilitate facility management. 21. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the media display is configured to be coupled to a network that facilitates control of other functions of the facility of the media display. 21. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the media display is configured to be coupled to a network having a cable configured to transmit both communication and power. 21. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the media display is configured to be coupled to a network configured to transmit cellular communications, control communications, still image communications, video communications, sensor data, other media communications, or other data communications. 21. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the media display is configured to be coupled to a network configured to transmit one or more protocols including at least one data communication protocol for automatic control of a subsystem. 21. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the media display is configured to be coupled to a network configured to transmit infrared (IR) signals and/or radio frequency (RF) signals. 39. The apparatus of claim 38, wherein the radio frequency comprises ultra-wideband radiation. 21. The media display of claim 20, wherein the media display is configured to be coupled to a network configured to be operatively coupled to a power source and configured to transmit power, wherein the power source is, optionally, a main power source, a backup power generator, or an uninterruptible power source. A device, including an uninterrupted power source (UPS). 21. The method of claim 20, wherein the media display is configured to be coupled to a network configured to transmit a signal representative of energy or power consumption, wherein the power consumption is, optionally, power by a heating system, a cooling system, and/or lighting. wherein the signal optionally facilitates monitoring power consumption of an individual room or group of rooms. 21. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the media display is configured to be coupled to a network configured to (i) utilize a radio frequency signal and/or (ii) utilize at least one wireless protocol that facilitates communication with one or more sensors. Becoming device. 43. The apparatus of claim 42, wherein the radio frequency comprises ultra-wideband radiation. 21. The apparatus of claim 20, wherein the media display is configured to be coupled to a control system of a facility of the media display. 45. The apparatus of claim 44, wherein the control system comprises a distributed controller having a hierarchical structure. 45. The apparatus of claim 44, wherein at least one controller of the control system is located external to the facility. 45. The system of claim 44, wherein the control system is configured to (i) control the environment of the facility, (ii) position personnel and/or assets within the facility, and (iii) control one or more other devices of the facility. , and/or (iv) configured to manage the facility. 48. A method for viewing media on a media display comprising providing and/or using any component of an apparatus of any one of claims 20-47. CLAIMS 1. A method for viewing media on a media display comprising: mounting a first polarizer between an emitting entity of the media display and a first expected position of an authorized viewer;
The emitting entity is configured to project the media towards the authorized user, the first polarizer such that light flowing from the emitting entity through the first polarizer and to the authorized viewer is directed to the first polarizer of the authorized viewer. configured to be blocked from flowing through a second polarizer disposed between the expected position and a second expected position of an unauthorized observer separated from the authorized observer by a transparent and/or translucent barrier;
the partition is positioned between the first expected position and the second expected position such that an emitting entity of the media display projects the media towards the partition;
wherein the first polarizer is configured to cancel transmission of visible light emitted by the second polarizer by the emitting entity, and wherein the visible light is directed in a direction of the first polarizer and the second polarizer. A method for obstructing viewing of media on a media display, the method comprising: considering a first polarizer while mounting a second polarizer;
the first polarizer is disposed between an emitting entity of the media display and a first expected position of an applied viewer;
The emitting entity is configured to project the media towards the authorized user, the first polarizer such that light flowing from the emitting entity through the first polarizer and to the authorized viewer is directed to the first polarizer of the authorized viewer. configured to be blocked from flowing through the second polarizer disposed between the expected position and a second expected position of an unauthorized observer separated from the authorized observer by a transparent and/or translucent barrier;
the partition is positioned between the first expected position and the second expected position such that an emitting entity of the media display projects the media towards the partition;
wherein the second polarizer is configured to cancel transmission of visible light emitted by the first polarizer by the emitting entity, and wherein the visible light is directed in a direction of the first polarizer and the second polarizer.

Images